Xerox® AltaLink® Series Multifunction Printer

Version 2.1

October 2019

702P07191

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction

Printer

System Administrator Guide

, Xerox and Design

, AltaLink

, FreeFlow

, SMARTsend

, Scan

to PC Desktop

, MeterAssistant

, SuppliesAssistant

, Xerox Secure Access Unified ID System

, Xerox Extensible

Interface Platform

, Global Print Driver

, and Mobile Express Driver

are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the

United States and / or other countries.

Adobe

, Adobe PDF logo, Adobe

Reader

, Adobe

Type Manager

, ATM

™

, Flash

, Macromedia

, Photoshop

, and

PostScript

are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc.

Apple

, Bonjour

, EtherTalk

™

, TrueType

, iPad

, iPhone

, iPod

, iPod touch

, AirPrint

and the AirPrint Logo

, Mac

Mac OS

, and Macintosh

are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.

Google Cloud Print

™

web printing service, Gmail

™

webmail service, and Android

™

mobile technology platform are

trademarks of Google, Inc.

HP-GL

, HP-UX

, and PCL

are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation in the United States and/or

other countries.

IBM

and AIX

are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and/or

other countries.

McAfee

, ePolicy Orchestrator

, and McAfee ePO

™

are trademarks or registered trademarks of McAfee, Inc. in the

United States and other countries.

Microsoft

, Windows Vista

, Windows

, Windows Server

, and OneDrive

are registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Mopria is a trademark of the Mopria Alliance.

Novell

, NetWare

, NDPS

, NDS

, IPX

™

, and Novell Distributed Print Services™ are trademarks or registered

trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

PANTONE

and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.

SGI

and IRIX

are registered trademarks of Silicon Graphics International Corp. or its subsidiaries in the United

States and/or other countries.

Sun, Sun Microsystems, and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates in the

United States and other countries.

UNIX

is a trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/ Open Company Limited.

Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Wi-Fi Direct

is a trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Table of Contents

1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................13

Overview................................................................................................................................ 14

Configuration Steps ......................................................................................................... 14

More Information .................................................................................................................. 15

2 Initial Setup .............................................................................................................................17

Physically Connecting the Printer ........................................................................................... 18

Assigning a Network Address ................................................................................................. 19

Connecting the Device to a Wireless Network......................................................................... 20

Accessing Administration and Configuration Settings............................................................. 21

Accessing the Control Panel as a System Administrator.................................................... 21

Accessing the Embedded Web Server as a System Administrator...................................... 21

Using the Search Function in the Embedded Web Server.................................................. 22

Printing the Configuration Report..................................................................................... 22

Initial Setup at the Control Panel ........................................................................................... 24

Installation Wizard .......................................................................................................... 24

Using the Installation Wizard........................................................................................... 24

Configuring the Additional Install Options ....................................................................... 25

Setting the Measurement Units ....................................................................................... 25

Installing Optional Software Features .............................................................................. 25

Initial Setup in the Embedded Web Server ............................................................................. 27

Restricting Access to the Printer ....................................................................................... 27

Using the Configuration Overview Page ........................................................................... 28

Assigning a Name and Location to the Printer.................................................................. 28

Selecting Services to Appear on the Touch Screen ............................................................ 29

Installing Optional Software Features .............................................................................. 29

Supplies Plan Activation Code .......................................................................................... 30

Physical Connection Settings............................................................................................ 30

Changing the System Administrator Password........................................................................ 32

Changing the System Administrator Password at the Control Panel.................................. 32

Setting the Date and Time..................................................................................................... 33

Setting the Date and Time in the Embedded Web Server ................................................. 33

Setting the Date and Time at the Control Panel ............................................................... 33

3 Network Connectivity.............................................................................................................35

Connecting to a Wireless Network.......................................................................................... 36

Connecting to a Wireless Network Using the Wireless Wizard........................................... 36

Connecting to a Wireless Network in the Embedded Web Server ...................................... 37

Verifying the Wireless Status and Viewing the Wireless IP Address ................................... 38

Configuring Wireless Settings Manually ........................................................................... 38

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Connecting Directly to a Wireless Network ....................................................................... 40

Wi-Fi Direct............................................................................................................................ 41

Configuring Wi-Fi Direct................................................................................................... 41

Disabling Wi-Fi Direct ...................................................................................................... 42

AirPrint .................................................................................................................................. 43

Configuring AirPrint ......................................................................................................... 43

Bonjour.................................................................................................................................. 45

Google Cloud Print Service ..................................................................................................... 46

Google Cloud Print Service Options .................................................................................. 47

Registering the Printer for Google Cloud Print Service ....................................................... 47

Configuring Google Cloud Print Options ........................................................................... 48

Google Cloud Print Troubleshooting ................................................................................. 48

Mopria................................................................................................................................... 49

Configuring Mopria.......................................................................................................... 49

USB Settings.......................................................................................................................... 50

Configuring USB Connection Mode .................................................................................. 50

Configuring USB Port State in Sleep Mode ....................................................................... 50

USB Port Security............................................................................................................. 51

FTP/SFTP Filing...................................................................................................................... 52

Configuring FTP and SFTP Filing Settings......................................................................... 52

HTTP ..................................................................................................................................... 53

Enabling HTTP at the Control Panel ................................................................................. 53

Configuring HTTP Settings in the Embedded Web Server.................................................. 53

Accessing HTTP Web Services .......................................................................................... 54

HTTP Web Services .......................................................................................................... 54

Accessing HTTP Advanced Settings .................................................................................. 54

HTTP Advanced Settings .................................................................................................. 54

IP .......................................................................................................................................... 55

Enabling TCP/IP ............................................................................................................... 55

Configuring the Network Address Manually at the Control Panel ...................................... 55

Configuring DNS Settings at the Control Panel................................................................. 55

Configuring IP Settings in the Embedded Web Server....................................................... 56

IPP......................................................................................................................................... 60

Configuring IPP................................................................................................................ 60

LDAP...................................................................................................................................... 62

Adding LDAP Server Information...................................................................................... 62

Managing LDAP Servers in the Embedded Web Server...................................................... 62

Configuring LDAP Server Optional Information ................................................................ 62

Configuring a Secure LDAP Connection ............................................................................ 63

LDAP Server Contexts....................................................................................................... 64

Configuring LDAP User Mappings..................................................................................... 64

LDAP Custom Filters......................................................................................................... 65

LPR/LPD................................................................................................................................. 67

NFC ....................................................................................................................................... 68

NTP ....................................................................................................................................... 69

POP3 ..................................................................................................................................... 70

Table of Contents

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Proxy Server........................................................................................................................... 71

Configuring the Proxy Server............................................................................................ 71

Raw TCP/IP Printing ............................................................................................................... 72

Configuring Raw TCP/IP Settings ..................................................................................... 72

Configuring Raw TCP/IP Advanced Settings...................................................................... 72

SLP ........................................................................................................................................ 74

Configuring SLP ............................................................................................................... 74

ThinPrint Client ...................................................................................................................... 75

ThinPrint Client Certificate Requirements ......................................................................... 75

Configuring a ThinPrint Client .......................................................................................... 75

SMB Filing ............................................................................................................................. 77

Configuring Kerberos Authentication Options for SMB ..................................................... 77

SMTP Server .......................................................................................................................... 78

Configuring SMTP Server Settings .................................................................................... 78

Configuring SMTP Authentication Settings....................................................................... 78

Configuring SMTP Connection Encryption Settings........................................................... 79

Configuring SMTP File Size Management......................................................................... 79

Testing SMTP Configuration Settings ............................................................................... 79

SNMP .................................................................................................................................... 80

Enabling SNMP ................................................................................................................ 80

Configuring SNMPv1/v2c ................................................................................................. 80

Configuring SNMPv3........................................................................................................ 81

Configuring SNMP Advanced Settings .............................................................................. 82

WSD ...................................................................................................................................... 83

Enabling WSD.................................................................................................................. 83

4 Security .....................................................................................................................................85

Setting Access Rights ............................................................................................................. 86

Authentication................................................................................................................. 86

Authorization................................................................................................................... 87

Personalization ................................................................................................................ 87

Configuring Authentication Settings ...................................................................................... 88

Configuring Local Authentication Settings ....................................................................... 88

Configuring Network Authentication Settings .................................................................. 91

Configuring Xerox Secure Access Unified ID System Authentication Settings ................... 93

Configuring Convenience Authentication Settings............................................................ 94

Configuring Smart Card Authentication Settings.............................................................. 96

Configuring Authorization Settings ........................................................................................ 99

Setting the Authorization Method.................................................................................... 99

Configuring Local Authorization Settings ......................................................................... 99

Configuring Network Authorization Settings .................................................................... 99

User Permissions ............................................................................................................ 100

HTTPS (TLS)......................................................................................................................... 108

Using TLS for all HTTP Communication (HTTPS)............................................................. 108

FIPS 140-2........................................................................................................................... 109

Table of Contents

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

FIPS 140 Mode .............................................................................................................. 109

FIPS 140 Mode with Common Criteria Compliance ........................................................ 109

FIPS Enablement Workflow and Configuration Checks ................................................... 109

Enabling FIPS 140 Mode and Checking for Compliance.................................................. 109

FIPS Configuration Check .............................................................................................. 110

FIPS Status .................................................................................................................... 111

Stored Data Encryption........................................................................................................ 112

Enabling Encryption of Stored Data ............................................................................... 112

IP Filtering........................................................................................................................... 113

Creating or Editing an IP Filter Rule ............................................................................... 113

Editing an IP Filter Rule.................................................................................................. 113

Arranging the Execution Order of IP Filter Rules ............................................................. 113

Audit Log............................................................................................................................. 115

Enabling Audit Log......................................................................................................... 115

Enabling Automatic Log Transfer ................................................................................... 115

Enabling Protocol Logs................................................................................................... 116

Saving an Audit Log....................................................................................................... 116

Saving an Audit Log to a USB Flash Drive....................................................................... 116

Interpreting the Audit Log ............................................................................................. 116

Network Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................... 118

Support Logs........................................................................................................................ 119

McAfee Embedded Control................................................................................................... 120

Setting the Security Level............................................................................................... 120

Setting the Alert Options ............................................................................................... 121

Downloading the Audit Log ........................................................................................... 122

Testing Your Alert Configuration..................................................................................... 122

Feedback Method Test Results........................................................................................ 122

IPsec.................................................................................................................................... 123

IPsec Configuration Components ................................................................................... 123

Managing Security Policies............................................................................................. 123

Managing Host Groups .................................................................................................. 124

Managing Protocol Groups............................................................................................. 124

Managing Actions.......................................................................................................... 125

Enabling IPsec ............................................................................................................... 127

Security Certificates ............................................................................................................. 129

Installing Certificates..................................................................................................... 129

Creating and Installing a Xerox® Device Certificate....................................................... 130

Installing the Device Root Certificate Authority.............................................................. 130

Creating a Certificate Signing Request ........................................................................... 132

Installing Root Certificates............................................................................................. 133

Installing Domain Controller Certificates........................................................................ 133

Viewing, Saving, or Deleting a Certificate....................................................................... 134

Specifying the Minimum Certificate Key Length............................................................. 134

802.1X................................................................................................................................. 136

Enabling and Configuring 802.1X in the Embedded Web Server ..................................... 136

System Timeout................................................................................................................... 138

Setting System Timeout Values...................................................................................... 138

Table of Contents

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Overwriting Image Data ...................................................................................................... 139

Manually Deleting Image Data...................................................................................... 139

Scheduling Routine Deletion of Image Data .................................................................. 140

Immediate Job Overwrite............................................................................................... 141

PostScript Passwords............................................................................................................ 142

Enabling or Creating PostScript Passwords ..................................................................... 142

Hiding User Names on the Control Panel.............................................................................. 143

Verifying the Software ......................................................................................................... 144

Restricting Print File Software Updates................................................................................. 145

Specifying Email and Internet Fax Recipient Restrictions ...................................................... 146

System Administrator Password ........................................................................................... 147

Enabling the Administrator Password Reset.................................................................... 147

Disabling the Administrator Password Reset................................................................... 147

5 Printing................................................................................................................................... 149

Paper Management ............................................................................................................. 150

Setting Default Paper Type and Color............................................................................. 150

Enabling Required Paper Policies .................................................................................... 150

Setting Paper Size Preference ......................................................................................... 151

Selecting Paper Tray Settings ......................................................................................... 151

Selecting Tray 1 or Tray 2 Settings ................................................................................. 152

Configuring Custom Media Types................................................................................... 153

Saving and Reprinting Jobs .................................................................................................. 155

Enabling the Reprint Saved Jobs Feature ........................................................................ 155

Creating and Managing Saved Jobs Folders ................................................................... 155

Saving and Printing Jobs ................................................................................................ 156

Backing Up Saved Jobs .................................................................................................. 156

Restoring Saved Jobs from an FTP Repository................................................................. 157

Printing Jobs from the Embedded Web Server ...................................................................... 158

Configuring General Print Settings ....................................................................................... 159

Printing an Error Sheet ......................................................................................................... 160

Managing Banner Page Printing Options.............................................................................. 161

Enabling Banner Page Printing in the Embedded Web Server.......................................... 161

Enabling Banner Page Printing at the Control Panel ....................................................... 161

Enabling Banner Page Printing in the Print Driver ........................................................... 161

Configuring Secure Print Settings ......................................................................................... 163

Configuring Secure Print Device Policies ......................................................................... 163

Configuring Secure Print Driver Defaults......................................................................... 163

Hold All Jobs ........................................................................................................................ 164

Configuring the Hold all Jobs Feature............................................................................. 164

Showing Printer Font Information ........................................................................................ 165

UNIX, Linux, and AS/400 Printing......................................................................................... 166

Xerox

Printer Manager ................................................................................................. 166

Printing from a Linux Workstation .................................................................................. 167

Adding the Printer.......................................................................................................... 167

Table of Contents

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Printing with CUPS......................................................................................................... 167

AS/400 .......................................................................................................................... 167

Print from USB ..................................................................................................................... 169

Enabling Print from USB................................................................................................. 169

Print from Mailbox ............................................................................................................... 170

Enabling Print From Mailbox .......................................................................................... 170

Allowing Users to Interrupt Active Print Jobs ........................................................................ 171

Specifying Output Settings .................................................................................................. 172

6 Copying.................................................................................................................................. 173

Setting Copy Presets ............................................................................................................ 174

Specifying Default Copy Settings ................................................................................... 174

Specifying Feature Defaults for Copy Settings at the Control Panel ................................ 174

Setting the Color Presets Screen ..................................................................................... 174

Setting Edge Erase Presets ............................................................................................. 175

Setting Image Shift Presets............................................................................................ 175

Setting Reduce/Enlarge Presets ...................................................................................... 176

Setting the Reading Order Options................................................................................. 176

Disabling Automatic Image Rotation ............................................................................. 176

Specifying ID Card Copy Settings......................................................................................... 177

Setting ID Card Copy Defaults ....................................................................................... 177

Specifying Output Settings .................................................................................................. 178

7 Scanning................................................................................................................................ 179

Scanning to an Email Address .............................................................................................. 180

Email ............................................................................................................................. 180

Workflow Scanning .............................................................................................................. 185

Enabling Workflow Scanning.......................................................................................... 185

Configuring File Repository Settings............................................................................... 185

Configuring the Default Workflow .................................................................................. 189

Configuring Workflow Scanning General Settings........................................................... 190

Configuring Single-Touch App ........................................................................................ 191

Configuring Custom File Naming ................................................................................... 192

Setting Workflow Display Settings for the Control Panel ................................................. 192

Enabling Remote Scanning using TWAIN ....................................................................... 193

Configuring a Validation Server...................................................................................... 193

Configuring Workflow Pool Repository Settings .............................................................. 193

Configuring Unspecified Defaults................................................................................... 194

Managing Scan Workflows............................................................................................. 194

Scanning to a Folder on the Device ...................................................................................... 196

Enabling or Disabling Scan to Mailbox ........................................................................... 196

Setting Scan Policies ...................................................................................................... 196

Managing Folders and Scanned Files.............................................................................. 197

Scan to USB......................................................................................................................... 200

Enabling Scan to USB .................................................................................................... 200

Scanning to a User Home Folder .......................................................................................... 201

Table of Contents

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Configuring Scan To............................................................................................................. 203

Before You Begin ........................................................................................................... 203

Configuring Default Scan Settings.................................................................................. 203

Configuring Default Scan Settings for Address Books ..................................................... 204

Configuring Default Scan Settings for Security ............................................................... 204

Configuring the Printer for the Xerox

Scan Utility ............................................................... 205

8 Faxing..................................................................................................................................... 207

Fax Overview........................................................................................................................ 208

Fax ...................................................................................................................................... 209

Configuring Required Fax Settings at the Control Panel.................................................. 209

Configuring Embedded Fax Settings............................................................................... 209

Fax Security ................................................................................................................... 210

Setting Fax Defaults....................................................................................................... 210

Setting Fax Feature Defaults .......................................................................................... 213

Fax Forwarding .............................................................................................................. 213

Fax Mailboxes................................................................................................................ 215

Fax Reports.................................................................................................................... 215

Internet Fax......................................................................................................................... 222

Accessing the Internet Fax Setup Page........................................................................... 222

LAN Fax ............................................................................................................................... 225

9 Accounting............................................................................................................................ 227

Xerox

Standard Accounting................................................................................................ 228

Enabling Xerox Standard Accounting ............................................................................. 228

Setting Service Tracking Options .................................................................................... 228

General and Group Accounts.......................................................................................... 228

Adding a User and Setting Usage Limits ........................................................................ 229

Managing User Information .......................................................................................... 230

Assigning Users to an Account ....................................................................................... 233

Usage Limits.................................................................................................................. 233

Configuring Validation Policies and Print Job Exceptions ................................................ 234

Network Accounting ............................................................................................................ 236

Enabling Network Accounting ........................................................................................ 236

Setting Network Accounting Workflow Options .............................................................. 236

Configuring Job Limits Server Settings ........................................................................... 236

Disabling the Job Limits Web App .................................................................................. 237

Configuring User Prompts .............................................................................................. 237

Configuring Validation Policies and Print Job Exceptions ................................................ 237

Accounting Using an Auxiliary Access Device ....................................................................... 240

Enabling Accounting Using an Auxiliary Access Device................................................... 240

Displaying Your Company Logo on the Blocking Screen.................................................. 240

Setting the Auxiliary Device Type ................................................................................... 241

Selecting Apps to Restrict or Track.................................................................................. 241

Setting the Job Timeout ................................................................................................ 241

Specifying Double Count Large Impressions................................................................... 241

Premium Select.............................................................................................................. 242

Table of Contents

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Enabling Accounting in Print Drivers..................................................................................... 243

Enabling Accounting in a Windows Print Driver .............................................................. 243

Enabling Accounting in an Apple Macintosh Print Driver................................................. 243

Printing a Copy Activity Report............................................................................................. 244

10 Administrator Tools........................................................................................................... 245

Viewing Device Status and Configuring Frequently Used Functions ...................................... 246

Display Device Information.................................................................................................. 248

Customizing Device Contact Information ............................................................................. 249

Configuring Alerts ................................................................................................................ 250

Control Panel Alerts........................................................................................................ 250

Email Alerts ................................................................................................................... 251

Status LED and Sounds .................................................................................................. 251

Energy Saving Settings ........................................................................................................ 254

Setting Energy Saver Mode ............................................................................................ 254

Configuring USB Port State in Sleep Mode ..................................................................... 255

Remote Control Panel .......................................................................................................... 257

Entry Screen Defaults........................................................................................................... 258

Selecting the Entry Screen Defaults................................................................................ 258

Remote Services................................................................................................................... 259

Configuring Remote Services.......................................................................................... 259

Remote Server Management................................................................................................ 260

Configuring a Remote Management Server Connection ................................................. 260

Fleet Orchestrator ................................................................................................................ 261

Software Upgrade Files.................................................................................................. 261

Clone Files ..................................................................................................................... 263

1-Touch Add-On Files ..................................................................................................... 265

Automatic File Sharing................................................................................................... 267

Cloning ................................................................................................................................ 274

Creating and Installing a Clone File in the Embedded Web Server .................................. 274

Creating a Clone File on a USB Flash Drive..................................................................... 274

Installing a Clone File from a USB Flash Drive ................................................................ 274

Language and Keyboard ...................................................................................................... 276

Setting Language and Keyboard Options ....................................................................... 276

Backup and Restore Settings................................................................................................ 278

Setting the Security Installation Policy for Backup and Restore....................................... 278

Restoring Settings.......................................................................................................... 278

Creating a Manual Backup File that is Stored on the Device ........................................... 279

Creating and Downloading a Backup File ....................................................................... 279

Deleting a Backup File ................................................................................................... 279

Billing Impression Mode....................................................................................................... 280

Changing the Billing Impression Mode........................................................................... 280

Configuration Watchdog...................................................................................................... 281

Configuring the Configuration Watchdog Feature .......................................................... 281

Address Books...................................................................................................................... 282

Table of Contents

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Device Address Book ...................................................................................................... 282

Network Address Book ................................................................................................... 286

LAN Fax Address Book.................................................................................................... 287

Font Management Utility..................................................................................................... 288

Network Logs....................................................................................................................... 289

Downloading a Network Log .......................................................................................... 289

Downloading a Network Log to a USB Flash Drive.......................................................... 289

Restarting the Device in the Embedded Web Server.............................................................. 290

Restarting the Device at the Control Panel ........................................................................... 291

Taking the Device Offline ..................................................................................................... 292

Erase Customer Data ........................................................................................................... 293

Resetting the User Interface to Factory Default Settings ...................................................... 294

Reverting to Previous Settings .............................................................................................. 295

Updating the Device Software ............................................................................................. 296

Updating the Software in the Embedded Web Server ..................................................... 296

Manually Updating the Software Using a USB Flash Drive ............................................. 296

Adjusting Color, Image, and Text Detection Settings ............................................................ 297

11 Customization and Expansion........................................................................................ 299

Xerox Extensible Interface Platform ..................................................................................... 300

Configuring Extensible Services ...................................................................................... 300

Extensible Service Scan Settings..................................................................................... 301

Extensible Service Diagnostics........................................................................................ 301

Extensible Service Setup for Apps................................................................................... 301

Extensible Service Advanced Setup ................................................................................ 302

Auxiliary Interface Kit .......................................................................................................... 303

Driver Download Link ........................................................................................................... 304

Customizing or Hiding the Driver Download Link ............................................................ 304

Customizing the Home Screen in the Embedded Web Server ................................................ 305

Displaying or Hiding Apps .............................................................................................. 305

Setting the Display Order for Apps ................................................................................. 305

Customizing the Home Screen at the Control Panel.............................................................. 306

Rearranging Apps on the Home Screen .......................................................................... 306

Displaying or Hiding an App on the Home Screen .......................................................... 306

Deleting an App from the Home Screen ......................................................................... 306

Customizing App Features.............................................................................................. 307

Customizing App Default Settings.................................................................................. 307

Removing App Customization Settings........................................................................... 307

Removing Customization from the Home Screen............................................................ 308

1-Touch Apps ....................................................................................................................... 309

Creating a 1-Touch App ................................................................................................. 309

Setting Defaults and Policies for Scan Services ..................................................................... 310

Setting the Filename Extension...................................................................................... 310

Setting Duplex Color Scanning Options .......................................................................... 310

Creating a Custom Scan App ............................................................................................... 311

Table of Contents

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Creating a Custom Single-Touch Scan App Overview ...................................................... 311

Creating a Single-Touch Scan App.................................................................................. 311

Customizing and Configuring Your App .......................................................................... 311

Locking or Hiding Your App from Appearing on the Control Panel................................... 313

Weblet Management ........................................................................................................... 314

Setting the Security Policy for Unencrypted Weblets ...................................................... 314

Installing a Weblet......................................................................................................... 314

Configuring Weblet Settings .......................................................................................... 315

Configuring Xerox

App Gallery Settings........................................................................ 315

Managing Diagnostics and Usage Information .................................................................... 317

Editing Support Settings ...................................................................................................... 318

A Audit Log Event Identification Numbers ........................................................................ 319

Audit Log Event Identification Numbers............................................................................... 320

B External Keyboard................................................................................................................ 327

External Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................................................ 328

Table of Contents

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Introduction

This chapter contains:

• Overview.................................................................................................................................... 14

• More Information ...................................................................................................................... 15

Overview

This guide is designed for a system administrator with network administrator rights, who understands

networking concepts and has experience creating and managing network user accounts.

Use this guide to help you install, configure, and manage your printer on a network.

Note:

• Not all features are supported on all devices. Some features apply only to a specific device

model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

• Embedded fax features are not available for all printer models.

CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn SStteeppss

When you configure the device for the first time, complete the following tasks.

1. Ensure that your device is connected physically to your network, and to the fax line, as needed.

2. Confirm that your device is recognized on your network. By default, the device is configured to

receive an IP address from a DHCP server over a TCP/IP network. If you have another type of

network, or want to assign a static IP address, refer to IP.

3. Complete the installation wizards. These wizards help you configure basic device settings such as

your location, time zone, and date and time preferences.

4. Print a configuration report listing the current device configuration. Review the report and locate

the device IPv4 address. For details, refer to Printing the Configuration Report.

5. Open a Web browser and type the IP address of your device to access the Embedded Web Server.

The Embedded Web Server is the administration and configuration software installed on the

device. For details, refer to Accessing the Embedded Web Server as a System Administrator.

Note: You can access most configuration settings on the Properties tab in the Embedded

Web Server.

6. Print the Configuration Checklist. The Configuration Checklist provides space for you to write

down important information as you go through the configuration process. Use it to record

information about your network settings, including passwords, network paths, and server

addresses. To access the checklist, in the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Configuration

Overview, then click View Checklist.

7. Create a host name for the device. For details, refer to DNS.

8. Configure Authentication. For details, refer to Setting Access Rights.

9. Configure Security. For details, refer to Security.

10. Enable services in the Embedded Web Server. For details, refer to Selecting Services to Appear on

the Touch Screen.

11. Configure Print, Scan, and Fax features. For details, refer to Printing, Scanning, and Faxing.

12. Configure Accounting. For details, refer to Accounting.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a

specific device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Introduction

More Information

You can obtain more information about your printer from these sources:

Resource Location

Installation Guide Packaged with the printer.

Other documentation for your printer Go to www.support.xerox.com, then select your

specific printer model.

Recommended Media List United States: www.xerox.com/rmlna

Europe: www.xerox.com/rmleu

Technical support information for your printer,

including online technical support, Online Support

Assistant, and print driver downloads.

Go to www.support.xerox.com, then select your

specific printer model.

Information about menus or error messages View the Status region of the control panel touch

screen.

Information Pages To print from the control panel, touch

Device→Information Pages.

To print from the Embedded Web Server, click

Home→Information Pages.

Embedded Web Server documentation In the Embedded Web Server, click Help.

Order supplies for your printer Go to www.xerox.com/printer-supplies, then select

your specific printer model.

A resource for tools and information, including

interactive tutorials, printing templates, helpful tips,

and customized features to meet your individual

needs.

www.xerox.com/office/businessresourcecenter

Local sales and Technical Customer Support www.xerox.com/worldcontacts

Printer registration www.xerox.com/office/register

Xerox

Direct online store www.direct.xerox.com/

Third party and open source software To locate third party and open source software

disclosure notices and the terms and conditions, go

to www.support.xerox.com, then select your specific

printer model.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Introduction

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Introduction

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

This chapter contains:

• Physically Connecting the Printer................................................................................................ 18

• Assigning a Network Address ..................................................................................................... 19

• Connecting the Device to a Wireless Network............................................................................. 20

• Accessing Administration and Configuration Settings................................................................. 21

• Initial Setup at the Control Panel ............................................................................................... 24

• Initial Setup in the Embedded Web Server ................................................................................. 27

• Changing the System Administrator Password............................................................................ 32

• Setting the Date and Time......................................................................................................... 33

Physically Connecting the Printer

1. Connect the power cord to the printer, and plug it into an electrical outlet.

2. Connect one end of a Category 5 or better Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the back of the

printer. Connect the other end of the cable to a correctly configured network port.

3. If your printer has fax installed, connect it to a correctly configured telephone line.

4. Power on the printer.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

Assigning a Network Address

The printer automatically acquires a network address from a DHCP server by default.

To assign a static IP address, configure DNS server settings, or configure other TCP/IP settings, refer

to IP.

If the printer does not detect a DHCP server, the printer uses an IPv4 self-assigned address. Address

information is listed on the configuration report. For details, refer to Printing the Configuration Report.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

Connecting the Device to a Wireless Network

If you have purchased the Wireless Network Adapter, you can connect the device to a wireless

network using the Wireless Wizard. The Wireless Wizard provides the easiest method of connecting

the device to a wireless network. If the device is connected to a wired network, you can configure

wireless settings in the Embedded Web Server. You can connect a computer directly to a wireless

network. For details, refer to Connecting to a Wireless Network.

Note: You cannot connect to a wired network and a wireless network at the same time.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

Accessing Administration and Configuration

Settings

You can access the administration and configuration settings from the Tools menu on the control

panel or from the Properties tab in the Embedded Web Server. The control panel is the interface from

which you can control the functions available on the device. The control panel consists of the

following components:

• Touch screen: Use the touch screen to access and control the functions available on the device.

• Power button: Use the power button to power the device on or off and to wake the device from

sleep mode.

• Home button: Use the Home button to return to the Home screen directly from any other screen.

The Embedded Web Server is the administration and configuration software installed on the printer.

It allows you to configure and administer the printer from a Web browser.

The administrator password is required when accessing locked settings in the Embedded Web Server

or at the control panel. Most printer models have a default configuration that restricts access to some

settings. Access is restricted for settings on the Properties tab in the Embedded Web Server, and

settings on the device touch screen Tools menu on the device touch screen.

AAcccceessssiinngg tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell aass aa SSyysstteemm

AAddmmiinniissttrraattoorr

If you have not changed the administrator password, you can continue to access the administrator

functions at the control panel with the default password. The default password is 1111, or the device

serial number. You can obtain the serial number from inside the front door of the printer, from the

configuration report, and from the home page of the Embedded Web Server.

To change the administrator password at the control panel:

1. At the device control panel touch screen, touch Log In.

2. Type admin, then touch Next.

3. Type the administrator password, then touch Done. The password is case-sensitive.

AAcccceessssiinngg tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb SSeerrvveerr aass aa SSyysstteemm

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

AAddmmiinniissttrraattoorr

Before you begin:

• Locate your device IP address using the configuration report.

Note: The device prints a configuration report at power-up. For details, refer to

Printing the Configuration Report.

• Ensure that TCP/IP and HTTP are enabled. If you disabled either of the protocols, at the control

panel, re-enable the protocols. For details, refer to IP and HTTP.

To log in to the Embedded Web Server as the administrator:

1. At your computer, open a Web browser. In the address field, type the IP address of the device,

then press Enter or Return.

Note: To ensure that untrusted-certificate Web browser errors do not appear, install the

Device Root Certificate Authority for the device. For details, refer to Security Certificates.

2. In the top-right area of the page, click Login.

3. For User ID, type admin.

4. For Password, type the administrator password. The default password is 1111, or the device serial

number. You can obtain the serial number from inside the front door of the printer, from the

configuration report, and from the home page of the Embedded Web Server. The password is

case-sensitive.

5. Click Login.

Note: If you have not changed the default administrator password, you are prompted to

change the password when you log in as administrator in the Embedded Web Server. For

details, refer to Changing the System Administrator Password.

UUssiinngg tthhee SSeeaarrcchh FFuunnccttiioonn iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb

SSeerrvveerr

The Search feature in the Embedded Web Server returns one or more links to configuration pages for

features related to your search term. The Search field is at the top of the navigation pane.

Note: A general search term, such as print, can yield multiple results. A specific search term,

such as secure print, yields more specific results.

To use the Search function:

1. Log in to the Embedded Web Server as an administrator.

2. Click Properties.

3. In the Search field, type a search term for the administrator function you want to locate.

PPrriinnttiinngg tthhee CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn RReeppoorrtt

The Configuration Report lists all current settings of the printer. A configuration report prints at

startup by default.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

PPrriinnttiinngg tthhee CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn RReeppoorrtt ffrroomm tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

To print the Configuration Report from the device control panel:

1. At the control panel touch screen, log in as an administrator. For details, refer to Accessing the

Control Panel as a System Administrator.

2. Touch Device, then touch Information Pages.

3. Touch Configuration Report, then touch Print.

PPrriinnttiinngg tthhee CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn RReeppoorrtt ffrroomm tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb SSeerrvveerr

To print the Configuration Report from the Embedded Web Server:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Home→Configuration Report.

2. To print the report, click Print Configuration Page.

DDiissaabblliinngg tthhee CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn RReeppoorrtt aatt SSttaarrttuupp

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Printing→General.

3. For Configuration Report, clear Print at Power on.

4. To save the new settings, click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

Initial Setup at the Control Panel

IInnssttaallllaattiioonn WWiizzaarrdd

The Installation Wizard starts the first time that you power on the printer. The wizard prompts you

with a series of questions to help you configure basic printer settings. You can complete the initial

configuration using the Installation Wizard or a clone file.

Note: A clone file contains configuration settings from one printer that you can use to

configure a similar printer.

• To assign a static IP address or change the default dynamic addressing settings, use the IP

Address Settings wizard.

Note:

• It is recommended that you use DHCP to obtain the IP address automatically.

• If DHCP is enabled, your DHCP server can provide the Host Name and Domain

Name. For details, refer to IP.

• To ensure that the IP address does not change, use a DHCP reserved address. You

can create a DHCP reservation for a permanent IP address on your DHCP server.

• To add phone numbers for support or supplies contacts, use the Contact Numbers wizard.

• To configure basic embedded fax settings, use the Fax Setup wizard.

Note: After the initial setup, to change any printer configuration settings, or to configure other

printer settings, log in to the Embedded Web Server. For details, refer to Accessing the

Embedded Web Server as a System Administrator.

UUssiinngg tthhee IInnssttaallllaattiioonn WWiizzaarrdd

To use the initial Installation Wizard:

1. To select a language, the date and time settings, and any applicable options, follow the wizard

prompts.

Note: If a network connection is not detected, an alert notifies you. Ensure that your

network cable is plugged in securely.

2. Complete the Additional Install Options:

• To add phone numbers for support or supplies contacts, touch Contact Numbers.

• To assign a static IP Address, or to change the default dynamic addressing settings, touch IP

Address Settings.

• To configure basic embedded fax settings, touch Fax Setup.

Note: You can complete the Additional Install Options fields later.

3. To complete the configuration using a clone file, follow the steps in this task. To complete the

configuration without using a clone file, skip to step 4.

a. At the prompt, insert a USB flash drive into a USB port.

b. Select the clone file, then click Install.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

c. At the confirmation prompt, click Install, then wait a few seconds.

Note: If your clone file contains an administrator password, the password in the clone

file replaces the default administrator password.

4. To complete the installation without a clone file:

a. For Paper Size Preference, set the paper size.

b. For Device Information setting, select a setting.

c. Change the password for the administrator account. To leave the password at the default

setting, click Skip. You can change the password later.

Note: When you attempt to log in to the Embedded Web Server with the default

administrator password, the system prompts you to change the password.

5. At the Device Setup Complete screen, follow the onscreen instructions, then click Restart.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg tthhee AAddddiittiioonnaall IInnssttaallll OOppttiioonnss

You can change the printer configuration settings at any time using the Additional Install Options.

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings→Additional Install Options.

3. To start a wizard, touch IP Address Settings, Contact Numbers, or Fax Setup.

4. Follow the onscreen instructions.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee MMeeaassuurreemmeenntt UUnniittss

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings→General→Measurements.

3. To show dimensions in metric or imperial units, for Units, select an option.

4. To specify the decimal mark symbol that the printer uses, for Numeric Separator, select Comma

or Period.

5. Click OK.

IInnssttaalllliinngg OOppttiioonnaall SSooffttwwaarree FFeeaattuurreess

When you purchase an optional software feature, to enable it, provide a feature installation key.

Some features come with an activation code that you use to request a feature installation key. Go to

the Xerox

Software Activation Portal website at www.xeroxlicensing.xerox.com/fik to enter the

activation code. The website generates a feature installation key that you can use to enable the

feature.

You can also install optional software features by sending a print file. You can install features on

multiple printers by sending a formatted .csv file as a print job to the printers. A Xerox representative

creates this file and provides installation instructions.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

IInnssttaalllliinngg aa SSooffttwwaarree FFeeaattuurree aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings→General→Feature Installation.

3. Touch Enter Feature Installation Key, then type the key.

4. Touch OK.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

Initial Setup in the Embedded Web Server

RReessttrriiccttiinngg AAcccceessss ttoo tthhee PPrriinntteerr

You can lock or unlock the printer by selecting preset services and tools permissions for non-logged-in

users. For details about roles and user permissions, refer to Setting Access Rights.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click User Permissions.

3. For User Permission Roles, click Edit.

4. For Permission Role, for Non-Logged-User, click Edit.

5. For Print Feature, select the desired option, then click Edit.

SSeettttiinngg PPeerrmmiissssiioonnss ffoorr WWhheenn UUsseerrss CCaann PPrriinntt

1. For Allow Printing, select When Users Can Print, then select an option.

• Always: This option allows printing at any time. There are no time restrictions.

• Monday – Friday from: This option allows printing on weekdays. To set the printing times, use

the From Time and To Time menus.

• Time of Day (Advanced): This option allows printing on specific days, during a specific time

range. To set the printing days, use the From Time and To Time menus. To select the printing

times, click Add Time Range. To delete, click the Trash icon.

• Never: This option restricts all printing.

2. To specify permissions for Color and Black and White printing independently, select Make color

printing more restrictive than black & white printing.

3. Click Save.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a

specific device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

SSeettttiinngg 11--SSiiddeedd PPrriinntt PPeerrmmiissssiioonnss

1. On the 1-Sided Printing page, under Role State, select Not Allowed to require users to print 2-

sided.

2. Click Save.

SSeettttiinngg JJoobb TTyyppee PPrriinntt PPeerrmmiissssiioonnss

1. Under Presets, select an option:

• Allow all Job Types allows users to print any job type.

• Only Allow Secure Print ensures that users only send Secure Print jobs.

• Custom allows you to select the job types that users are allowed to send.

If you selected Custom, under Role State, next to each job type, to restrict users from using the

job type, select Not Allowed.

2. To lock all job types, click the Lock icon. To unlock all job types, click the Unlock icon.

3. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

SSeettttiinngg PPaappeerr TTrraayy PPrriinntt PPeerrmmiissssiioonnss

1. To restrict users from using a paper tray, under Role State, next to the paper tray, select Not

Allowed.

2. To lock all job types, click the Lock icon. To unlock all job types, click the Unlock icon.

3. Click Apply.

SSeettttiinngg AApppplliiccaattiioonn PPrriinntt PPeerrmmiissssiioonnss

1. For Applications, click Edit.

2. Select an application.

Note: To add an application to the list, click Add New Application, or submit a print job

from that application to the printer.

3. To restrict users from using a printing method, for the printing method, select Not Allowed.

4. Click Apply.

UUssiinngg tthhee CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn OOvveerrvviieeww PPaaggee

The Configuration Overview page contains links to the commonly accessed pages on the Properties

tab. Use the Configuration Overview page to help you install your printer successfully.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Configuration Overview.

2. Select an option:

• To open the Configuration Checklist page, click View Checklist.

• To open the settings page for an app or feature, for the desired app or feature, click Settings

or Setup.

• To create a clone file, for Cloning, click View. Cloning allows you to save your current printer

settings to a file to use as a backup and restore file for your printer. You can also use a clone

file to copy your printer settings to other printers.

AAssssiiggnniinngg aa NNaammee aanndd LLooccaattiioonn ttoo tthhee PPrriinntteerr

The Description page displays the printer model information and product code or serial number. It

also provides a place to assign a name and location to the printer. Asset tags let you enter unique

identifiers for inventory management.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Description.

2. For Device Name, type a name for the device.

3. For Location, type the location of the device.

Note: This location appears in the list of devices on your network. Use a meaningful

location name, such as a building name or number, floor, and quadrant. A meaningful

location name helps users know where the device is located within your organization.

4. For Customer Asset Tag and Xerox

Asset Tag, type unique identifiers as needed.

5. For Organization Information, type the Name and Unit for your organization, as needed.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

6. For Geographic Location, type the latitude and longitude coordinates for the geographical

location of the device.

7. Click Apply.

SSeelleeccttiinngg SSeerrvviicceess ttoo AAppppeeaarr oonn tthhee TToouucchh SSccrreeeenn

A standard app is installed on the device by default. Optionally, you can install EIP and weblet apps,

which provide extra functionality. For details, refer to Weblet Management.

SSppeecciiffyy tthhee AAppppss ttoo DDiissppllaayy oonn tthhee TToouucchh SSccrreeeenn

To specify the apps to display on the touch screen:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Display.

2. Click Show/Hide.

• To select all apps in the list to appear on the touch screen, click Show All.

• To hide all apps in the list so that no apps appear on the touch screen, click Hide All.

• To select individual apps to appear on the touch screen, for Displayed, select the apps that

you want to appear.

3. Click Apply.

Note: You cannot hide apps that are required for basic device operation.

AArrrraannggiinngg tthhee OOrrddeerr tthhaatt AAppppss AAppppeeaarr oonn tthhee TToouucchh SSccrreeeenn

To arrange the order that apps appear on the touch screen:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Display.

2. Click Order.

3. To arrange the order that apps appear on the control panel, click, drag, then drop the buttons in

the preferred order.

4. Click Apply.

IInnssttaalllliinngg OOppttiioonnaall SSooffttwwaarree FFeeaattuurreess

When you purchase an optional software feature, to enable it, provide a feature installation key.

Some features come with an activation code that you use to request a feature installation key. Go to

the Xerox

Software Activation Portal website at www.xeroxlicensing.xerox.com/fik/ to enter the

activation code. The website generates a feature installation key that you can use to enable the

feature.

You can also install optional software features by sending a print file. You can install features on

multiple printers by sending a formatted .csv file as a print job to the printers. A Xerox representative

creates this file and provides installation instructions.

IInnssttaalllliinngg aa SSooffttwwaarree FFeeaattuurree iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb SSeerrvveerr

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Feature Installation.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

3. For Feature Installation Key Entry, click Enter Installation Key, or for the feature you want to

install, click Install.

4. Type the key.

5. Click Apply.

SSuupppplliieess PPllaann AAccttiivvaattiioonn CCooddee

Your Xerox

equipment supplier offers supplies and service plans such as PagePack

and eClick

PagePack

and eClick

are cost-per-page-based programs that include all service and supplies for

your device in one contract. If you have enrolled in a supplies program, you must activate the supplies

plan at regular intervals. To enable your device for your purchased plan, or to get a Supplies

Activation Code, contact your Xerox

equipment supplier with the device serial number.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Supplies Plan Activation Code.

3. Type the code, then click Apply.

For more information about Xerox

supplies and service plans, contact your Xerox representative.

PPhhyyssiiccaall CCoonnnneeccttiioonn SSeettttiinnggss

You can specify Ethernet and USB settings, such as Ethernet Rated Speed, USB Connection Mode, and

Print Timeout for USB printing.

SSeettttiinngg EEtthheerrnneett OOppttiioonnss

The Ethernet interface on the printer automatically detects the speed of your network. Any auto-

sensing devices connected to the network, such as a hub, do not always detect the correct speed.

Refer to the Configuration Report to ensure that the printer detects the correct network speed.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Wired Connection, click Edit.

3. To configure Ethernet settings, for Ethernet, click Edit.

4. For Rated Speed, select a connection speed.

5. Click Save.

Note: For the new settings to take effect, restart your printer.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg UUSSBB CCoonnnneeccttiioonn MMooddee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For USB Connection Mode, select Edit.

3. For USB Connection, select an option:

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

• Software Tools: This option disables Direct Printing via Driver. If you use Xerox

Copier

Assistant, select this option. Xerox representatives also use this feature to connect directly to

the printer and use diagnostic software and other utilities.

• Direct Printing via Driver: This option allows your computer to connect to the printer using a

USB cable.

4. For Print Timeout, type the amount of time in seconds that the printer waits inactive before it

disconnects from a device that is connected to the port. Type 0 to disable the timeout.

5. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

Changing the System Administrator Password

The user name for the administrator account is admin. The default password is 1111, or the device

serial number. You can obtain the serial number from inside the front door of the printer, from the

configuration report, and from the home page of the Embedded Web Server. If you have not changed

the administrator password, you are prompted to change the password when you log in as

administrator in the Embedded Web Server.

Note:

• Ensure that you store the administrator password in a secure location.

• To avoid using the default administrator account, you can create a number of user accounts

with administrator access.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Password Policies→Admin Password.

3. Type the old password. All passwords are case-sensitive.

4. Type the new password, then retype the new password.

5. The check box for Do not prompt to change the admin password when set to factory default is

clear by default. The clear check box ensures that when an administrator logs in or logs out, a

reminder prompt appears to change the administrator password. To disable the reminder prompt,

select the check box.

6. Click Apply.

CChhaannggiinngg tthhee SSyysstteemm AAddmmiinniissttrraattoorr PPaasssswwoorrdd aatt tthhee

CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

If you have not changed the administrator password, you can continue to access the administrator

functions at the control panel with the default password. The default password is 1111, or the device

serial number. To change the administrator password at the control panel:

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Security Settings→Change Admin Password.

3. To change the password, type the old password.

4. Type the new password, then retype the new password.

5. Touch OK.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

Setting the Date and Time

SSeettttiinngg tthhee DDaattee aanndd TTiimmee iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb

SSeerrvveerr

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Date and Time.

3. For Date and Time Setup, select an option:

• Automatic using NTP: This option allows the NTP service to set the time automatically.

• Manual (NTP Disabled): This option allows you to set the date and time manually.

4. If you are using an NTP server, select the address type. Options are IPv4 Address or Host Name.

Type the appropriately formatted address, alternate address, and port numbers. The default port

number is 123.

Note: Changes to these settings cause the printer to restart.

5. Select the date and time format, then type the date and time in the appropriate fields. To show

the time in 24-hour format, select the Display 24 hour clock check box.

6. For Time Zone, select your time zone from the menu.

7. Click Apply.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee DDaattee aanndd TTiimmee aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings→General→Date and Time.

Note: If this feature does not appear, log in as a system administrator. For details, refer to

Accessing the Control Panel as a System Administrator.

3. To set the time zone, touch Time Zone, touch the Geographic Region list, then touch your region.

Use the Up or Down arrows to navigate and select your Time Zone.

Note: The date and time are set automatically through Network Time Protocol (NTP). To

modify these settings, access the Embedded Web Server, then select the Properties tab.

Change the Date and Time Setup to Manual (NTP Disabled).

4. To set the date:

a. Touch Date.

b. Touch the Year field. To select a number, use the arrows.

c. Touch the Month field. To select a number, use the arrows.

d. Touch the Day field. To select a number, use the arrows.

e. Touch Format, then touch the date format that you want to use.

5. To set the time:

a. Touch Time

b. To specify the 12-hour or 24-hour format, touch Display 24 hour Clock.

c. Touch the Hours field. To select a number, use the arrows.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

d. Touch the Minutes field. To select a number, use the arrows.

e. If your printer is set to display the 12-hour clock, touch AM or PM.

6. Touch OK.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Initial Setup

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

This chapter contains:

• Connecting to a Wireless Network.............................................................................................. 36

• Wi-Fi Direct................................................................................................................................ 41

• AirPrint ...................................................................................................................................... 43

• Bonjour...................................................................................................................................... 45

• Google Cloud Print Service ......................................................................................................... 46

• Mopria....................................................................................................................................... 49

• USB Settings.............................................................................................................................. 50

• FTP/SFTP Filing.......................................................................................................................... 52

• HTTP ......................................................................................................................................... 53

• IP............................................................................................................................................... 55

• IPP............................................................................................................................................. 60

• LDAP.......................................................................................................................................... 62

• LPR/LPD ..................................................................................................................................... 67

• NFC ........................................................................................................................................... 68

• NTP ........................................................................................................................................... 69

• POP3 ......................................................................................................................................... 70

• Proxy Server ............................................................................................................................... 71

• Raw TCP/IP Printing ................................................................................................................... 72

• SLP ............................................................................................................................................ 74

• ThinPrint Client .......................................................................................................................... 75

• SMB Filing.................................................................................................................................. 77

• SMTP Server............................................................................................................................... 78

• SNMP ........................................................................................................................................ 80

• WSD .......................................................................................................................................... 83

Connecting to a Wireless Network

If you have purchased the Wireless Network Adapter, you can use the Wireless Wizard to connect to a

wireless network. If the device is connected to a wired network, you can configure wireless settings in

the Embedded Web Server.

Before you begin, purchase the Xerox

Wireless Network Adapter.

Note:

• For more information, refer to the Xerox

Wireless Network Adapter Kit Hardware Install

and Setup instructions that are included with the kit.

• The device uses either the wireless or the wired network connection. Activating one network

connection deactivates the other network connection.

• When you switch from a wired connection to a wireless connection, the IP address of the

printer changes. The connection to the Embedded Web Server through your Web browser

closes. To reconnect to the Embedded Web Server, in the Web browser address field, type

the new IP address or host name of your printer. For details, refer to Verifying the Wireless

Status and Viewing the Wireless IP Address.

CCoonnnneeccttiinngg ttoo aa WWiirreelleessss NNeettwwoorrkk UUssiinngg tthhee WWiirreelleessss

WWiizzaarrdd

You can use the Wireless Wizard to simplify the process of connecting your device to an available

wireless network. You can use the Wireless Wizard to select a different wireless network or to connect

to a wireless network manually.

Note:

• Advanced enterprise networks require certificates. For details, refer to Security Certificates.

• When you plug in the Wireless Network Adapter, Wi-Fi Direct is available immediately. For

details, refer to Wi-Fi Direct.

To connect to a wireless network using the Wireless Wizard:

1. Plug the wireless network adapter directly into an active USB port on the device.

2. Select an option.

• If you are connecting the device to a wireless network for the first time, touch Continue

Wireless Install.

• If you have connected the device to a wireless network previously, that network appears on

the screen. Select an option:

• To connect to the last network used, which is shown on the screen, touch Activate

Wireless.

• To connect to another network, touch Pick New Network.

3. Log in as an administrator. For details, refer to Accessing Administration and Configuration

Settings.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

4. Select a wireless network from the list.

• If you are joining a secure network, the secure settings appear.

• If the security settings require a user name, touch User Name, type the user name, then

touch Done.

• Touch Password, type the password, then touch Done.

• Touch Join.

• If you are joining an unsecured network, to confirm joining the network, touch Join this

Network.

Note: If your network does not appear, select an option.

• To refresh the wireless networks list, touch Check for Networks.

• To join the network manually, touch Manual Setup. For details on manual setup, refer

to Configuring Wireless Settings Manually.

5. Touch Done.

Note: If the connection fails, select Edit Connection, Pick New Network, or Use Wired

Connection.

CCoonnnneeccttiinngg ttoo aa WWiirreelleessss NNeettwwoorrkk iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd

WWeebb SSeerrvveerr

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Xerox

Wireless Network Interface, click Edit.

Note: After you install the Wireless Network Adapter, the Edit button appears.

3. To configure IPv4, IPv6, and DNS settings, on the Wireless Profile page, for IP, click Edit.

Configure settings as needed, then click Apply. The device uses separate IP settings for wired and

wireless network connections. For details, refer to IP.

4. On the Wireless Profile page, for Wireless Settings, click Edit.

5. If your device is connected to a wireless network, on the Wireless Settings page, click Select

Different Network.

6. On the Wireless Settings page, click Scan for Available Networks. A list of detected networks

appears.

7. For the SSID name of the network that you want to join, click Select & Configure.

8. The device detects the security mode that your network uses. Configure the following security

mode settings, as needed.

• For WEP Settings and Key String Type, select the bit strength and key.

• For Encryption Algorithm, select an encryption method. Auto detects the algorithm that your

wireless network uses automatically.

• For Authentication Method, select the authentication method that your wireless network uses.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

• To require the device to validate certificates, for Server Validation - Validate server using,

select the certificate that you want to use.

• Install the validation server root certificate on the Security Certificates page.

• To access the Security Certificates page, click Properties→Security→Security Certificates.

For details, refer to Security Certificates.

• For Device Certificate (TLS) - Authentication Certificate, select the device certificate that you

want to use.

Install the device certificate on the Security Certificates page at

Properties→Security→Security Certificates.

For details, refer to Security Certificates.

• For Outer Identity, configure the external User ID.

• For User Name, type the user name that the device uses to access the wireless network.

• For Password, type and confirm a password. Click Select to save new password, as needed.

9. Click Save.

10. Navigate back to the Setup page, then click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

11. For Xerox

Wireless Network Interface, click Make Active.

VVeerriiffyyiinngg tthhee WWiirreelleessss SSttaattuuss aanndd VViieewwiinngg tthhee

WWiirreelleessss IIPP AAddddrreessss

To verify the wireless status and view the wireless IP address, print a Configuration Report. For details,

refer to Printing the Configuration Report. Note the Connectivity Physical Connections, Connectivity

Protocols, and TCP/IPv4 sections of the report.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg WWiirreelleessss SSeettttiinnggss MMaannuuaallllyy

If the device does not detect your wireless network, configure wireless settings manually and provide

information about your wireless network.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg WWiirreelleessss SSeettttiinnggss MMaannuuaallllyy aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

To configure wireless settings manually at the control panel:

1. Ensure that the Wireless Network Adapter is installed in an active USB port.

2. At the device control panel touch screen, log in as an administrator. For details, refer to Accessing

the Control Panel as a System Administrator.

3. Touch Device→Tools→Network Settings→Network Connectivity→Wireless.

The Wireless Wizard opens. For details on using the Wireless Wizard, refer to Connecting to a

Wireless Network Using the Wireless Wizard.

4. Select an option.

• If you are connecting the device to a wireless network for the first time, touch Continue

Wireless Install.

• If you have connected the device to a wireless network previously, touch Pick New Network.

5. At the bottom of the list of available networks, touch Manual Setup.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

6. On the SSID screen, type the network name, then touch Done.

7. Touch Security, then select the security method that your wireless network uses.

8. Configure the following security mode settings as needed.

• For Encryption Algorithm, select an encryption method. Auto automatically detects the

algorithm that your wireless network uses.

• For Authentication Mode, select the authentication method that your wireless network uses.

• For User Name, type the user name that the device uses to access the wireless network.

• For Password, type a password, then touch Done.

9. Touch Join.

10. Touch Done.

Note: For detailed IP settings and security settings, use the Embedded Web Server.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg WWiirreelleessss SSeettttiinnggss MMaannuuaallllyy iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb

SSeerrvveerr

To configure wireless settings manually in the Embedded Web Server:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Xerox

Wireless Network Interface, click Edit.

3. To configure IPv4, IPv6, and DNS settings, on the Wireless Profile page, for IP, click Edit. The

printer uses separate IP settings for wired and wireless network connections. For details, refer to

IP.

4. On the Wireless Profile page, for Wireless Settings, click Edit.

5. If your device is connected to a wireless network, on the Wireless Settings page, click Select

Different Network.

6. On the Wireless Settings page, click Join Other Network.

7. For Network Name, type the name of your network.

8. For Security Mode, select the security method that your wireless network uses.

9. Configure the following security mode settings, as needed.

• For WEP Settings and Key String Type, select the bit strength and key.

• For Encryption Algorithm, select an encryption method. Auto detects the algorithm that your

wireless network uses automatically.

• For Authentication Method, select the authentication method that your wireless network uses.

• To require the printer to validate certificates, for Server Validation - Validate server using,

select the certificate that you want to use.

Install the validation server root certificate on the Security Certificates page at

Properties→Security→Certificates→Security Certificates.

For details, refer to Security Certificates.

• For Device Certificate (TLS) - Authentication Certificate, select the device certificate that you

want to use.

Install the device certificate on the Security Certificates page at

Properties→Security→Certificates→Security Certificates.

For details, refer to Security Certificates.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

• For Outer Identity, configure the external User ID.

• For User Name, type the user name that the device uses to access the wireless network.

• For Password, type and confirm a password.

• Click Select to save new password, as needed.

10. Click Save.

11. Navigate back to the Setup page, then click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

12. For Xerox

Wireless Network Interface, click Make Active.

CCoonnnneeccttiinngg DDiirreeccttllyy ttoo aa WWiirreelleessss NNeettwwoorrkk

Before you begin, purchase and install the Xerox

Wireless Network Adapter.

1. Ensure that the printer is not connected to a wired Ethernet network.

2. Restart the printer.

3. Refer to the Configuration Report to find the self-assigned IP address of the printer, in the

169.254.x.x range. For details, refer to Printing the Configuration Report.

4. Using an Ethernet cable, connect a computer to the printer.

Note:

• Depending on your computer hardware, use a crossover cable or adapter as needed.

• Ensure that wireless connectivity is disabled on your computer.

5. Find the IP address of the computer.

6. Ensure that the computer obtains an automatic private IP address, in the 169.254.x.x range, and

is therefore on the same subnet as the printer.

7. On the computer, access the Embedded Web Server. Type the IP address of the printer in the

address field of a Web browser, then press Enter or Return.

8. Configure wireless settings in the Embedded Web Server. For details, refer to Connecting to a

Wireless Network.

Note: When you switch from a wired connection to a wireless connection, the IP address of

the device changes. The connection to the Embedded Web Server through your Web

browser closes. To reconnect to the Embedded Web Server, in the Web browser address

field, type the new IP address or host name of your device.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

Wi-Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct enables devices to connect with each other without requiring a wireless access point. The

printer acts as a Software Access Point (SoftAP), and manages the Wi-Fi Direct connections and

security.

Wi-Fi Direct does not require manual configuration. The Wi-Fi Direct Protected Setup (WPS) Name

and subnet address prefix generate automatically. Wi-Fi Direct uses WPS and WPA2 encryption to

create a secure wireless network. The printer supports AirPrint, Google Cloud Print, and Mopria using

Wi-Fi Direct connections.

Before you set up Wi-Fi Direct, ensure that you have the wireless network interface enabled on your

device. For information, refer to Connecting to a Wireless Network. To use the Wi-Fi Direct connection

to the printer, users have to enable Wi-Fi Direct on their mobile devices.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg WWii--FFii DDiirreecctt

If you configured your device to use default settings, no further Wi-Fi Direct feature configuration is

required.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. In the Profile area, for Wi-Fi Direct, click Edit.

3. To enable Wi-Fi Direct, in the Settings area, for Wi-Fi Direct, select Enabled.

4. To create a password, for Wi-Fi Direct Access Point — SSID Password, type a password.

5. To configure the password to appear on the printer control panel, select Show password on the

device touch screen in Device App.

6. To modify the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) Name, in the Convenience Link area, for Device

Name, select Edit.

If the Device Name field is blank, the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) Name field displays a default

value. If you change the Device Name, the Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) Name field displays the

Device Name information.

7. To modify the Subnet Address Prefix, type the Subnet Address Prefix.

Note: You do not have to modify the Subnet Address Prefix unless your network

environment already uses the default address.

8. Click Apply.

VVeerriiffyyiinngg HHTTTTPP SSeettttiinnggss ffoorr WWii--FFii DDiirreecctt

After you configure the Wi-Fi Direct feature, verify that the HTTP settings are correct:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. Confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled.

3. For Force Traffic over Secure Connection (HTTPS), select No (Requests can be made over HTTP

and HTTPS).

4. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

DDiissaabblliinngg WWii--FFii DDiirreecctt

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. In the Profile area, for Wi-Fi Direct, click Edit.

3. To disable Wi-Fi Direct, in the Settings area, for Wi-Fi Direct, clear the check box for Enabled.

4. Click Apply.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

AirPrint

AirPrint is a software feature that allows you to print documents from Apple iOS-based mobile devices

and Mac OS-based devices without a print driver. AirPrint-enabled printers allow you to print or fax

directly from a Mac or from an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch. You can use AirPrint to print from a wired

or wireless device directly without using a print driver. You can also use AirPrint to scan from a printer

to supported Apple devices.

Note:

• Not all applications support AirPrint.

• When AirPrint is enabled, HTTP, IPP, and Multicast DNS are enabled automatically.

• IPP enablement requires a Web server reset.

• The device that submits the AirPrint job must be on the same subnet as the printer. To allow

devices to print from different subnets, configure your network to pass multicast DNS traffic

across subnets.

• Supported mobile devices: all models of iPad, iPhone 3GS or later, and iPod touch third

generation or later, running the latest version of iOS.

• If AirPrint is not available on your device, contact your Xerox representative.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg AAiirrPPrriinntt

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Mobile Workflows, for AirPrint, click Edit.

3. Configure HTTP, IPP, and Multicast DNS Registration as required. To configure a protocol, click

Edit.

4. To enable AirPrint, for Enablement, select one or both options:

• Allow Printing/Faxing to be initiated From AirPrint Supported Devices

• Allow Scanning to be initiated From AirPrint (or Mopria) Supported Devices

Note:

• AirPrint Faxing is supported only on devices that have embedded fax enabled and are

configured to allow sending.

• AirPrint Printing/Faxing is enabled by default.

• To require authentication for AirPrint Printing and Faxing, configure IPP authentication.

For details, refer to IPP.

• Enabling scanning for AirPrint, also enables scanning for Mopria.

5. For Require Authentication for Scanning, select an option:

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

• Off: This option allows the device to scan without requiring authentication.

• HTTP Basic: This option authenticates with user accounts that are configured in the device

user database or in the network database.

Note: HTTP Basic sends user login credentials as plain, unencrypted text over HTTP. To

send encrypted login credentials, use HTTPS.

• HTTP Digest: This option authenticates with user accounts that are configured in the device

user database. HTTP Digest uses encrypted user login credentials over HTTP or HTTPS. HTTP

Digest is always encrypted. It is the most secure option. HTTP Digest is available when

Scanning is enabled and when FIPS 140-2 is configured as follows:

• FIPS 140-2 is disabled.

• FIPS 140-2 is enabled with HTTP Digest indicated as an exception. For details, refer to

FIPS 140-2.

6. If you selected HTTP Basic authentication, for Validation Location, select an option:

• Validation on the Device: This option enables IPP authentication of user accounts that are

configured in the device user database. For details, refer to User Database.

• Validation on the Network: This option enables IPP authentication of user accounts that are

configured on the network authentication server for the device.

Note: The same network authentication configuration is used on the printer for each login

method that is configured for Network Authentication.

7. To edit the device name or location, for Device Name, Device Location, or Geographic Location,

click Edit.

Note: Providing a device name can help users identify the device.

8. Click Save.

Note: To use AirPrint with accounting, you can create IPP accounting exceptions. For more

information, refer to Configuring Validation Policies and Print Job Exceptions.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

Bonjour

Bonjour allows the discovery and use of AirPrint

devices in a multicast DNS environment. Bonjour

requires Multicast DNS Registration enablement.

To expand the service discovery in the local subnet with services available in a wider network domain,

you can use Wide Area Bonjour. Wide Area Bonjour removes mDNS local network restrictions by using

DNS Service Discovery (DNS-SD) information.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. In the protocol area, for Bonjour, click Edit.

Note: Bonjour Printer Name displays the device name. When a device name is not

specified, Bonjour Printer Name displays the default device name or host name.

3. To enable Multicast DNS Registration, click Edit. For Multicast DNS Registration, select Enabled,

then click Apply.

Note: When multicast DNS is enabled, Bonjour is enabled by default.

4. To change the device name, in the Bonjour Settings area, for Device Name, click Edit.

5. If needed, configure Wide Area Bonjour settings in the Wide Area Bonjour for AirPrint Settings

area.

Wide Area Bonjour requires:

• Multicast DNS Registration enablement

• A verified host name and domain name

a. To view the verified host name and domain name, for Verified Host and Domain Names, click

View.

b. To download the DNS-SD record data file, for Manual Wide Area Bonjour (DNS-SD record

data), click Download. Save the dns-sd.txt file to a folder on your computer.

Note: For details and a step-by-step guide on how to use the DNS-SD record data to

support AirPrint discovery across subnets, click DNS-SD Record Data Help.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

Google Cloud Print Service

Google Cloud Print allows you to print documents using two basic modes:

• Cloud Printing: This option allows the System Administrator to set up and share a print queue in

the Google Cloud. Allowed users can access the cloud print queue from any Internet-connected

device in any geographic location. Cloud Printing is enabled by default. For Cloud Printing to

function, ensure that the printer is registered using a valid Google account.

• Privet/Local Printing: This option allows you to print documents on your local subnet without a

connection to the cloud. Privet/Local Printing is enabled by default. Users can submit jobs from a

Google Chrome Web browser immediately on the local subnet without registration or changes to

configuration.

The Google Cloud Print page consists of three sections.

• Status: This section is where you complete most setup tasks and can view Google Cloud Print

Service status.

• Configuration: This section is where you can enable or disable parts of the Google Cloud Print

feature. The default settings are adequate for most users.

• Convenience Links: This section links to pages on the device and on the Google Cloud Print

management page.

Note:

• Links to pages in the cloud appear when the device is registered.

• It is recommended that the system administrator creates an account that is

dedicated to managing all printers in an organization. The system administrator

can share the printers with members of the organization as needed.

A Xerox

device that is connected to a Google account cannot access files or email. When connected

to a Google account, the device can service only print jobs for the queue to which it is assigned

because the device only has access to that one queue. For details, refer to Google documentation.

Note: To resolve printer registration and connectivity issues, in the Status area, click

Troubleshooting.

To view the account and status for the newly registered printer, in the Status area, click Refresh. The

account and printer name update and the status shows as Enabled-Registered.

To view the number of jobs currently in the cloud print queue, in the Status area, for Last Queue

Check, click Check for Jobs. The number of cloud print jobs appears in Last Queue Action.

Google Cloud Print offers the following options:

• Cloud Printing

• Privet/Local Printing

• Cloud Job Conversion

For details on these options, refer to Google Cloud Print Service Options.

To access direct links to device settings or to your Google Cloud account, printers, or print jobs, for

Convenience Links, click Show Links.

For more information on Google Cloud Print, including procedures for managing accounts, sharing

printers, and printing, refer to the Google Cloud Print Help Center.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

GGooooggllee CClloouudd PPrriinntt SSeerrvviiccee OOppttiioonnss

CClloouudd PPrriinnttiinngg

Only users with whom you specifically share the print queue have access to Cloud Printing. Allowed

users can access the cloud print queue from any Internet-connected device in any geographic

location. You can submit print jobs from a Google Chrome Web browser or Google Chrome OS-based

devices, from cloud-ready apps, and from Google Docs. You can also submit print jobs directly through

the Google Cloud Print management page.

PPrriivveett//LLooccaall PPrriinnttiinngg

Privet/Local Printing is useful when you are in the same location as your printer and the client and

printer are on the same subnet. It is also useful to organizations that prefer not to use an Internet

cloud queue. You can submit print jobs from Google Chrome or Google Chrome OS-based devices.

CClloouudd JJoobb CCoonnvveerrssiioonn

When the printer does not support the format in which the job was submitted, Cloud Job Conversion

can convert some document types to a printable format. Cloud Job Conversion combines Cloud

Printing and Privet/Local Printing. Currently, only specialized apps use Cloud Job Conversion.

RReeggiisstteerriinngg tthhee PPrriinntteerr ffoorr GGooooggllee CClloouudd PPrriinntt SSeerrvviiccee

To register the printer for Google Cloud Print Service:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Mobile Workflows, for next to Google Cloud Print Service, click Edit.

3. For Status, for Registration Status, click Register Printer. The Printer Registration Options page

opens.

4. To give the printer a user-friendly name, click Edit.

Note: Xerox recommends that you choose a user-friendly name that includes the printer

location and department.

5. Click Continue to Register. The Options for Registering Your Printer page opens.

6. To change enablement settings, for Enablement, select options as needed.

7. Click Register Printer. The Google Cloud Print Service page reappears with a link that allows you

to complete the device registration.

Note: If printer registration does not continue, on the Google Cloud Print Service, click

Troubleshooting. This page provides information for solving connectivity problems, such as

Internet proxy setup. For details, refer to Google Cloud Print Troubleshooting.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

8. Within 15 minutes, click the link for Enabled - Finish device registration. The Google Cloud Print

Printer confirmation page opens in a new browser tab.

Note:

• If prompted, log in to your Google account.

• If you do not click the link within 15 minutes, begin the registration process again.

9. Click Finish printer registration. A message confirms that the printer is registered.

The Cloud Printer is now ready to print.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg GGooooggllee CClloouudd PPrriinntt OOppttiioonnss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Mobile Workflows, for Google Cloud Print Service, click Edit.

3. If needed, for Configuration, click Show Configuration.

4. To enable Google Cloud Print Service, select Enable Access to Google Cloud.

5. To enable local printing, select Enable Access to Privet (local printing).

6. To allow the service to reformat non-print-ready jobs into printable format, select Enable Google

Cloud Job Conversion.

Note: Cloud Job Conversion uses both Google Cloud Printing and Privet Local Printing.

Currently, only specialized third-party apps require conversion. Xerox recommends that you

leave Cloud Job Conversion disabled unless you use an app that requires it.

GGooooggllee CClloouudd PPrriinntt TTrroouubblleesshhoooottiinngg

The Troubleshooting page provides information and links to pages that can help you resolve problems

with Google Cloud Print printer registration.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Mobile Workflows, for Google Cloud Print Service, click Edit.

3. Click Troubleshooting.

4. Use the information and links on the Google Cloud Print Troubleshooting page to help correct the

problem.

5. After verifying that the problem is resolved, to return to the Google Cloud Print Service, click

Cancel.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

Mopria

Mopria is a software feature that enables users to print from Android mobile devices without

requiring a print driver. You can use Mopria to print from your Android mobile device to Mopria-

enabled printers.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg MMoopprriiaa

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Mobile Workflows, for Mopria Discovery, click Edit.

3. To configure HTTP, HTTPS, IPP, Multicast DNS Registration, or NFC as needed, for each protocol,

click Edit.

4. For Mopria Discovery, select On.

5. For Enablement, select one or both options.

• Allow Printing to be initiated From Mopria Supported Devices

• Allow Scanning to be initiated From Mopria Supported Devices

Note: Enabling scanning for Mopria also enables scanning for AirPrint.

6. For Require Authentication for Scanning, select an option.

• Off: This option allows the device to scan without requiring authentication.

• HTTP Basic: This option authenticates with user accounts that are configured in the device

user database or on the network.

Note: HTTP Basic sends user login credentials as plain, unencrypted text over HTTP. For

sending encrypted login credentials, use HTTPS.

• HTTP Digest: This option authenticates with user accounts that are configured in the device

user database. HTTP Digest uses encrypted user login credentials over HTTP or HTTPS.

Note:

• HTTP Digest is always encrypted. It is the most secure option.

• HTTP Digest is available when Scanning is enabled and FIPS 140-2 is disabled.

HTTP Digest is also available when FIPS 140-2 is enabled with HTTP Digest

indicated as an exception. For details, refer to FIPS 140-2.

7. If you selected HTTP Basic authentication, for Validation Location, select an option.

• Validation on the Device: This option enables IPP authentication of user accounts that are

configured in the device user database. Refer to User Database.

• Validation on the Network: This option enables IPP authentication of user accounts that are

configured on the network authentication server for the device.

Note: The same network authentication configuration is used on the printer for each login

method that is configured for Network Authentication.

8. To edit the device name, for Device Name, click Edit.

Note: Providing a device name can help users identify this device.

9. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

USB Settings

You can use USB Settings to configure the following:

• USB Connection Mode and the print timeout value

• USB Port State in Sleep Mode

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg UUSSBB CCoonnnneeccttiioonn MMooddee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For USB Connection Mode, select Edit.

3. For USB Connection, select an option:

• Software Tools: This option disables Direct Printing via Driver. If you use Xerox

Copier

Assistant, select this option. Xerox representatives also use this feature to connect directly to

the printer and use diagnostic software and other utilities.

• Direct Printing via Driver: This option allows your computer to connect to the printer using a

USB cable.

4. For Print Timeout, type the amount of time in seconds that the printer waits inactive before it

disconnects from a device that is connected to the port. Type 0 to disable the timeout.

5. Click Save.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg UUSSBB PPoorrtt SSttaattee iinn SSlleeeepp MMooddee

The USB Port State in Sleep Mode feature controls power supply to USB (Type A) accessories when

the device is in Sleep Mode. To remain active, accessories, such as Xerox

Wireless Network Adapter

and USB card readers, require that power is maintained to the USB port in sleep mode.

To configure USB Port State Sleep Mode in the Embedded Web Server:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For USB Port State in Sleep Mode, select Edit.

• To permit USB accessories to operate during Sleep Mode, select Powered.

Note: The Powered option can cause an increase in power consumption during Sleep

Mode.

• To disconnect power from USB accessories during Sleep Mode, select Not Powered.

Note: When wireless networking is active on the device, you cannot disconnect power

from USB accessories. The Not Powered option is not available.

3. Click Save.

EEnnaabblliinngg UUSSBB PPoorrtt SSttaattee SSlleeeepp MMooddee aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

To enable USB Port State Sleep Mode at the control panel:

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Network Settings→USB Settings.

3. Touch USB Port State in Sleep Mode.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

4. For Power USB Port in Sleep Mode, select the toggle button.

Note: A check mark on the toggle button indicates Enabled.

5. Touch OK.

UUSSBB PPoorrtt SSeeccuurriittyy

You can prevent unauthorized access to the printer through USB ports by disabling the ports.

EEnnaabblliinngg oorr DDiissaabblliinngg UUSSBB PPoorrttss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click USB Port Security.

3. To enable a USB port, for the port, select Enabled. To disable the port, clear the check box.

4. Click Save.

Note:

• If USB ports are disabled, you cannot use a USB card reader for authentication, update

the software, or print from a USB Flash drive.

• If your device model has a cover for the USB port on the control panel, you can install

or remove the cover. You can find the installation instructions and the USB cover in the

compartment inside Tray 1.

• Only Type A ports can be enabled or disabled. These settings do not affect Type B ports.

Enabling or Disabling all USB Ports at the Control Panel

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Security Settings→USB Port Security.

3. To enable or disable the USB ports, touch Enabled or Disabled.

4. Touch OK.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

FTP/SFTP Filing

File Transport Protocol (FTP) is a standard network protocol used to pass and manipulate files over a

TCP/IP network. Several services running on your printer, including Network Scanning, Saved Jobs

Backup, and Software upgrade can use FTP as a filing service.

Secure FTP (SFTP) is a standard network protocol that is used with SSH to ensure that data is

encrypted and transferred securely.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg FFTTPP aanndd SSFFTTPP FFiilliinngg SSeettttiinnggss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for FTP/SFTP Filing, click Edit.

3. To configure FTP or SFTP filing settings for each app listed under Within Apps, click the link.

4. For Mode, select an option:

• Passive: This option transfers data over a random port specified by the FTP server from a

connection made from the printer.

• Active: This option transfers data over a fixed, known port from a connection made from the

server.

5. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

HTTP

Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is a request-response standard protocol between clients and

servers. Clients that make HTTP requests are called User Agents (UAs). Servers that respond to these

requests for resources, such as HTML pages, are called Origin Servers. There can be any number of

intermediaries, such as tunnels, proxies, or gateways between User Agents and Origin Servers.

EEnnaabblliinngg HHTTTTPP aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Network Settings→Advanced Settings.

3. Touch HTTP Settings.

4. Touch Enabled, then touch OK.

5. To apply the settings, touch Finish.

Note: HTTP is enabled by default.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg HHTTTTPP SSeettttiinnggss iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb

SSeerrvveerr

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. In the Protocol area, for HTTP, click Edit.

3. For Connection, select Enabled.

Note: HTTP is enabled by default. If you disable HTTP, then the Embedded Web Server is

no longer available.

4. Type a connection port number as needed. The default is 80.

5. To encrypt HTTP communication, for Force Traffic over Secure Connection (HTTPS), select Yes.

When Force Traffic over Secure Connection (HTTPS) is enabled, all Web pages contain https:// in

the URL.

Note: By default, the device accepts jobs submitted over both HTTP and HTTPS. Force

Traffic over Secure Connection (HTTPS) is disabled.

6. Change the HTTPS Port Number as needed. The default is 443.

7. For Keep Alive Timeout, type a time up to 60 seconds. The printer waits the specified amount of

time before it terminates the connection.

Note: Increasing the Keep Alive Timeout can cause slower connections.

8. For Choose Device Certificate, select a certificate.

Note: To install more device certificates, refer to Security Certificates.

9. To view the selected certificate details, or save the certificate to your computer, click View/Save.

Note: If you are using the Xerox

Default Device Certificate, you can install the Device

Root Certificate Authority in your Web browser. Installing the Device Root Certificate

Authority ensures that your browser trusts the printer.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

10. To download the certificate authority, click Download the Device Root Certificate Authority.

11. Click Save.

AAcccceessssiinngg HHTTTTPP WWeebb SSeerrvviicceess

To access the HTTP Web Services page, from the HTTP page, click Web Services.

HHTTTTPP WWeebb SSeerrvviicceess

You can enable or disable Web Services on the Web Services page. This page provides a list of all

available Web services on your printer, and displays the configuration status of each service.

• To disable a Web service, clear the check box next to the Web service name.

• To view Web service port numbers or to remove login restrictions, click Advanced Settings.

For more information about Xerox Extensible Interface Platform

and Web services, see the

documentation included in the Xerox Extensible Interface Platform® Software Development Kit

(SDK). For information on how to download the SDK, go to www.xerox.com/en-us/office/eip.

AAcccceessssiinngg HHTTTTPP AAddvvaanncceedd SSeettttiinnggss

To access the HTTP Web Services Advanced Settings page, from the HTTP page, click Web

Services→Advanced Settings.

HHTTTTPP AAddvvaanncceedd SSeettttiinnggss

The Advanced Web Services page displays all services currently enabled on the printer and their port

numbers.

To remove all login restrictions for web services on the printer, under Web Services IP Lockout, click

Clear Lockout.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

Internet Protocol (IP) is a protocol within the Internet Protocol Suite that manages the transmission

of messages from computer to computer.

EEnnaabblliinngg TTCCPP//IIPP

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Network Settings→TCP/IP Settings.

3. Touch TCP/IP Enablement.

4. For IPv4 or IPv6, touch Enabled, then touch OK.

5. To apply the settings, touch Finish.

Note: By default, IPv4 is enabled. If you disable IPv4, before you can access the Embedded

Web Server, enable IPv4 or IPv6 at the printer control panel. For details, refer to IP and

HTTP.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg tthhee NNeettwwoorrkk AAddddrreessss MMaannuuaallllyy aatt tthhee

CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Network Settings→TCP/IP Settings.

3. Touch Dynamic Addressing.

4. Touch Disabled, then touch OK.

5. Touch IPv4, then type the IPv4 Address, IP Gateway Address, and Network Mask Address. After

each address, touch OK.

6. When you are finished, touch OK.

7. To apply the settings, touch Finish.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg DDNNSS SSeettttiinnggss aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

Domain Name System (DNS) is a system that maps host names to IP addresses.

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Network Settings→TCP/IP Settings.

3. Touch DNS Configuration.

a. Touch Host Name.

b. Type a host name.

c. Touch OK.

d. Touch Close.

Note: If DHCP is enabled, your DHCP server can provide the Domain Name and the

Requested Domain Name.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

e. Touch Domain Name.

f. For Requested Domain Name, type the domain name.

g. Touch OK.

h. Touch Close.

4. Touch DNS Servers.

a. Touch Primary DNS Server, type the server address, then touch OK.

b. Touch Alternate DNS Server #1, type the server address, then touch OK.

c. Touch Alternate DNS Server #2, type the server address, then touch OK.

d. Touch Close.

Note: If DHCP is enabled, you can configure the DHCP server to provide the DNS server IP

addresses.

5. Touch Close again.

6. To apply the settings, touch Finish.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg IIPP SSeettttiinnggss iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb SSeerrvveerr

If your printer has a valid network address, you can configure TCP/IP settings in the Embedded Web

Server. For details, refer to Assigning a Network Address.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg IIPPvv44

You can use IPv4 or IPv6 in addition to or in place of the other.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Network, next to a connection type, click Edit.

Note: The device uses separate IPv4, IPv6, and DNS settings for wired and wireless network

connections. Before you configure wireless IP settings, install the Xerox

Wireless Network

Interface, then connect to a wireless network. For details, refer to Connecting to a Wireless

Network.

3. For Configuration Settings, next to IP, click Edit.

4. To configure IPv4, click Show IPv4 Settings.

5. For Protocol, select Enabled.

6. For IP Address Resolution, select an option.

• BOOTP: This option permits the device to obtain an IP address from a BOOTP server that

does not respond to DHCP requests.

• DHCP: This option permits the device to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server. This option

permits the printer to obtain an IP address from a BOOTP server that is configured to accept

DHCP requests. The printer requests that the server register the IP address and hostname of

the printer with the DNS server.

• STATIC: This option disables dynamic addressing and allows you to type a static IP address.

Type a Machine IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

7. For Broadcast, select Enabled as needed.

Note: If the device does not obtain an IP address from a DHCP/BOOTP server, enable

broadcast. Enable broadcast when your DHCP/BOOTP server is on a different subnet than

the device and communicates through a relay agent router.

8. For Zero-Configuration Networking, for Self Assigned Address, select Enabled as needed. This

option instructs the device to assign itself an address when a DHCP server does not provide one.

9. Click Apply.

Note: If you select Default All, the device sets the IPv4, IPv6, and DNS values as the

default settings.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg IIPPvv66

IPv6 hosts can configure themselves automatically when connected to a routed IPv6 network using

the Internet Control Message Protocol Version 6 (ICMPv6). ICMPv6 performs error reporting for IP

along with other diagnostic functions. When first connected to a network, a host sends a link-local

multicast router solicitation request for configuration parameters. If suitably configured, routers

respond to this request with a router advertisement packet containing network-layer configuration

parameters.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Network, for a connection type, click Edit.

Note: The device uses separate IPv4, IPv6, and DNS settings for wired and wireless network

connections. Before you configure wireless IP settings, install the Xerox

Wireless Network

Interface, then connect to a wireless network. For details, refer to Connecting to a Wireless

Network.

3. For Configuration Settings, for IP, click Edit.

4. To configure IPv6, click Show IPv6 Settings.

Note: If both IPv4 and IPv6 are disabled, you cannot access the Embedded Web Server. To

access IPv4 and IPv6 settings in the Embedded Web Server, at the device control panel,

enable IPv4, IPv6, or both. If you disable IPv4 and IPv6 or change the IP addresses, any

dependent protocols are disabled.

5. For Protocol, select Enabled.

6. To allow the router to assign address prefixes, for Stateless Addresses, select Use Router Supplied

Prefixes.

7. To select how DHCP operates for IPv6, for Default Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)

Settings, select an option.

8. To enter the address manually, for Manual Address Options, select Enable Manual Address.

9. From the menu, select a router prefix, or type a new router prefix, then click Add.

10. To save the new settings, click Apply.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg DDNNSS

Domain Name System (DNS) is a system that maps host names to IP addresses.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Network, for a connection type, click Edit.

Note: The printer uses separate IPv4, IPv6, and DNS settings for wired and wireless

network connections. Before you configure wireless IP settings, install the Xerox

Wireless

Network Interface, then connect to a wireless network. For details, refer to Connecting to a

Wireless Network.

3. For Configuration Settings, for IP, click Edit.

4. To configure DNS, click Show DNS Settings.

5. For Requested Host Name, type a unique name for your printer. If the host name registers to the

DNS server successfully, the host name appears as a Verified Host Name. The default host name

is XRXxxx, where xxx is the MAC address of the printer.

Note: If no host name appears for Verified Host Name, the host name did not register to

the DNS server successfully. Configure your DHCP server to perform updates on behalf of

the DHCP clients or enter DNS records manually.

6. For Requested Domain Name, type the name of the domain to which the printer is connected. If

the domain name registers to the DNS server successfully, the domain name appears as a

Verified Domain Name.

Note: If no domain name appears for Verified Domain Name, the domain name did not

behalf of the DHCP clients or enter DNS records manually.

7. To allow users to see and connect to the printer using Bonjour, for Multicast DNS Registration,

select Enabled.

8. For Release this connection's DHCP leases and DNS registrations, select Enabled as needed. This

option allows the printer to send a release request to the DHCP and DNS servers. If the servers

grant the request, the servers release the current IP address and dynamic DNS names. The IP

addresses and DNS names renew immediately and when the printer is turned off.

9. For Additional DNS Server Addresses, type addresses as needed. If you have a DHCP server,

recognized addresses can appear in the DNS Server Addresses list if they were provided by the

server.

10. For DNS Connection Timeout, type the time in seconds that the printer waits to connect to a DNS

server. After the timeout period, the printer attempts to connect to any additional DNS servers.

11. To add the printer domain to the Domain Name Search List, for Append Device Domain, select

Enabled.

12. To add the parent domains of the printer to the Domain Name Search List, for Append Parent

Domains, select Enabled.

13. If you have a DHCP server, recognized search domain names can appear in the Domain Name

Search List if they were provided by the server. The list of domain names allows the DNS server to

recognize unqualified host names. If you want the printer to search for other domain names, for

Additional Search Domains, enter the names.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

14. To set the printer to use an IPv6 address before it uses an IPv4 address, select Prefer IPv6

Address over IPv4.

15. Click Apply.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

IPP

Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) is a standard network protocol that allows you to print and manage

jobs remotely. When IPP is configured, IPP authentication gives users the option to authenticate their

identities using IPP through HTTP authentication methods. An IPP client can pass user credentials to

the printer to use for authentication.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg IIPPPP

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. In the Protocol area, for IPP, click Edit.

3. For IPP Enablement, select On.

Note:

• IPP enablement requires a Web server reset.

• Enabling IPP authentication impacts AirPrint job submissions because AirPrint uses IPP.

4. To enable IPP authentication, for Authentication, select HTTP Basic with Secure IPP (IPPS). This

option authenticates to user accounts that are configured in the device user database or in the

network database.

Note: HTTP Basic is unencrypted, unless authentication credentials are sent using HTTPS.

5. If HTTP Basic with Secure IPP (IPPS) authentication is enabled, for Validation Location, select an

option.

• Validation on the Device: This option enables IPP authentication of user accounts that are

configured in the device user database. For details, refer to User Database

• Validation on the Network: This option enables IPP authentication of user accounts that are

configured on the network authentication server for the device.

6. To configure Secure IPP Mode, select an option:

• IPP and Secure IPP (IPPS): This option allows the device to accept insecure IPP jobs and

secure IPPS jobs. This option is the default setting.

• Secure IPP (IPPS) only: This option allows the device to accept secure IPPS jobs only. If you

select this option, IPPS is shown to users as an available option for jobs submitted using

AirPrint. IPP is not shown as an available option.

7. You can edit configuration settings for HTTP, and the Device User Database or Authentication

Server.

• To edit HTTP settings, in the Configuration Settings area, for HTTP, click Edit.

• To edit Device User Database settings, in the Configuration Settings area, for Device User

Database, click Edit.

Note: The Device User Database option is available only when HTTP Basic with Secure

IPP (IPPS) is selected, and, for Validation Location, Validate on the Device is selected.

• To edit Authentication Server settings, in the Configuration Settings area, for Authentication

Server, click Edit.

Note: The Authentication Server option is available only when HTTP Basic with Secure

IPP (IPPS) is selected, and, for Validation Location, Validate on the Network is selected.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

8. To configure the IPP identify printer functionality, for Identify Printer, select an option.

• On: This option enables an IPP client to request the printer to identify itself through a graphic

or sound.

• Off: This option revokes the ability of an IPP client to request the printer to identify itself

through a graphic or sound.

Note: When the IPP client requests sound, the Identify Printer feature uses the Fault tone.

You can configure the Fault tone on the printer control panel. For details, refer to the

System Administrator Guide.

9. If Fax is supported and configured, you can configure Remote IPP FaxOut Log Display. To

configure the Remote IPP FaxOut Log Display, select an option.

• On: This option allows a remote user to view the IPP FaxOut Log.

• Off: This option does not permit remote users to view the IPP FaxOut Log.

10. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

LDAP

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a protocol used to process queries and updates to an

LDAP information directory, on an external server. LDAP can also be used for network authentication

and authorization. LDAP directories are heavily optimized for read performance. Use this page to

define how the printer retrieves user information from an LDAP directory.

AAddddiinngg LLDDAAPP SSeerrvveerr IInnffoorrmmaattiioonn

The LDAP Server page displays the current LDAP servers configured for your printer. You can configure

a maximum of nine LDAP servers for your printer.

To add an LDAP server:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. In the Protocol area, for LDAP, click Edit.

3. Click Add New.

4. For Server Information, select the preferred address type.

5. For Friendly Name, type a name for the LDAP server.

6. Type the appropriately formatted address or host name of your server, then change the default

port number as needed.

7. Type the appropriately formatted address or host name of your backup server, then change the

default port number as needed.

8. For LDAP Server, select an LDAP server type.

• Exchange: This option is for use with Microsoft

Exchange.

• Domino: This option is for use with Lotus Domino.

• ADS: This option is for use with Microsoft

Active Directory Service.

9. Click Apply.

MMaannaaggiinngg LLDDAAPP SSeerrvveerrss iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb SSeerrvveerr

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. In the Protocol area, for LDAP, click Edit.

• To edit an LDAP server configuration, in the Actions column of the server to edit, click Edit.

• To copy an LDAP server configuration, select the server to copy, then click Copy From.

• To delete all LDAP servers configured to your printer, click Delete All.

• To enable SASL binds, click LDAP Policies.

3. Click Close.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg LLDDAAPP SSeerrvveerr OOppttiioonnaall IInnffoorrmmaattiioonn

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. In the Protocol area, for LDAP, click Edit.

3. Click Add New.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

4. For Optional Information, in the Search Directory Root field, type the root path of the search

directory in Base DN format.

Note: For details on Base DN, refer to the RFC 2849 - LDAP Data Interchange Format

Technical Specification on the Internet Engineering Task Force website.

5. Specify the login credentials required to access the LDAP directory.

• None: This option instructs the printer to access the LDAP directory.

• Logged-in User: This option instructs the printer to log in to the repository and provide the

credentials of the logged-in user.

• Device: This option instructs the printer to use specific credentials when the printer accesses

the LDAP repository. If you select Device, type the credentials in the Login Name and

Password fields. To update an existing password, select Select to save new password.

6. To use LDAPS, for Secure LDAP Connection, select Enable Secure Connection (LDAPS).

a. To allow the printer to validate certificates, select Validate Repository SSL Certificate

(trusted, not expired, correct FQDN).

b. To select a security certificate, for Trusted SSL Certificate, click the menu, then select an

option.

c. To view the selected certificate details, or save the certificate to your computer, click View/

Save.

7. To define the number of addresses returned in a search, for Maximum Number of Search Results,

type a number from 5–100. The default number is 100. To use the maximum number of search

results specified by the LDAP server, select Use LDAP Server Maximum.

8. To allow the printer to use the current settings for the LDAP server, for Search Timeout, select Use

LDAP Server Timeout. To specify a time that the printer waits before it times out, select Wait,

then type the number of seconds from 5–100. The default is 30 seconds.

Note: If you experience trouble retrieving results from your LDAP server, use the Wait

option.

9. If you connect your primary LDAP server to other servers, to include more LDAP servers in your

searches, select LDAP Referrals.

10. For Perform Search on Mapped Fields, select an option.

• Name: This option instructs the printer to query the configured name field.

• Surname and Given Name: This option instructs the printer to query the configured surname

and given name fields.

• Display Name: This option instructs the printer to query the configured display name field.

Note: If you want to sort your search results, for Sort Results by Mapped Field, select an

option.

11. Click Apply.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg aa SSeeccuurree LLDDAAPP CCoonnnneeccttiioonn

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. In the Protocol area, for LDAP, click Edit.

3. On the LDAP page, click Add New.

4. To enable a secure connection to the LDAP server, for Secure LDAP Connection, select Enable

Secure Connection (LDAPS).

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

5. To validate the SSL certificate used for HTTPS, select Validate Server Certificate (trusted, not

expired, correct FQDN).

6. To view a list of external root or intermediate trusted SSL certificates, click View Root/

Intermediate Trusted Certificates.

7. For Root/Intermediate Trusted Certificates, select a certificate.

8. To view the selected certificate details, or to save the certificate to your computer, click View/

Save.

Note: If the LDAP Server has encryption enabled, ensure that a certificate issued from the

LDAP server certificate authority is installed on the device.

LLDDAAPP SSeerrvveerr CCoonntteexxttss

Contexts are defined starting points in an LDAP database from which the search function begins

searching. Contexts are used with the Authentication feature. You can configure the printer to add an

authentication context automatically to the Login Name provided by the user.

Note: Contexts are used only if you configure LDAP server settings and select NDS as the server

type.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg LLDDAAPP CCoonntteexxttss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for LDAP, click Edit.

3. Click Add New.

4. Click the Contexts tab.

5. For Default Login Context, type details as needed.

6. Click Apply.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg LLDDAAPP UUsseerr MMaappppiinnggss

LDAP servers display different results depending on how they implement mappings. Use this page to

map LDAP fields to fields on your printer. Editing current map settings allows you to fine-tune server

search results.

DDeeffiinniinngg UUsseerr MMaappppiinnggss

1. On the LDAP Server page, click User Mappings.

2. For Search, type a user name in the Enter Name field, then click Search.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

3. For Imported Heading, for each field, make menu selections. Remap the headings as needed. The

schema on the LDAP server defines the headings.

Note:

• If you are using Internet fax, ensure that the Internet Fax field is not set to No

Mappings Available. This setting prevents the Network Address Book from displaying

on the printer control panel Internet fax screen. If your LDAP server does not contain a

unique Internet fax address field, you can set the fax address to match the heading for

email address.

• If the user mapping is incorrect, an LDAP search in the Embedded Web Server can work

properly, but authentication at the printer control panel fails.

4. Click Apply.

LLDDAAPP CCuussttoomm FFiilltteerrss

You can edit custom filters so that text strings typed at the control panel are changed to match the

format that the LDAP server requires.

There are three types of filters that you can customize:

• LDAP Authentication Filter allows you to add text to the beginning or end of a User ID, or the

\USERID or USERID@domain_name.

• Email Address Book Filter allows you to customize the standard filter that is used when a user

types a name to search in the Network Address Book.

• User ID Query Filter allows you to customize the standard filter that the printer uses when

searching for the name of the logged-in user. For example, when remote authorization is

configured, and a user logs in at the control panel, the printer searches the authorization server

using this filter. The standard filter looks in the field mapped as the Login Name field. If you are

using an ADS LDAP server, this field is typically sAMAccountName. If you want a search for a

specific person to return an exact match, do not use wildcard characters.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg CCuussttoomm FFiilltteerrss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for LDAP, click Edit.

3. Click the Custom Filters tab.

4. For LDAP Authentication, select Prepend Domain Name. This setting prepends the base Domain

Name (DN) to a user Relative Distinguished Name (RDN) when authenticating the user. Use the

Common Name (CN) attribute to specify USERID in the base DN.

Note:

• If Authenticated User is selected for Login Credentials to Access LDAP Server, some

UNIX/Linux LDAP servers can require setting the Prepend Domain Name attribute.

• For details on Base DN formatting, refer to the RFC 2849 - LDAP Data Interchange

Format (LDIF) Technical Specification on the IETF website.

5. For Email Address Book Filter, select Enable Custom Filter.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

6. Type the LDAP search string or filter as needed, where LDAP represents the string provided for the

query. The filter defines a series of conditions that the LDAP search must fulfill to return the

desired information. For example, to find people only, type (ObjectClass=Person)&(cn=LDAP*).

7. For User ID Query Filter, select Enable Custom Filter.

8. Type the LDAP search string or filter where LDAP represents the string provided for the query. The

filter defines a series of conditions that the LDAP search must fulfill to return the desired

information. For example, to ensure that only user information is returned rather than equipment

or conference rooms, type (objectClass=user) (sAMAccountName=LDAP).

9. Click Apply.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

LPR/LPD

The Line Printer Daemon (LPD) and Line Printer Remote (LPR) protocols provide printer spooling and

network print server functionality for UNIX-based systems, such as HP-UX, Linux, and Macintosh.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For LPR/LPD Protocol, click Edit.

3. For Protocol, select Enabled.

4. For Port Number, type a value.

5. To allow multiple printer languages in a single job, for PDL Switching, select Enabled. This option

allows the printer to process a single print job that contains two or more printer languages. An

example is a PostScript print job with a PCL header.

6. For PDL banner page attributes to override LPR control file attributes for job name and owner,

select Enabled. This feature allows you to replace the standard information displayed on a

banner page with the user name and job name from the print job.

7. For Place temporary hold on which jobs, select an option:

• None (Use printer's default banner sheet job name if data file 1st): This option omits a

printer wait time to receive the job control information. This selection can cause banner page

information to print incorrectly.

• Only those with data file received 1st: This option holds the job when the data file for the

job is received first. This option ensures that the printer waits to receive the control file

information to print banner page details correctly.

• All (consistent with older implementations): This option puts all jobs on hold. The job prints

when the printer receives all job data. This setting can cause jobs to print slowly but results in

accurate banner page information.

8. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

NFC

Near Field Communication (NFC), is a technology that enables devices to communicate when they

are nearby. NFC allows you to add a printer to your Android mobile device easily. After you add the

printer, there is no need to use NFC on that printer. You can use NFC to obtain the network interface

to establish a TCP/IP connection between your device and the printer.

Devices can communicate using NFC when the devices are within the following ranges:

• Device with case: 17–20 mm

• Device without case: 20–25 mm

Note: The actual range can vary depending on device manufacturer.

To configure NFC:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For NFC, click Edit.

3. For NFC Services, select Enabled.

4. Click Save.

Note: For details about mobile device setup and operation, refer to the Xerox printer User

Guide.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

NTP

The Network Time Protocol (NTP) feature synchronizes the internal clock of the device over a network

connection. The device checks the NTP server when you enable NTP, when you change the NTP

settings, and every 24–hour period during device cleanup. You can specify the maximum amount of

time for the difference between the device internal clock and the NTP server clock. If the device

internal clock exceeds this threshold, the device synchronizes with the NTP server automatically.

If your device uses DHCP, valid addresses and offsets are accepted when the DHCP server provides

one or both of the following:

• The addresses of NTP servers in the network, specified by DHCP option 42

• The Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) offset

If the addresses or offset received from the DHCP server are invalid, the values are ignored and the

manually set values are applied.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for NTP, click Edit.

3. For NTP Enabled, select Enabled.

4. Select IPv4 Address or Host Name.

• IPv4 Address: For IP Address: Port and Alternate IP Address: Port, type the IP addresses and

port numbers.

• Host Name: For Host Name: Port, and Alternate Host Name: Port, type the host names and

port numbers.

5. For IP Address: Port and Alternate IP Address: Port, type the address and port numbers.

6. Click Save.

7. For the new settings to take effect, restart your device.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

POP3

Post Office Protocol, version 3 (POP3) is a protocol that allows email clients to retrieve email from

remote servers over TCP/IP on network port 110. This printer uses POP3 for the Internet fax and email

features to retrieve fax jobs over email.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Under Protocol, for POP3 Setup, click Edit.

3. For Under Server Information, select IPv4 or Host Name.

4. Type the address or server name.

5. For Login Name, type the name assigned to the printer for logging in to the POP3 server.

6. For Password, type a password. For Retype password, retype the password to verify.

7. To save the new password, click Select to save new password.

8. For the POP3 Settings pane, select Enable receipt of Email via POP3.

9. For Polling Interval, type a value from 1 through 60.

10. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

Proxy Server

A proxy server acts as a go-between for clients seeking services and servers that provide them. The

proxy server filters client requests and if the requests meet the proxy server filtering rules, it grants

the request and allows the connection.

A proxy server has two main purposes:

• To keep any devices behind it anonymous for security purposes.

• To cache content from resources, such as Web pages from a Web server, to increase resource

access time.

Proxy server settings apply to features that use HTTP or HTTPS. Examples include Remote Services,

Xerox Online Support, Workflow Scanning destinations, workflow pool repositories, and Extensible

Service Setup.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg tthhee PPrrooxxyy SSeerrvveerr

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for Proxy Server, click Edit.

3. For HTTP Proxy Server, select Enabled.

4. Select the HTTP Proxy Server address type. Options are IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, or Host

Name.

5. Type the appropriately formatted Proxy Server address and port number.

6. Click Save.

Note: Not all printer models support all features that use the proxy server.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

Raw TCP/IP Printing

Raw TCP/IP is used to open a TCP socket-level connection over Port 9100, and stream a print-ready

file to the printer input buffer. It then closes the connection either after sensing an End Of Job

character in the PDL or after expiration of a preset timeout value. Port 9100 does not require an LPR

request from the computer or the use of an LPD running on the printer. Raw TCP/IP printing is

selected in Windows as the Standard TCP/IP port.

Note: Enable TCP/IP before enabling Raw TCP/IP printing.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg RRaaww TTCCPP//IIPP SSeettttiinnggss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for Raw TCP/IP Printing, click Edit.

3. On the Raw TCP/IP Printing tab, for Protocol, select Enabled.

4. For TCP Port Number, ensure that Port 1 is set to 9100.

Note: To emulate HP JetDirect EX Plus 3, set Port 2 to 9101 and Port 3 to 9102.

5. For Bidirectional, for each active port, select Enabled.

6. For Maximum Connections per Port, for each active port, type a number from 1 through 32.

7. For End of Job Timeout, for each active port, type a time in seconds from 0 through 1800.

8. For PDL Switching, for each active port, select Enabled as needed.

Note: PDL Switching allows the printer to switch automatically between multiple supported

PDLs within a single job.

9. To save the new settings, click Apply.

10. To return all settings to the default status, click Default All.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg RRaaww TTCCPP//IIPP AAddvvaanncceedd SSeettttiinnggss

1. On the Raw TCP/IP Printing page, click the Advanced tab.

2. Under Connections, set the following:

• Set the Maximum Connections per port between 1–32. The default port value is 32.

• To allow concurrent jobs to process for each port connection, type a number between 0–500

jobs in each port. Type 0 to allow unlimited concurrent jobs.

• To limit the number of jobs that are active for each port connection, type a number between

0–32768. Type 0 to allow unlimited number of active jobs.

3. Under Job Boundary Determination:

Type the End of Job Timeout between 0–1800 seconds to specify the amount of time to pass

before a job processes with an End of Job character. The default time is 300 seconds.Type 0 to

disable end of job detection by timeout.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

4. Under Backchannel Data:

Enable Backchannel Data Transmission to Client, then, enable Out of Order Backchannel Data

to allow data from several jobs to be interspersed.

Note: Out of Order Backchannel Data is only available when Backchannel Data

Transmission to Client is enabled.

5. Under Banner Page Printing:

• To restrict banner pages to print for specific jobs only, select the job types from the Banner

Page Enabled drop-down menu. Options are First Job Only, No Jobs, or All Jobs.

• To enable banner pages to print before each PDL document within a single job, select

Enabled for Banner Page for Each Document of Job.

• To restrict banner pages to print for jobs that specifically request them through PJL, select

Enabled for Banner Page for Job Containing only PJL Commands.

6. Miscellaneous

• To allow the printer to switch between multiple PDLs within a single job, select Enabled for

Language (PDL) Switching within PJL Job.

• To force parsing of job data, select Enabled for Job Data Parsing Override.

Note: Job data is not parsed when bidirectional communication and PDL switching are

disabled.

7. Click Apply to save the new settings or Undo to retain the previous settings.

Click Default All to reset settings to default values.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

SLP

Printers use Service Location Protocol (SLP) to announce and look up services on a local network

without prior configuration. When SLP is enabled, the printer becomes a Service Agent (SA) and

announces its services to User Agents (UA) on the network using SLP.

Directory Agents (DA) are components that cache services. They are used in larger networks to reduce

the amount of traffic. DAs are optional. If a DA is present, then User Agents (UAs) and System Agents

(SAs) are required to use it instead of communicating directly with the printer.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg SSLLPP

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. In the Protocol area, for SLP, click Edit.

3. For Protocol, select Enabled.

4. For Directory Agent, type the IP address for the Directory Agent (DA), as needed.

5. To group services, for Scope 1, 2, and 3, type a name as needed. Printers cannot recognize

services that are in different scopes.

6. For Message Type, select an option.

• Multicast: This option routes multicast packets between subnets.

• Broadcast: This option does not route packets between subnets.

7. Under Multicast Radius, type a value from 0 through 255.

Multicast Radius defines how many routers the multicast packet can cross.

8. For Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU), type a value from 484 through 32768.

Note: The maximum MTU for IP over Ethernet is 1500 bytes.

9. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

ThinPrint Client

For the ThinPrint workflow, a ThinPrint server compresses your ThinPrint print job. If you select the

encryption option, the server encrypts the ThinPrint job. Your Xerox device is a ThinPrint client printer

that receives, decompresses, and decrypts the print data, then prints the job. ThinPrint is disabled by

default. For information on ThinPrint servers, refer to ThinPrint Engine on Print Servers at ThinPrint

Manuals & Guides.

TThhiinnPPrriinntt CClliieenntt CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee RReeqquuiirreemmeennttss

For ThinPrint TLS channel encryption, certificates are required on both the ThinPrint Server and the

Xerox device. The certificates can be created by an individual certificate authority server at the

customer site, or by an official certificate source. Refer to Security Certificates and Creating

Certificates at ThinPrint Manuals & Guides.

• The ThinPrint Server requires a Server Authentication Certificate and the corresponding Certificate

Authority Root Certificate. The Certificate Authority Root Certificate is the certificate of the

Certificate Authority that signed the Server Authentication Certificate.

• The Xerox device requires a ThinPrint Server Authentication Certificate that is signed by the same

Root Certificate Authority that signed the ThinPrint Server Authentication Certificate of the

ThinPrint Server.

• To upload certificates from the certificate management page, system administrator credentials

are required. As the system administrator, after you upload a certificate, from the ThinPrint page

for your Xerox device, select and assign the certificate for ThinPrint Encryption.

Note: The ThinPrint Server Authentication Certificate on the device and the ThinPrint Server

Authentication Certificate on the server can be the same or different certificates. It is

recommended that each device has a unique certificate.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg aa TThhiinnPPrriinntt CClliieenntt

To configure your printer as a ThinPrint Client:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. In the Protocol area, for ThinPrint, click Edit.

3. For ThinPrint Printing, select Enabled.

Note: The Printer Name is a read-only field, based on the Device Name. If no Device Name

is configured, the Printer Name value displays the Host Name.

4. To add printers to a named group, type the group name in the Printer Class field. You can enter

up to seven ASCII characters or special characters in the Printer Class field.

5. The packet size determines the size of the unit for transferring the printing data. To set the packet

size, choose an option:

• To allow the ThinPrint Server to determine the packet size, select Auto-Allow ThinPrint Server

to Choose.

• To change the default setting, clear Auto-Allow ThinPrint Server to Choose. Type a value

from 200–64000.

6. The default TCP Port is 4000. To use a different port, in the TCP Port field, type a port number.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

7. To enable encryption for your ThinPrint print job, select Activate TLS.

8. For Select ThinPrint Certificate, select a certificate for your Xerox device.

• If you choose to use TLS, you cannot print a ThinPrint job unless a ThinPrint certificate is

installed on your Xerox device.

• If the ThinPrint Certificate is not installed on your Xerox device, upload the certificate. For

ThinPrint Certificate upload instructions, in the ThinPrint Encryption section, click the I icon.

• To upload a ThinPrint Certificate, click the View Xerox Device Certificates link. For details,

refer to Creating and Installing a Xerox® Device Certificate.

• After a ThinPrint Certificate has been installed successfully, the certificate is available in the

Select ThinPrint Certificate menu.

Note: ThinPrint encryption requires that your Xerox device and the ThinPrint server have

identical configuration. If both systems are not configured the same, job submissions fail.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

SMB Filing

You can specify Kerberos authentication options for features that file images to an SMB-shared

network location.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg KKeerrbbeerrooss AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn OOppttiioonnss ffoorr

SSMMBB

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for SMB Filing, click Edit.

3. For With Kerberos Tickets, for Workflow Scanning, Server Fax, and Scan to Home features, select

an option:

• Always File with Kerberos Ticket: This option instructs the printer to attempt to use Kerberos

authentication to the SMB shared network location. Configure Network Authentication or

Smart Card Authentication using a Kerberos server.

• Prefer Filing with Kerberos Ticket: This option instructs the printer to authenticate to the

SMB shared network location with a Kerberos ticket if available. If a Kerberos ticket is not

available, or Kerberos authentication fails, the printer attempts to authenticate using other

methods, such as NT, or NTLM.

• Do Not File with Kerberos Ticket: This option instructs the printer to attempt to authenticate

to the SMB shared network location using other methods, such as NT, or NTLM. Do not select

this option when Smart Card authentication is enabled. If you select this option when Smart

Card authentication is enabled, SMB file transmission fails, and an error message appears on

the touch screen.

4. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

SMTP Server

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is an Internet standard used to transmit email across IP

networks. Your printer uses SMTP to transmit scanned images, Internet fax jobs, and alerts through

email.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg SSMMTTPP SSeerrvveerr SSeettttiinnggss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for SMTP, click Edit.

3. To allow the printer to use DNS to identify an SMTP server on your network automatically, for

Server, select Use DNS.

4. To specify an SMTP server manually, select Specify SMTP Server manually.

1. For address type, select an option. Options are IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, or Host Name.

2. Type the appropriately formatted address and port number.

5. For Device Email Address, type the email address of the printer.

6. Click Apply.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg SSMMTTPP AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn SSeettttiinnggss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for SMTP (Email), click Edit.

3. On the SMTP (Email) page, click the SMTP Authentication tab.

4. For Login credentials that are used for user-initiated email jobs, select an option:

• None: This option does not require the device to provide a user name or password to the

server.

• Device: This option uses the information that is provided in the Login Name and Password

Fields to access the server.

To update the password for an existing Login Name, enable Select to save new password.

• Logged-in User: This option uses the credentials of the authenticated user to access the

server.

Note: If network authentication is configured to use a Kerberos server, and you want to

use Kerberos tickets, for Kerberos tickets, select Always.

• Prompt at device control panel: This option requires users to type a login name and

password at the control panel.

5. For Login credentials that are used for device-initiated email messages, select an option:

• None: This option does not require the device to provide a user name or password to the

server.

• Device: This option uses the information that is provided in the Login Name and Password

Fields to access the server.

To update the password for an existing Login Name, enable Select to save new password.

6. Click Apply.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg SSMMTTPP CCoonnnneeccttiioonn EEnnccrryyppttiioonn SSeettttiinnggss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for SMTP (Email), click Edit.

3. On the SMTP (Email) page, click the Connection Encryption tab.

4. To encrypt SMTP communication, for Encryption Mechanism used by devices when

communicating with the SMTP Server, select an option.

Note: If you do not know the encryption method that your server supports, select

STARTTLS (if available). If you select STARTTLS (if available), the printer attempts to use

STARTTLS. If your server does not support STARTTLS, SMTP communication is not

encrypted.

5. Click Apply.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg SSMMTTPP FFiillee SSiizzee MMaannaaggeemmeenntt

1. On the SMTP (Email) page, click the File Size Management tab.

2. To define a maximum message size for messages with attachments, type a value between 512–

20480 KB in the Maximum Message Size field.

3. To improve transmission speed, set messages to fragment between 1–500 times.

4. To set a maximum job size, type a value between 512–2000000 KB in the Total Job Size field.

5. If you selected more than 1 fragment in Number of Fragments, under Email Job Splitting

Boundary, select an option:

• Page Boundary instructs the mail client not to reassemble the job on receipt.

• Automatic Boundary instructs the mail client to reassemble the job on receipt.

6. Click Apply.

TTeessttiinngg SSMMTTPP CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn SSeettttiinnggss

1. On the SMTP (Email) page, click the Test Configuration tab.

2. Under To Address, type an email address.

3. To send a test email to the address, click Send Email.

If the email transmission succeeds, a confirmation message appears. If the transmission fails, an

error message appears.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a set of network protocols designed to allow you to

manage and monitor devices on your network.

You can use the SNMP configuration pages in the Embedded Web Server to:

• Enable or disable Authentication Failure Generic Traps.

• Enable SNMPv3 to create an encrypted channel for secure printer management.

• Assign privacy, authentication protocols, and keys to Administrative and key user accounts.

• Assign read and write access to User accounts.

• Limit SNMP access to the printer using hosts.

EEnnaabblliinngg SSNNMMPP

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for SNMP, click Edit.

3. Select an option:

• To enable SNMP v1/v2c, select Enable SNMP v1/v2c Protocols.

• To enable SNMP v3, select Enable SNMP v3 Protocol.

4. To prompt the printer to generate a trap for every SNMP request processed with an invalid

community name, for Authentication Failure Generic Traps, select Enabled.

5. Click Save.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg SSNNMMPPvv11//vv22cc

SNMP version 1 (SNMPv1) is the initial implementation of the SNMP protocol. SNMPv1 operates over

protocols such as User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and IP.

SNMPv2c includes improvements in performance, confidentiality, and manager-to-manager

communications over SNMPv1, however SNMPv2c uses the simple community-based security scheme

of SNMPv1.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for SNMP, click Edit.

3. Click Edit SNMPv1/v2c Properties.

4. For GET Community Name, type a name.

5. For SET Community Name, type a name.

The default SET Community Name is the device serial number, or private. You can change the

community name with this setting.

6. For Confirm SET Community Name, re-enter the SET Community Name.

Caution: Changes made to the GET or SET community names for this printer require

corresponding changes to the GET or SET community names for applications that use

SNMP.

7. To save the SET Community Name, select the check box for Select to save new ‘SET Community

Name’.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

8. For TRAP Community Name, type a name.

Note: To specify the default community name for all traps that the printer generates, use

the Default TRAP Community Name. Individual trap community names that are specified

for each trap destination address can override the community name. Each trap community

name must be unique.

9. Click Save.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg SSNNMMPPvv33

SNMPv3 is the current standard version of SNMP defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force

(IETF). SNMPv3 provides three important security features:

• Message integrity to ensure that a packet has not been tampered with in transit

• Authentication to verify that the message is from a valid source

• Encryption of packets to prevent unauthorized access

EEddiittiinngg SSNNMMPPvv33 SSeeccuurriittyy SSeettttiinnggss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for SNMP, click Edit.

3. Click Edit SNMPv3 Properties.

4. For Security, select an Authentication/Encryption protocol pair for SNMPv3.

5. To use factory-default administrator account values, for Administrator Account, select Account

Enabled.

6. To use factory-default print driver and remote client account values, for Print Drivers/Remote

Clients Account, select Account Enabled.

7. Click Save.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg tthhee SSNNMMPPvv33 AAddmmiinniissttrraattoorr AAccccoouunntt

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for SNMP, click Edit.

3. Click Edit SNMPv3 Properties.

4. To enable the administrator account, for Administrator Account, select Account Enabled.

5. Type the User Name for the Administrator Account.

6. Type, then confirm the Authentication Password.

7. Type, then confirm the Privacy Password.

Note:

• The passwords must be at least eight characters in length.

• To set the account credentials to factory-default values, select Default All.

8. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg tthhee SSNNMMPPvv33 PPrriinntt DDrriivveerrss//RReemmoottee CClliieennttss AAccccoouunntt

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for SNMP, click Edit.

3. Click Edit SNMPv3 Properties.

4. For Print Drivers/Remote Clients Account, click Account Enabled. This account allows Xerox

clients and print drivers limited access to objects on the device.

5. Type the User Name for the Print Drivers/Remote Clients Account.

6. Type, then confirm the Authentication Password.

7. Type, then confirm the Privacy Password.

Note:

• The passwords must be at least eight characters in length.

• To set the account credentials to factory-default values, select Default All.

8. Click Save.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg SSNNMMPP AAddvvaanncceedd SSeettttiinnggss

You can add, edit, or delete IP addresses for Network Management workstations that receive traps

from the printer.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg SSNNMMPP AAddvvaanncceedd SSeettttiinnggss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for SNMP, click Edit.

3. Click Advanced Settings.

• To add an IP trap destination address, for Trap Destination Addresses, click Add IP Address.

• To edit an address, click Edit.

• To delete an address, select the check box for the address, then click Delete.

Adding or Editing an IP Trap Destination Address

1. On the Advanced Settings page, click Add IP Address, or select an existing address and click Edit.

2. Type the IP address of the host running the SNMP manager that receives traps.

3. Type the UDP Port Number. The default is 162 for traps.

4. Select the SNMP version based on what the system receiving traps supports.

5. Select the type of traps that the SNMP manager receives under Traps to be Received.

6. Click Save to apply the new settings or Undo to retain the previous settings.

7. Click Cancel to return to the previous page.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

WSD

Web Services for Devices (WSD) is technology from Microsoft that provides a standard method for

discovering and using network connected devices. It is supported in Windows Vista, Windows Server

2008, and newer operating systems. WSD is one of several supported communication protocols.

EEnnaabblliinngg WWSSDD

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for WSD, click Edit.

3. For WSD Services, select Enabled.

4. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Network Connectivity

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

This chapter contains:

• Setting Access Rights ................................................................................................................. 86

• Configuring Authentication Settings .......................................................................................... 88

• Configuring Authorization Settings ............................................................................................ 99

• HTTPS (TLS)............................................................................................................................. 108

• FIPS 140-2............................................................................................................................... 109

• Stored Data Encryption............................................................................................................ 112

• IP Filtering ............................................................................................................................... 113

• Audit Log................................................................................................................................. 115

• Network Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 118

• Support Logs............................................................................................................................ 119

• McAfee Embedded Control....................................................................................................... 120

• IPsec........................................................................................................................................ 123

• Security Certificates ................................................................................................................. 129

• 802.1X..................................................................................................................................... 136

• System Timeout....................................................................................................................... 138

• Overwriting Image Data .......................................................................................................... 139

• PostScript Passwords................................................................................................................ 142

• Hiding User Names on the Control Panel.................................................................................. 143

• Verifying the Software ............................................................................................................. 144

• Restricting Print File Software Updates..................................................................................... 145

• Specifying Email and Internet Fax Recipient Restrictions .......................................................... 146

• System Administrator Password ............................................................................................... 147

For reference:

www.xerox.com/security

Setting Access Rights

You can control access to apps and features by setting up authentication and authorization.

Personalization allows the printer to retrieve user information to customize features.

AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn

Authentication is the process of confirming your identity. When the system administrator enables

authentication, the printer compares the information that you provide to another source of

information, such as an LDAP directory. The information can be a user name and password, or the

information stored on a magnetic, proximity, or smart card. If the information is valid, you are

considered an authenticated user.

There are several ways to authenticate a user:

• User Name/Password - Validate on the Device: This option enables local authentication. Users

prove their identity by typing a user name and password at the control panel or in the Embedded

Web Server. The printer compares the user credentials to the information stored in the user

database. If you have a limited number of users, or do not have access to an authentication

server, use this authentication method.

• User Name/Password - Validate on the Network: This option enables network authentication.

Users prove their identity by typing a user name and password at the control panel or in the

Embedded Web Server. The printer compares the user credentials to the information stored on an

authentication server.

Note: The printer can use one of the following authentication server types: Kerberos

(Solaris or Windows), SMB (Windows 2000/2003), or LDAP.

• Convenience Authentication: This option enables authentication for a Proximity Card Reader.

Users swipe a pre-programmed identification card at the control panel. To use this method,

purchase and install a USB card reader and an authentication server that supports the

Xerox

Convenience Authentication API.

• Xerox Secure Access - Unified ID System: This option enables authentication for the Xerox

Secure Access Unified ID System. Users present a pre-programmed identification card to a card

reader at the control panel. The printer compares the user credentials to the information stored

on the Xerox

Secure Access server. To use this method, purchase and install the Xerox Secure

Access Unified ID System.

• Smart Cards: This option enables authentication for a Smartcard Reader. Users insert a pre-

programmed identification card in a carder reader at the control panel. To use this method,

purchase and install a Smartcard Reader system.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee LLooggiinn MMeetthhoodd ffoorr tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb SSeerrvveerr

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click Login Methods.

3. For Control Panel & Website Login Methods, click Edit.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

4. For Website Login, select an option.

Note: Website Login is only available when one of the following authentication methods is

enabled for the control panel:

• Convenience Authentication

• Xerox Secure Access - Unified ID System

• Smart Cards

5. Click Save.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee LLooggiinn MMeetthhoodd ffoorr tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click Login Methods.

3. For Control Panel & Website Login Methods, click Edit.

4. For Control Panel Login, select an option.

5. If you selected Convenience Authentication or Smart Cards as the authentication method, you

can also allow users to log in at the control panel. This option is useful if a user loses a smart card,

but must access the device. For Alternate Control Panel Login, select User Name / Password -

Validate on the Network.

6. Click Save.

Note: The first time you select Smart Cards as the authentication method, you are

prompted for a Feature Enablement Key. The Feature Enablement Key is included in the

Common Access Card Enablement Kit.

AAuutthhoorriizzaattiioonn

Authorization is the function of specifying the features that users are allowed to access, and the

process of approving or disapproving access. You can configure the printer to allow users to access the

printer, but restrict access to certain features, tools, and apps. For example, you can allow users to

access copying but restrict access to scanning. You can also control access to features at specific

times of the day. For example, you can restrict a group of users from printing during peak business

hours.

There are two types of authorization:

• Local Authorization verifies user information on the printer to approve access.

• Network Authorization verifies user information stored externally in a network database, such as

an LDAP directory, to approve access.

PPeerrssoonnaalliizzaattiioonn

Personalization is the process of customizing apps for a specific user. When a user selects the Scan to

Home or Email Scanning feature, the device searches an LDAP directory for the home directory and

email address of that user.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

Configuring Authentication Settings

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg LLooccaall AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn SSeettttiinnggss

When you configure local authentication, users prove their identity by typing a user name and

password at the control panel or in the Embedded Web Server. The device compares the user

credentials to the information stored in the user database. If you have a limited number of users, or

do not have access to an authentication server, use this authentication method.

To configure access rights using local authentication:

• Set the login method to User Name / Password - Validate on the Device. For details, refer to

Setting the Login Method for the Embedded Web Server.

• Add user information to the user information database.

• If you enabled Personalization, configure LDAP server settings. For details, refer to Configuring

LDAP Server Optional Information.

• Configure authorization settings. For details, refer to Configuring Authorization Settings.

The Login Methods page in the Embedded Web Server provides links to authentication and

personalization configuration settings.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click Login Methods.

UUsseerr DDaattaabbaassee

The user database stores user credential information. The printer uses this information for local

authentication and authorization, and for Xerox

Standard Accounting. When you configure local

authentication, the printer checks the credentials that a user provides against the information in the

user database. When you configure local authorization, the printer checks the user database to

determine which features the user is allowed to access.

Adding, Editing, or Viewing User Information in the User Database

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting→Device User

Database.

• To add a user, click Add New User.

• To edit an existing user, for the user, click Edit.

2. For each user, type a user name and a friendly name.

Note: After you add a user name and friendly name, you can edit the Friendly Name field,

but you cannot edit the User Name field.

3. Type a password for the user. To verify the password, retype it.

Note: The Password field appears only if the selected authentication method is Local

Authentication.

4. To add a user to a role, for the role, select the check box:

• Accounting Administrator: This role allows the user to access accounting settings, apps, and

locked settings.

• System Administrator: This role allows the user to access all apps and settings.

If you have created any user roles, the roles appear in the list.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

5. To edit a custom user role, for the role, click Edit.

6. Click Save.

7. To view a permission summary, for a listed user, click Permissions.

• To view the Print Time Summary, for the Time feature, in the Result column, click the I icon.

• To view and edit the permission roles, for any category, click the user role link.

For details, refer to User Permissions.

Importing the User Database

You can import a user database from a .csv file. To import user credentials:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting→Device User

Database.

2. From Management Actions, click Import.

3. Click Choose File, then select the .csv file that you want to import.

4. For Delimiting Character, select an option.

5. For Language, select the language of the text in your .csv file.

6. Click Next.

7. Enter information in the required fields.

8. Click Import.

Downloading a Sample .csv File

To download an example of a formatted .csv file for import:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting→Device User

Database.

2. From Management Actions, click Download Sample.

3. For Delimiting Character, select an option.

4. For Language, select the language of the text in your .csv file.

5. Click Generate.

6. When the sample file generates successfully, click Download File Now, then open or save the file.

Specifying User Password and Account Requirements

Basic rules for local user account names and passwords are standard on the Xerox device. You can

customize these rules for your particular policies.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting→Device User

Database.

2. Click Device Account Requirements.

3. To use a preset, for Requirement Preset, select an option.

For information, refer to Requirement Preset Options.

• Level 1: Basic: This setting is the default.

• Level 2: Elevated

• Level 3: High

• Custom: This level allows you to customize the password requirements.

4. To customize the password requirements, select or change options as needed:

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

a. To change the minimum number of characters required, for Minimum Password Length, type

a value. The default value is 4.

Note: To change the value, use the Plus (+) and Minus (-) icons.

b. To require specific character types, for each character type needed, select the check box.

Options include:

• Require Uppercase Character

• Require Lowercase Character

• Require Numeric Character

• Require Special Character

c. To change the interval before a user can reuse a previously used password, for Interval Before

Password Can Be Reused (Generations), type a value. The maximum value is 7.

Note: A value of 1 allows a user to reuse a password immediately.

d. To change the user lock out period, for User Lock Out Period (Minutes), type a value. The

default value is 30 minutes.

Note: The system sets the values for Lock Out User After Invalid Login Attempts and

Browser Session Lock Out Period (Minutes).

5. To enable an account inactivity timer:

a. For Enable Account Inactivity Timer, select the check box. This setting specifies the amount

of time an account is allowed inactivity before the account is disabled.

b. For Disable Account After Period of Inactivity (Days), type a value. The default value is 180

days.

Note:

• The administrator account is not disabled after the specified inactivity period.

• When the administrator reactivates an individual account, the password remains

unchanged.

6. Click Update.

Note:

• New password rules do not affect existing passwords.

• New password rules are enforced the next time a user logs in.

Requirement Preset Options

Requirement Preset options include:

Level 1

This level requires:

1. A minimum password length of four characters.

2. A minimum of one generation of a password before the user can reuse a password.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

Level 2

This level requires:

1. A minimum password length of eight characters, including a minimum of one uppercase

character and one numeric character.

2. A minimum of three generations of a password before the user can reuse a password.

Level 3

This level requires:

1. A minimum password length of 15 characters, including a minimum of one of each character

type:

• Uppercase

• Lowercase

• Numeric

• Special

2. A minimum of seven generations of a password before the user can reuse a password.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg NNeettwwoorrkk AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn SSeettttiinnggss

When you configure network authentication, to prove their identity, users type their name and

password in at the control panel or in the Embedded Web Server. The device compares the user

credentials to the information stored on an authentication server.

Note: If two or more authentication servers are configured, then the IPP Authentication Policy

window appears. The IPP Authentication Policy is used to determine which server to use for IPP

Authentication.

To configure access rights using network authentication:

• Set the login method to User Name / Password - Validate on the Network. For details, refer to

Setting the Login Method for the Embedded Web Server.

• Provide information about your authentication server and configure authentication server

settings.

• If you enabled Personalization, configure LDAP server settings.

• Configure authorization settings. For details, refer to Configuring Authorization Settings.

The Login Methods page in the Embedded Web Server provides links to authentication and

personalization configuration settings.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click Login Methods.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn SSeerrvveerr SSeettttiinnggss ffoorr KKeerrbbeerrooss

1. On the Login Methods page, for Authentication Servers, click Edit.

2. For Authentication Type, select Kerberos.

3. Click Add New.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

4. For Server Information, in the Domain or Realm field, type the domain or realm for your

authentication server.

5. Select the desired address type.

6. Type the appropriately formatted address and port numbers for both the primary and backup

addresses.

Note: A backup address is optional.

7. To use an LDAP server for network authorization or personalization:

a. Click Add LDAP Mapping.

b. Select the LDAP server from the list and click Add Mapping, or click Add New to add an LDAP

server.

8. Click Save.

9. To specify server settings for an alternate authentication server, click Add New.

10. To copy the settings from another server, select a server from the list, then click Copy From.

11. To update the settings, click Edit.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn SSeerrvveerr SSeettttiinnggss ffoorr SSMMBB

1. On the Login Methods page, next to Authentication Servers, click Edit.

2. Under Authentication Type, select SMB (Windows NT 4) or SMB (Windows 2000/2003).

3. Click Add New.

4. Under Domain, type the domain name of your authentication server.

5. Select the address type.

6. Type the appropriately formatted address and port number.

7. Click Save.

8. To specify server settings for an alternate authentication server, click Add New.

9. To copy the settings from another server, select a server from the list and click Copy From.

10. Click Edit to update the settings.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn SSeerrvveerr SSeettttiinnggss ffoorr LLDDAAPP

The device uses the primary LDAP server for authentication, authorization, and personalization. The

primary LDAP server appears in the Embedded Web Server on the LDAP Server page. If you have

configured LDAP server settings, when you select LDAP as the network authentication or authorization

method, the device uses this server automatically. The device only uses alternate LDAP servers for

authorization and personalization when primary LDAP server communication fails.

1. On the Login Methods page, for Authentication Servers, click Edit.

2. For Authentication Type, select LDAP.

3. Click Add New.

4. Configure LDAP server settings, then click Apply.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg XXeerrooxx SSeeccuurree AAcccceessss UUnniiffiieedd IIDD SSyysstteemm

AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn SSeettttiinnggss

When Xerox

Secure Access authentication is configured, users swipe a pre-programmed

identification card at the control panel. The printer compares the user credentials to the information

stored on the Xerox

Secure Access server. To use Xerox

Secure Access, purchase and install the

Xerox Secure Access Unified ID System.

To configure access rights using Xerox Secure Access Unified ID System authentication:

• Install the Xerox

Secure Access authentication server software and configure it with user

accounts. For details, refer to the Xerox Secure Access Unified ID System documentation.

• Enable the Authentication and Accounting Configuration Web service. For details, refer to HTTP.

• Format and configure identification cards.

• Connect your card reader to the USB Port.

Note: Ensure that USB ports are enabled. For details, refer to USB Port Security.

• Set the login method to Xerox Secure Access - Unified ID System. For details, refer to Setting the

• Configure Xerox

Secure Access Setup settings.

• Enable the Xerox

Secure Access Web service. For details, refer to HTTP.

• If you enabled Personalization, configure LDAP server settings. For details, refer to Adding LDAP

Server Information.

• Configure authorization settings. For details, refer to Configuring Authorization Settings.

The Login Methods page in the Embedded Web Server provides links to authentication and

personalization configuration settings.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/ Permissions/ Accounting.

2. Click Login Methods.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg XXeerrooxx SSeeccuurree AAcccceessss

1. On the Login Methods page, next to Xerox

Secure Access Setup, click Edit.

2. Configure the remote server. For details, see the instructions provided with your server hardware.

Once the server is configured, it communicates with the printer and automatically completes the

configuration process.

3. To configure communication manually, personalize instructional windows, and review accounting

options, click Manually Configure.

4. To return to the Login Methods page, click Pending Remote Server Setup.

5. To configure any settings that are marked in red text as Required; Not Configured, in the table

at the bottom of the page, click Edit.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

Manually Configuring Xerox Secure Access Settings

If you are using Xerox

Secure Access for authentication, you can manually configure remote server

communication, personalize instructional windows, or review accounting options.

Before you begin:

Configure the Xerox

Secure Access authentication server.

1. On the Login Methods page, next to Xerox

Secure Access Setup, click Edit.

2. Click Manually Configure.

3. Under Server Communication, select the address type and port number.

4. Type the appropriately formatted address and port number.

5. In the Path field, type the following HTTP path: public/dce/xeroxvalidation/convauth.

6. Under Embedded, select Enabled.

7. Under Device Log-In Methods, select an option:

• Xerox Secure Access Device Only allows users to access the printer only using the card

reader.

• Xerox Secure Access Device + alternate onscreen authentication method allows users to

access the printer by logging in at the control panel.

8. When Network Accounting is configured, the printer can obtain user accounting information from

the authentication server. To reduce the number of screens that appear when a user logs in at the

control panel, select Automatically apply Accounting Codes from the server.

If you want users to provide an accounting code at the control panel, select User must manually

enter accounting codes at the device.

9. To create login instructions for users, under Device Instructional Blocking Window, type text in the

fields.

a. In the Window Title field, type text to appear as a title at the top of the touch screen.

b. In the Instructional Text field, type instructions that appear below the title.

Note: If the Title and Prompt are configured on the Xerox Partner authentication

server, then any instructional text that you type is ignored.

10. Click Save.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg CCoonnvveenniieennccee AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn SSeettttiinnggss

When Convenience Authentication is enabled, users swipe a pre-programmed identification card

through a Proximity Card Reader at the control panel. To use this method, purchase and install a USB

card reader and an authentication server that supports the Xerox

Convenience Authentication API.

The Login Methods page in the Embedded Web Server provides links to authentication and

personalization configuration settings.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/ Permissions/ Accounting.

2. Click Login Methods.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg AAcccceessss RRiigghhttss UUssiinngg CCoonnvveenniieennccee AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn

To configure access rights using Convenience Authentication:

• Format and configure identification cards.

• Connect your card reader to the USB Port.

Note: Ensure that USB ports are enabled. For details, refer to USB Port Security.

• Enable the Xerox

Secure Access Web service. For details, refer to Configuring Xerox Secure Access

Unified ID System Authentication Settings.

• Set the login method to Convenience Authentication. For details, refer to Setting the Login

Method for the Control Panel.

• To provide information about your authentication server, for Convenience Authentication Setup,

click Edit.

• To enable the Xerox

Secure Access Web service, for Web Service Enablement, click Edit.

• To configure card reader policies, for Card Reader Setup, click Edit.

• To customize the title and instruction text that appears on the blocking screen, for Customized

Blocking Screen, click Edit.

• If you selected an alternate login method that requires a network authentication server, provide

information about your server. For Authentication Servers, click Edit.

• To provide information about your LDAP server for personalization, for LDAP Servers, click Edit.

• Configure authorization settings. For details, refer to Configuring Authorization Settings.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg aann AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn SSeerrvveerr ffoorr CCoonnvveenniieennccee

AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn

1. On the Login Methods page, for Convenience Authentication Setup, click Edit.

2. For Server Communication, select an address type. Type the appropriately formatted address or

host name of your server and change the default port number as needed.

3. For Path, type the path of the authentication Web service on your server.

4. When Network Accounting is configured, the device can obtain user accounting information from

the authentication server. To reduce the number of screens that appear when a user logs in at the

control panel, select Automatically apply Accounting Codes from the server.

If you want users to provide an accounting code at the control panel, select User must manually

enter accounting codes at the device.

5. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg SSmmaarrtt CCaarrdd AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn SSeettttiinnggss

When Smart Card authentication is configured, users swipe a pre-programmed identification card at

the control panel. Purchase and install a Smart Card reading system before configuring Smart Card

authentication.

To configure access rights using Smart Card authentication:

• Provide information about your domain controller servers and configure Domain Controller and

NTP settings.

• If you want to validate certificates, configure Certificate Validation options and provide

information about your OCSP server.

• If needed, configure Smart Card Inactivity Timer settings.

• If needed, specify the method the printer uses to acquire the email address of a user by

configuring email Smart Card Policies.

• If you want a custom image to appear at the control panel, import your image.

• Configure authorization settings.

• If you enabled Personalization, configure LDAP server settings.

The Login Methods page in the Embedded Web Server provides links to authentication and

personalization configuration settings.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties > Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click Login Methods.

SSeettttiinngg UUpp AAuutthheennttiiccaattiioonn ffoorr aa SSmmaarrtt CCaarrdd SSyysstteemm

Domain Controller

1. On the Login Methods page, for Domain Controllers, click Edit. Users cannot access the device

until the domain controller validates the smart card domain certificate.

2. Click Add Domain Controller.

3. If you are using a Windows-based domain controller, for Domain Controller Type, select

Windows-Based Domain Controller.

4. Type the domain controller server address information.

5. To apply the new settings, click Save. To return to the previous page, click Cancel.

Note: Before you access the device, ensure that the domain controller server has validated

the domain certificate on the smart card. Install domain controller certificates on the

Security Certificates.

6. To change the search priority of the domain controller, click Change Domain Priority.

a. To change the priority of the server, select a server in the list. To move the selected server up

or down in the priority list, click the arrows.

b. Click Close.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

7. To ensure that the printer and the domain controller are synchronized, enable and configure NTP

settings:

a. For NTP, click Edit.

b. Synchronize the domain controller time with the time set on the device.

Note: Xerox recommends that you enable NTP to ensure time synchronization.

8. To return to the Login Methods page, click Close.

To associate an LDAP server with your Domain Controller for authorization or personalization, under

LDAP Server Mapping, click Add LDAP Mapping.

Configuring OCSP Validation Server Settings

If you have an OCSP server, or an OCSP certificate validation service, you can configure the printer to

validate certificates installed on the domain controller.

Before you begin:

Add a domain controller.

1. On the Login Methods page, next to Certificate Validation, click Edit.

2. Select a validation method and click Next.

3. On the Required Settings page, type the URL of the OCSP server.

4. To ensure that the printer can communicate with the OCSP server and the domain controller,

configure your proxy server settings as needed.

5. For each domain controller listed, under Domain Controller Certificate, select the corresponding

domain controller certificate from the menu. If there are no certificates installed, click Install

Missing Certificate.

6. Click Save.

Setting the Inactive Time Limit

1. On the Login Methods page, next to Smart Card Inactivity Timer, click Edit.

2. Specify the maximum amount of time before a user is logged out automatically. Type the time in

minutes.

3. Click Save.

Disabling the Logout Confirmation Prompt

1. On the Login Methods page, for Log Out Confirmation, click Edit.

2. To disable the log out confirmation prompt on the device control panel, select Yes.

3. Click Save.

Specifying the Method the Printer Uses to Acquire Email Address of Users

1. On the Login Methods page, next to Acquired Logged-in User's Email Address, click Edit.

2. Under Acquire logged-in user's email address from, select an option:

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

• Auto instructs the printer to attempt to acquire the email address of the user from the Smart

Card. If an email address is not associated with the Smart Card, the printer searches the

Network Address Book. If an email address is not found, the printer uses the email address

specified in the From Field. Edit From Field settings on the Required Settings tab of the Email

Setup page.

• Only Smart Card instructs the printer to acquire the email address of the user from the Smart

Card.

• Only Network Address Book (LDAP) instructs the printer to search the Network Address Book

to acquire the email address of the user.

3. To configure LDAP server settings, under Server Configuration, next to Network Address Book

(LDAP), click Edit.

4. To enable or disable Personalization, under Feature Enablement, next to Acquire Email from

Network Address Book, click Enable Personalization or Disable Personalization.

5. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

Configuring Authorization Settings

SSeettttiinngg tthhee AAuutthhoorriizzaattiioonn MMeetthhoodd

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click User Permissions.

3. To change the User Permissions Method, for Control Panel & Website Login Methods, click Edit.

4. For User Permissions Method, select an option.

5. Click Save.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg LLooccaall AAuutthhoorriizzaattiioonn SSeettttiinnggss

When you configure local authorization, the printer references the user database for authorization

information for the authenticated user.

To configure local authorization:

• Add user information to the user information database.

• Configure User Permissions.

The User Permissions page in the Embedded Web Server provides links to authorization configuration

settings.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click User Permissions.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg NNeettwwoorrkk AAuutthhoorriizzaattiioonn SSeettttiinnggss

When you configure network authorization, the printer references an authorization server for

authorization information for the authenticated user.

To configure network authorization:

• Provide information about your authorization server and configure authorization server settings.

• Configure User Permissions.

The User Permissions page in the Embedded Web Server provides links to authorization configuration

settings.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click User Permissions.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg NNeettwwoorrkk AAuutthhoorriizzaattiioonn SSeerrvveerr SSeettttiinnggss

1. On the User Permissions page, for LDAP Server or SMB Server, click Edit.

2. If you are using an LDAP server for authorization, configure LDAP server settings as needed. For

details, refer to LDAP.

Note: The device uses the primary LDAP server for authentication, authorization, and

personalization. The primary LDAP server appears in the Embedded Web Server on the

LDAP Server page. If you have configured LDAP server settings, when you select LDAP as

the network authentication or authorization method, the device uses this server

automatically. The device only uses alternate LDAP servers for authorization and

personalization when primary LDAP server communication fails.

3. If you are using an SMB server for authorization:

a. For Configuration, type the Default Domain.

b. Select the address type.

c. Type the appropriately formatted IP address.

d. For Login Credentials to Access SMB Server, select an option

• None: This option does not require the device to provide the server a user name or

password.

• Logged in User: This option instructs the device to log in to the repository using the

credentials of the logged-in user.

• Device: This option uses the information provided in the Login Name and Password Fields

to access the server.

e. If you select Device, type the Login Name and Password used to access the server. Type the

password, then type the password again to verify.

f. To update the password for an existing Login Name, select Select to save new password.

g. Click Save.

UUsseerr PPeerrmmiissssiioonnss

You can control access to apps, tools, printing times, and methods for a group of users.

Print permissions are rules that allow you to control printing times and methods for a group of users.

You can:

• Restrict color printing, requiring users to print in black and white.

• Restrict 1-sided printing, requiring users to print 2-sided.

• Restrict a Job Type, such as Secure Print.

• Restrict access to specific paper trays.

• Specify the software applications from which users are allowed to print.

• Restrict printing, color printing, and 1-sided printing from specific software applications.

Apps and Tools permissions are rules that allow you to control access to features or configuration

settings for a group of users. You can configure Apps and Tools to:

100

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

• Restrict access to specific apps, such as Copy, Email, or Fax.

• Restrict access to settings managed at the control panel, on the Tools menu.

• Restrict access to settings managed in the Embedded Web Server, on the Properties tab.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a specific

device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

UUsseerr RRoolleess

A role is a set of permissions associated with a group of users. To edit permissions for a group of users,

you edit permissions for a role.

There are three types of roles:

• The Non-Logged-In Users Role applies to any user who accesses the printer, but is not

authenticated. This role also applies to anyone who sends a job that is not associated with a user

name or job owner. Examples are a job sent using LPR, or a job sent from a mainframe

application.

• Logged-In Users Roles are roles that you create. These roles apply to authenticated users only.

You can assign specific users or user groups to the role, or you can create a role that applies to all

authenticated users.

• Device System Roles give administrator privileges to logged-in users. These roles apply to

authenticated users only. You can assign specific users or user groups to the role, restrict access to

specific features, and restrict access to specific days and times. There are two predefined roles

that you can modify as needed. You can create roles with access permissions that you define. The

predefined roles are as follows:

– Device Administrator: This role allows unrestricted access to all features, including Tools.

– Accounting Administrator: This role allows unrestricted access to all features, including

accounting management features.

NNoonn--LLooggggeedd--IInn UUsseerrss

Editing Print Permissions for the Non-Logged-In Users Role

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click User Permissions.

3. For User Permission Roles, click Edit.

4. Click the Non-Logged-In Users tab.

5. For the Non-Logged-In User Permission Role, for Actions, click Edit.

6. Click the Print tab.

7. To restrict print permissions, for the print setting that you want to restrict, click Edit.

Setting Printing Time Restrictions

1. On the When Users can Print (Non-Logged-In User) page, for Allow Printing, select when users can

print:

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

101

Security

• To allow printing at all times, select Always.

• To allow printing on weekdays only, select Monday – Friday from, then select when users are

allowed to print from the From Time and To Time menus.

• To allow printing on specific days during a specific time range, select Time of Day

(Advanced). To set the time range for a day, for the day, click Add Time Range. Select when

users are allowed to print from the From Time and To Time menus. To delete a time range, for

the range, click the red X icon.

• To restrict printing at all times, select Never.

2. Click Save.

Setting Black and White and Color Print Permissions

1. For When Users can Print, click Edit.

2. On the When Users can Print (Non-Logged-In User) page, for Color and Black and White printing

independently, select Make color printing more restrictive than black & white printing.

3. Click Save.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a

specific device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

Setting 1-Sided Print Permissions

1. On the 1-Sided Printing page, for Role State, select an option:

• To require users to print 2-sided, select Not Allowed.

• To allow users to print 1-sided, select Allowed.

2. Click Save.

Setting Job Type Print Permissions

1. On the Job Types page, in the Presets area, select an option:

• To allow users to print any job type, select Allow all Job Types.

• To require that users only send secure print jobs, select Only Allow Secure Print.

• To allow only the job types that you specify, select Custom.

2. If you selected Custom, under Role State, for each job type, select an option:

• To allow users to use the job type, select Allowed.

• To restrict users from using the job type, select Not Allowed.

3. To allow or restrict all job types, select an option:

• To lock all job types, click the Lock All icon.

• To unlock all job types, click the Unlock All icon.

4. Click Save.

Setting Paper Tray Print Permissions

1. To restrict users from using a paper tray, for the paper tray, select Not Allowed.

2. To allow or restrict printing from all paper trays, select an option:

• To lock all paper trays, click the Lock All icon.

• To unlock all paper trays, click the Unlock All icon.

3. Click Apply.

102

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

Setting Application Print Permissions

1. On the Applications page, click Add New Application.

2. From the Application List, select an application.

Note: To add an application to the list, you can also submit a print job from that

application to the printer.

3. To restrict users from using the printing method, for a permission type, select Not Allowed.

4. Click Apply.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a

specific device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

Managing the List of Applications

Application Manager allows you to associate Application IDs with an Application Group. Application

Group Names for common application types appear in the table at the bottom of the Application

Manager page. The associated Application IDs appear next to each of the Application Group Names.

An Application ID identifies the application from which the job was sent. To control print permissions

for an application, the Application ID of the application must be associated with an Application

Group Name. If you send a job from an application that is not in the default list, a new Application ID

appears in the Custom Application ID list.

1. On the Applications page, click Application Manager.

2. To associate a custom Application ID with an existing Application Group, for the custom

application ID, click Merge With.

• For Merge With the Application Group, select an application from the list.

• Click Save.

3. To create an Application Group from a custom Application ID, for the custom application ID, click

Make This A Group.

• For Application Group Name, type a name for the group.

• Click Save.

4. To rename an Application Group, for the custom application ID, click Rename.

5. To delete a custom Application ID, for the custom application ID, click Delete.

6. To delete or disassociate a custom Application ID from an Application Group Name, for the

Application Group, click Manage.

• To remove the Application ID, click Un-merge. To delete the Application ID, click Delete.

• Click Close.

7. To create a custom Application ID, click Add Manually.

• For Application ID, type an Application ID.

• Click Save.

8. To return to the Applications page, click Close.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

103

Security

Editing Apps and Tools Permissions for the Non-Logged-In Users Role

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click User Permissions.

3. For User Permission Roles, click Edit.

4. Click the Non-Logged-In Users tab.

5. For Actions, click Edit.

6. Click the Apps and Tools tab.

7. For Presets, select an option.

8. If you selected Custom, for each app, select a Role State:

• To allow users to use the app, select Allowed.

• To restrict users from using the app, select Not Allowed.

Note: Selecting Not Allowed hides the app icon on the device control panel touch screen.

9. To allow or restrict all apps, select an option:

• To lock all apps, click the Lock All icon.

• To unlock all apps, click the Unlock All icon.

10. Click Apply.

Note: You cannot restrict access for logged-in users and allow access for non-logged in

users. To restrict access for non-logged-in users, click Auto Correct.

LLooggggeedd--IInn UUsseerrss

Adding a New Role for Logged-In Users

To edit permissions for a specific group of users, first create a role.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click User Permissions.

3. For User Permission Roles, click Edit.

4. Click the Logged-In Users tab.

5. To create a role, click Make Your Own Permission Roles or Add New Role.

6. For New Permission Profile, type a name and description for the role.

7. To configure access for users to apps, click View Quick Setup Options, then for Allow users, select

an option.

Note: If you do not select an option, print permissions are set to Allowed. The default

permissions for a new role are the same as the permissions for the Non-Logged-In user role.

8. Click Create.

9. To assign users to the role, or to configure permissions for the role, click the Print link or the Apps

and Tools link.

10. To save, click Apply.

104

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

Assigning Users to a Role for Local Authorization

After you configure local authorization, add user information to the user database, and create a user-

defined permission role, you can assign users to the role.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click User Permissions.

3. For User Permission Roles, click Edit.

4. Click the Logged-In Users tab.

5. To add users to a user-defined permission role, for the desired role, click Edit User Mappings.

6. For Methods, select an option.

• To assign specific users to the role, select Select Individual Users, then from the list of user

names, select a user.

• To assign all users to the role, select All Logged-in Users. To exclude individual users from this

list, select Exceptions, then from the list of user names, select users.

7. To create a user entry and add it to the role, click Add New User.

8. Click Apply.

Assigning User Groups to a Role for Network Authorization

After you configure network authorization, you can assign LDAP or SMB groups of users to roles.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click User Permissions.

3. For User Permission Roles, click Edit.

4. Click the Logged-In Users tab.

5. For a role, click Edit User Mappings.

6. Under Methods, select an option:

• Assign Groups: This option allows you to select the user groups that you want to assign to

the role.

• All Logged-in Users: This option assigns all user groups to the role.

To select specific user groups to remove from the role, select All Logged-in Users then select

Exceptions. All other user groups are assigned to the role.

7. If you chose Select Individual Users, or Exceptions, select user groups from the list.

a. If you know the name of the group you want to add, for Assign Groups, type the group

name, then click Search for Groups.

Note: If LDAP or SMB server settings are not configured, you cannot search for and

add groups.

b. To add a group to the role, select the group from the list, then click Add.

Groups assigned to the role appear in the Users in Assigned Groups list.

c. To remove a group, select the group in the Users in Assigned Groups list, then click Remove.

To remove all groups from the list, click Remove All.

8. Click Apply

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

105

Security

Editing a Logged-In User Role

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click User Permissions.

3. For User Permission Roles, click Edit.

4. Click the Logged-In Users tab.

5. For the role that you want to edit, click Edit User Mappings.

Note: You cannot edit permissions for the System Administrator or Accounting

Administrator roles. Users assigned to the System Administrator role can access all features

of the device. Users assigned to the Accounting Administrator role can access accounting

features only.

6. To assign users to the role, or to configure permissions for the role, click either the Print tab or the

Apps and Tools tab.

7. To save, click Apply.

For details, refer to Editing Print Permissions for the Non-Logged-In Users Role and Editing Apps

and Tools Permissions for the Non-Logged-In Users Role.

Note: For each user permission type, you cannot restrict access for logged-in users and

allow access for non-logged-in users. To restrict access for non-logged-in users, for a

permission setting, click the Auto Correct link.

DDeevviiccee MMaannaaggeemmeenntt

Adding a New Device System Role

To edit permissions for a specific group of users, first create a role.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click User Permissions.

3. For User Permission Roles, click Edit.

4. Click the Device Managements tab.

5. To create a role, click Add New Role.

6. For Enter Role Name & Description, type a name and description for the role.

7. Click Create.

8. To assign users to the role, click the Assign Users to Role tab, then select an option.

• Select Individual Users: This option allows you to add specific members from a list of users.

• All Logged-In Users: This option allows you to add all users that are logged in to the device.

Note: To exclude a user from the role, select Exceptions, then clear the check box for the

user name.

9. To save, click Apply.

106

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

SSppeecciiffyyiinngg JJoobb OOvveerrrriiddee PPoolliicciieess

Use Job Override Policies to specify what happens when a user without appropriate print permissions

sends a color or 1-sided print job to the printer.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click User Permissions.

3. For Job Override Policies, click Edit.

4. For Color Printing, select Print Job in Black & White, or Delete Job. If an unauthorized user sends

a color job, the job prints in black and white or is deleted.

5. For 1-Sided Printing, select Print Job 2-Sided, or Delete Job. If an unauthorized user sends a 1-

sided job, the job prints 2-sided or is deleted.

6. Click Save.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a

specific device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

TTrroouubblleesshhoooottiinngg CCoonnfflliiccttiinngg PPeerrmmiissssiioonnss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting.

2. Click User Permissions.

3. For Action, for User Permission Roles, click Edit.

4. Click Troubleshooting.

5. To see a summary of permissions for a user, on the Permission Role Summaries tab, click

Permissions Summary.

Temporarily Disabling Print Permissions for all Users

1. On the Troubleshooting page, click the Permission Enablement tab.

2. To disable print restrictions for all users, next to Print, under Actions, select Disable.

3. Click Apply.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

107

Security

HTTPS (TLS)

To establish an HTTP Secure (HTTPS) connection to the printer, you can use TLS to encrypt data sent

over HTTP. Features that require HTTPS use TLS automatically. You can use TLS encryption for

protocols such as LDAP and SMTP.

Note:

• TLS encryption is protocol-independent. You can enable TLS for protocols or scan

destinations as needed.

• When the device uses HTTPS, all pages in the Embedded Web Server contain https:// in the

URL.

UUssiinngg TTLLSS ffoorr aallll HHTTTTPP CCoommmmuunniiccaattiioonn ((HHTTTTPPSS))

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Protocol, for HTTP, click Edit.

3. Click the HTTP tab.

4. For Force Traffic over HTTPS, select Yes. Change the default port number as needed.

a. From the Choose Device Certificate menu, select the Device Certificate to use for HTTPS.

b. To view the selected certificate details, or to save the certificate to your computer, click View/

Save.

c. If you are using the Xerox Default Device Certificate, you can install the Xerox Generic Root

Certificate Authority in your Web browser. Installing the Xerox Generic Root Certificate

Authority ensures that your browser trusts the device. To download the certificate, click

Download the Xerox Generic Root Certificate Authority.

5. Click Save.

108

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

FIPS 140-2

The United States Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140, is a series of government

security standards that specify requirements for computer-based encryption algorithms.

FFIIPPSS 114400 MMooddee

If FIPS 140-2 encryption is required, all computers, servers, browser software, security certificates, and

applications must comply with the standard or operate in FIPS-compliant mode. Transmitted and

stored data must be encrypted as specified in United States Federal Information Processing Standard

(FIPS) 140-2, Level 1. You can enable the printer to check that the current configuration ensures the

specified encryption.

Enabling FIPS 140 Mode can prevent the printer from communicating with network devices that

communicate using protocols that do not use FIPS-compliant encryption algorithms. To allow non-

FIPS-compliant protocols or features when FIPS 140 mode is enabled, acknowledge the notification

of non-compliance during the validation process.

When you enable non-FIPS-compliant protocols after FIPS mode is enabled, a message appears that

indicates that the protocols use non-FIPS-compliant encryption algorithms. Examples of non-FIPS-

compliant protocols include SMB, Digest HTTP authentication for AirPrint scanning and Mopria

™

scanning, and wireless networking.

FFIIPPSS 114400 MMooddee wwiitthh CCoommmmoonn CCrriitteerriiaa CCoommpplliiaannccee

The Common Criteria for Information Technology Security Evaluation, abbreviated as Common

Criteria or CC, is an international standard for computer security certification: ISO/IEC 15408.

For Common Criteria compliance, where applicable, enhanced security requirements are applied to a

FIPS 140-2 enabled printer to satisfy the Common Criteria security evaluation. FIPS with Common

Criteria (CC) compliance mode is a more restrictive configuration. The CC mode can limit

interoperability with other network devices that do not communicate with the more stringent CC-

defined algorithms.

FFIIPPSS EEnnaabblleemmeenntt WWoorrkkffllooww aanndd CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn CChheecckkss

When you enable FIPS only mode or FIPS with Common Criteria (CC) compliance mode, the printer

performs a series of checks to validate the current printer configuration. The FIPS Configuration

Check page displays a pass or fail message as a result of the FIPS configuration check. To complete

the FIPS configuration check:

• If the configuration check passes, to save and restart the printer, click Reboot Machine.

• If the configuration check fails, conditions that caused the failed test appear in the section

labeled Feature Needing Attention. For each reason, a link is provided in the table at the bottom

of the page. To disable the protocol, replace the certificate, or allow the printer to use the non-

compliant protocol, click the appropriate link.

For details, refer to Enabling FIPS 140 Mode and Checking for Compliance, and FIPS Configuration

Check.

EEnnaabblliinngg FFIIPPSS 114400 MMooddee aanndd CChheecckkiinngg ffoorr

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

109

Security

CCoommpplliiaannccee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security→Encryption.

2. Click FIPS 140-2.

3. Click Enable FIPS only, or Enable FIPS with Common Criteria (CC) compliance. For information,

click the i icon.

4. Click Run Configuration Check and Apply.

5. Complete the iterative FIPS configuration checks. For details, refer to FIPS Configuration Check.

Note:

• When FIPS 140 Mode is enabled, only FIPS-compliant certificates can be installed on

the device.

• Some FIPS compliance actions require you to move from the FIPS Configuration Check

page to other feature or protocol Embedded Web Server pages. After you complete the

action, to continue the validation, return to the FIPS 140–2 (Level 1) page, re-enable

FIPS, then rerun the configuration check.

• When the validation completes, you receive notification that the configuration check

passed. After you restart the device, the FIPS status details update.

6. To enable FIPS when the FIPS configuration checks are complete, restart the device.

FFIIPPSS CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn CChheecckk

When you enable FIPS only or FIPS with Common Criteria compliance mode, the printer performs a

series of checks to validate the current printer configuration. For enablement to complete, the printer

configuration is required to pass all the validation checks, then you receive notification to restart the

printer.

Validation involves a series of iterative checks on the device configuration. The device performs the

following checks to validate the current configuration:

• The device validates all pre-installed and user-installed certificates on the device for FIPS

compliance. Certificates include the default Xerox Device Certificate, CA-signed Device

Certificates, Root/Intermediate Certificates, and Peer Device/Domain Controller Certificates.

The digital certificates that are installed on the device enable various workflows, including:

– Establishing a secure connection between the device that is acting as a server, and a peer

device that is acting as a client

– Establishing a secure connection between the device that is acting as a client, and a peer

device that is acting as a server

– Verifying the identity of a peer device

– Validating that a peer device is trusted

• The device checks features and protocols for non-compliant encryption algorithms. For example,

HTTP Digest authentication for AirPrint scanning and Mopria

™

scanning use encryption algorithms

that are not FIPS-compliant.

Validation involves a series of iterative checks on the device configuration. After each check,

information and links appear in a table at the bottom of the page.

110

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

• To disable a non-compliant feature or protocol, click the appropriate link.

• To replace any non-compliant certificates, click the appropriate link.

• To acknowledge that you allow the printer to use non-compliant features and protocols, click the

appropriate link.

Note:

• FIPS is not enabled until you receive notification that all configuration checks are

complete and the device is restarted.

• Some configuration actions require you to move from the FIPS page to other

Embedded Web Server pages. After completing these actions, to continue the FIPS

validation checks and enablement, restart the FIPS checks.

FFIIPPSS SSttaattuuss

When FIPS is enabled, the FIPS 140–2 (Level 1) page provides an enablement status for the feature.

The status indicates that FIPS is enabled, with or without exceptions, or that the feature requires

attention.

• For FIPS only mode, statuses include:

– FIPS On: The device is compliant with no exceptions acknowledged.

– FIPS On With Exceptions: The device is compliant with exceptions acknowledged. A

summary table lists the exceptions.

– Feature Needs Attention: Changes may have occurred that impact FIPS

compliance: To ensure compliance, disable, then re-enable FIPS only mode.

• For FIPS with Common Criteria (CC) compliance mode, statuses include:

– FIPS + Common Criteria On: The device is compliant with no exceptions acknowledged.

– FIPS + Common Criteria On With Exceptions: The device is compliant with

exceptions acknowledged. A summary table lists the exceptions.

– Feature Needs Attention: Changes may have occurred that impact FIPS /

Common Criteria compliance: To ensure compliance, disable, then re-enable FIPS with

Common Criteria compliance mode.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

111

Security

Stored Data Encryption

You can encrypt user data on the printer hard drive to prevent unauthorized access to data stored on

the drive.

EEnnaabblliinngg EEnnccrryyppttiioonn ooff SSttoorreedd DDaattaa

Caution: Before you begin, back up all jobs and folders. When you enable the data encryption

feature, the device restarts and interrupts or deletes current jobs.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security→Encryption.

2. Click User Data Encryption.

3. For User Data Encryption Enablement, select Enabled.

4. To save the new settings, click Apply. To retain the previous settings, click Undo.

112

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

IP Filtering

You can prevent unauthorized network access by creating an IP Filter to block or allow data sent from

particular IP addresses.

CCrreeaattiinngg oorr EEddiittiinngg aann IIPP FFiilltteerr RRuullee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click IP Filtering.

3. Click Add IP Filter.

4. For Define Protocol, select the protocol.

5. For Define Action, select how you want the filter to manage the incoming packet.

• If you want the device to allow the packet access, select Accept.

• If you want the device to ignore the packet, select Drop.

• If you want the device to reject the packet and send an ICMP message back to the source

host, select Reject.

6. Type the Source IP Address.

7. Type a number from 0 through 32 for the Source IP Mask that uses this IP filter rule. The range of

0–32 corresponds to the 32-bit binary number comprising IP addresses. For example:

• The number 8 represents a Class A address with a mask of 255.0.0.0.

• The number 16 represents a Class B address with a mask of 255.255.0.0.

• The number 24 represents a Class C address with a mask of 255.255.255.0.

8. If you selected TCP or UDP, type the Destination Port for the rule to manage. If the incoming

packet is not sent to this port, the rule is ignored.

9. If you selected ICMP, type the ICMP Message Type for the rule to manage.

10. To specify the order that actions are performed, for Precedence Order, select an option.

Actions are performed in the order defined in the rule list. To arrange rule execution order, refer to

IP Filtering.

11. Click Save.

EEddiittiinngg aann IIPP FFiilltteerr RRuullee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click IP Filtering.

3. For the IP filter rule you want to edit, click Edit.

4. Make changes to the settings as needed.

5. Click Save.

AArrrraannggiinngg tthhee EExxeeccuuttiioonn OOrrddeerr ooff IIPP FFiilltteerr RRuulleess

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click IP Filtering.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

113

Security

3. Click an IP filter rule.

4. For Move Up/Down, click the appropriate arrow.

114

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

Audit Log

The Audit Log feature records security-related events that occur on the device. You can download the

log as a tab-delimited text file to review for potential problems or security issues.

EEnnaabblliinngg AAuuddiitt LLoogg

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Audit Log.

3. For Device Audit Log, click Enabled.

4. Click Apply.

Note: When McAfee antivirus software is enabled, this option cannot be disabled.

EEnnaabblliinngg AAuuttoommaattiicc LLoogg TTrraannssffeerr

The system administrator can use Secure FTP to send the device audit log file to a server. You can

transfer the audit log on demand or schedule it as a daily service.

Note: Secure FTP applies to IPv4 only.

To enable automatic log transfer:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Audit Log.

3. For Automatic Log Transfer, click Enabled.

4. For Schedule Automatic Log Transfer, click Enabled.

5. To establish an automatic daily log transfer time, type a time, then select AM or PM.

6. For Automatic Log Transfer Server, select an option, then type the repository server IP address or

host name.

7. For Path, type the complete path name.

8. For Login Name, type the login credentials.

9. For Password, type a password. For Retype password, type the password again.

10. Click Apply.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

115

Security

EEnnaabblliinngg PPrroottooccooll LLooggss

Protocol logs provide information about connection-specific secure protocols, such as HTTPS, IPsec,

SSH, and TLS. Each enabled protocol generates a unique protocol log that is populated with

information. If a protocol is not enabled, the corresponding protocol log still appears but is not

populated with information. Protocol log functionality complies with Common Criteria requirements.

Note: If you enable or disable the protocol log feature, the device restarts.

To enable protocol logs:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Audit Log.

3. For Protocol Log, click Enabled.

4. Click Apply.

Note: The protocol logs download in a .zip file archive that contains up to five text files. If

the protocol log feature is enabled, the protocol log .zip file archive contains five text files.

The .zip file name format appears as serialnumber_year-month-date-timezone_offset-

time_auditfile.zip.

SSaavviinngg aann AAuuddiitt LLoogg

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Audit Log.

3. Click Export Audit Log.

4. Right-click the Download Log link, then save the compressed .zip file to your computer.

5. Extract the auditfile.txt file from the .zip file, then open it in a spreadsheet application that can

read a tab-delimited text file.

SSaavviinngg aann AAuuddiitt LLoogg ttoo aa UUSSBB FFllaasshh DDrriivvee

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Security Settings→Audit Log.

3. Touch Download Log.

4. Insert your USB Flash drive into the front USB port. The log file downloads automatically.

5. When the download completes, click Close.

IInntteerrpprreettiinngg tthhee AAuuddiitt LLoogg

The Audit Log is formatted into ten columns:

• Index: Column 1 lists a unique value that identifies the event.

• Date: Column 2 lists the date that the event happened in mm/dd/yy format.

• Time: Column 3 lists the time that the event happened in hh:mm:ss format.

116

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

• Event ID: Column 4 lists the type of event. The number corresponds to a unique description. For

details, refer to Audit Log Event Identification Numbers.

• Event Description: Column 5 lists an abbreviated description of the type of event.

Note:

• One audit log entry is recorded for each network destination within a Workflow

Scanning scan job.

• For server fax jobs, one audit log entry is recorded for each server fax job,

regardless of the number of destinations.

• For LAN fax jobs, one audit log entry is recorded for each LAN fax job.

• For email jobs, one audit log entry is recorded for each SMTP recipient within the

job.

• Other Event Details: Columns 6–10 list other information about the event, such as:

– Identity: User Name, Job Name, Computer Name, Printer Name, Folder Name, or Accounting

Account ID display when Network Accounting is enabled.

Note: Authentication must be configured to record the user name in the Audit

Log.

– Completion Status

– Image Overwrite Status: The status of overwrites completed on each job. Immediate Image

must be enabled.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

117

Security

Network Troubleshooting

The Network Troubleshooting Session provides a way to capture and record all network

communication to and from the device.

Note:

• You can use Network Troubleshooting sessions for short-term problem identification.

• Starting a Network Troubleshooting session can result in degraded device performance.

• The data capture stops when either of the following limits is reached:

– The allotted amount of time

– The maximum file size

• After 72 hours, the data is removed securely from the device.

To set up a network troubleshooting session:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security→Logs→Network Troubleshooting.

2. For Session Timespan, select a length of time in hours.

Note: The capture stops automatically after the time duration.

3. To select specific ports for the troubleshooting session, click Customize Captured Port Filters.

Note: All ports are included by default.

a. For the ports that you want to include, select Enable.

Note: The capture is limited to the selected ports.

b. To change the properties of a selected port, click Edit. If needed, change the service name

and port number, then click Save.

c. To limit the capture to only one specific destination, select Optional Destination IPv4

Address Filter, then type the IP address.

d. You can set the packet size of the capture. For Packet Size, type a value from 96–65535.

e. Click Save.

4. To begin the network troubleshooting capture session, click Start Session Now, then click OK.

Note:

• To end a currently running session before the capture time has ended, click Stop

Session Now, then click OK.

• To delete the captured session, click Clear Session, then click OK.

5. To save a copy of the captured session, click Download Log Now.

118

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

Support Logs

Log files are text files of the recent device activity that are created and stored in the device. Log files

are used to troubleshoot device and network problems. A Xerox Technical Customer Support

representative can interpret the encrypted format log files.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security→Logs→Support Logs.

2. In the Information Level area, select options as needed:

• To include the audit logs with the support log, select Audit Logs.

Note: To check for Audit Log enablement, refer to Audit Log.

• To include NVM data with the support log, select Include NVM Data with Support Log Push.

3. Click Save.

4. In the Download Files area, for Log Content, click Start Download.

The Download Status page appears. This action can take several minutes to complete.

5. To save the files to your computer, after the information processes, click Download File Now.

Save the log file to your computer. This action can take several minutes to complete.

6. To return to the Support Logs page, click Close.

Note: The file name for the downloaded support log appears next to Log Identifier in the

Send Files To Xerox area.

To send files to Xerox for diagnostic purposes, in the Send Files to Xerox area, click Send.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

119

Security

McAfee Embedded Control

McAfee Embedded Control consists of two security features:

• Enhanced Security maintains the integrity of printer software by monitoring system files and

alerting you when an unauthorized change is made to a system file. This feature prevents general

attacks, such as unauthorized read or write of protected files and directories. Enhanced Security

prevents unauthorized files from being added to designated protected directories.

• Integrity Control is a software option that combines enhanced security features with the ability to

monitor and prevent unauthorized executable files from running. Enable this option by providing a

feature installation key on the Feature Installation page. To get a feature installation key, contact

your Xerox representative.

You can configure the printer to send email alerts when a security event occurs. Email alerts can be

sent to you or to a centralized management application such as McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator (McAfee

ePO), Xerox

CentreWare

Web, or Xerox

Device Manager. For details about McAfee ePO and

McAfee Embedded Control, visit www.mcafee.com.

To configure McAfee Embedded Control:

• To configure email alerts, for Email Alerts, click Edit.

• To provide details about your McAfee ePO server, for McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator Server, click

Edit.

• To download and review security events recorded in the audit log, for Export Audit Log, click

Export.

Note: The audit log is a tab-delimited file, compressed in .zip format. Use a file expansion

utility, such as 7-zip, winRAR, or StuffIt Expander, and a text editor application, such as

Notepad++, to read the file.

After you set the security level and configure alert options, the McAfee Embedded Control page in the

Embedded Web Server provides links to related configuration settings.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click McAfee Embedded Control.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee SSeeccuurriittyy LLeevveell

Unless you have acquired McAfee Integrity Control, Xerox recommends that you keep the security

level set to the default setting, Enhanced Security.

McAfee Embedded Control has three security levels:

• Enhanced Security

• Integrity Control

• Disabled

Note: Only set the security level if necessary. The device comes standard with an Enhanced

Security level, which is adequate in many cases.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click McAfee Embedded Control.

120

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

3. To enable McAfee Embedded Control features, and configure Alert Feedback options, for Device

Security Levels, click Edit.

4. To set the Security Level, for Security Level, select Enhanced Security or Integrity Control. To

turn off McAfee Embedded Control security features, select Disable McAfee Embedded Control.

Xerox recommends that you do not disable this feature.

5. If you selected Enhanced Security as the security level, click Save.

6. If you selected Integrity Control as the security level, click Next, enter the software feature

installation key, then click Apply.

Note: When you change the security level setting, the device restarts. The process takes

several minutes.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee AAlleerrtt OOppttiioonnss

You can configure the printer to alert you when a security event occurs.

To set the alert options:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click McAfee Embedded Control.

3. To configure Alert Feedback options, for Device Security Levels, click Edit.

4. To configure the device to send email alerts:

a. For Locally on the Device, select Email Alerts, then click Save.

b. In the Configuration Setting area, for Email Alerts, click Edit.

c. For Recipient Group Addresses, type valid email addresses for each applicable group.

d. For each group with email addresses, select Enable Group.

e. In the Recipient Group Preferences area, for McAfee Embedded Control, select the groups to

receive alerts: Group 1, Group 2, Group 3.

f. Click Apply.

g. At the prompt, click OK.

5. Configure your alert feedback method.

• To configure the device to send alerts to McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator Server, for McAfee

Remote Solutions, select McAfee's ePolicy Orchestrator Server.

• If you use the Embedded Web Server to manage your devices, configure security alerts in the

Embedded Web Server.

• If you use Xerox

CentreWare

Web to manage your devices, you can use Xerox

CentreWare

Web to send security alerts from registered devices.

• If Xerox manages your devices, use Xerox

Device Manager to send security alerts from

registered printers.

6. Click Save.

Note: When McAfee Embedded Control features are enabled, the device records security

events in the Audit Log.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

121

Security

DDoowwnnllooaaddiinngg tthhee AAuuddiitt LLoogg

1. Click Download Log.

2. To view the audit log, in the .zip file window, click Open.

3. To save a copy of the audit log to a .zip file, click Save.

TTeessttiinngg YYoouurr AAlleerrtt CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn

To test your alert configuration by generating a test security event, click Test Feedback Methods.

FFeeeeddbbaacckk MMeetthhoodd TTeesstt RReessuullttss

When the McAfee feature is enabled, it provides security that allows the device to identify and

prevent attempts to read, write, or execute files that are stored on the printer. Based on the device

configuration, the test generates alerts that are saved in the Audit Log as well as reported using other

configured feedback methods. The system administrator can use the Audit Log to confirm that the

feedback methods are configured properly. The four feedback methods that are supported include

Email Alerts, McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator Server, CentreWare

Web, and Xerox Device Manager.

122

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

IPsec

Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) is a group of protocols used to secure Internet Protocol (IP)

communications by authenticating and encrypting each IP data packet. It allows you to control IP

communication by creating protocol groups, policies, and actions.

IPsec is designed to provide the following security services:

• Traffic encryption: This service prevents unintended recipients from reading private

communications.

• Integrity validation: This service ensures that traffic has not been modified along its path.

• Peer authentication: This service ensures that traffic is coming from a trusted source.

• Anti-replay: This service protects against replay of the secure session.

IIPPsseecc CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn CCoommppoonneennttss

To configure IPsec, perform the following tasks.

1. Configure IPsec on the Xerox device.

2. Configure and define the components of IPsec security policies. Refer to Defining a Security

Policy.

3. Configure IPsec on the remote host.

4. Send data over a secure connection.

To access the IPsec page, in the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security→IPsec.

MMaannaaggiinngg SSeeccuurriittyy PPoolliicciieess

IPsec security policies are sets of conditions, configuration options, and security settings that enable

two systems to agree on how to secure traffic between them. You can have multiple policies active at

the same time, however, the scope and policy list order determines the overall policy behavior.

DDeeffiinniinngg aa SSeeccuurriittyy PPoolliiccyy

1. Click Security Policies at the top of the IPsec page.

2. For Define Policy, select a Host Group from the menu. For details, refer to Managing Host Groups.

3. Select a Protocol Group from the menu. For details, refer to Managing Protocol Groups.

4. Select an Action from the menu. For details, refer to Managing Actions.

5. Click Add Policy.

PPrriioorriittiizziinngg aa SSeeccuurriittyy PPoolliiccyy

To prioritize policies, under Saved Policies, select the policy you want to move, then click the Promote

or Demote buttons.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

123

Security

EEddiittiinngg oorr DDeelleettiinngg aa SSeeccuurriittyy PPoolliiccyy

To delete a policy, under Saved Policies, select the policy and click Delete.

MMaannaaggiinngg HHoosstt GGrroouuppss

Host groups are groupings of computers, servers, or other devices that you want to control using

security policies. A host group is a set of addresses over which to apply the policy.

Note: The host groups Any and Local Subnet are preconfigured.

CCrreeaattiinngg aa NNeeww HHoosstt GGrroouupp

1. Click Host Groups at the top of the IPsec page.

2. Click Add New Host Group.

3. Type a Name and a Description for the group.

4. Under Address List, select IPv4 or IPv6.

5. Select an Address Type. Options are Specific, All, or Subnet.

6. Type the appropriately formatted IP address.

7. To continue to add addresses to the group, click Add.

8. To delete addresses, next to any address, click Delete.

9. Click Save to apply the new settings or Undo to retain the previous settings.

EEddiittiinngg oorr DDeelleettiinngg aa HHoosstt GGrroouupp

To edit or delete a host group, select the host group from the list, and click Edit or Delete.

MMaannaaggiinngg PPrroottooccooll GGrroouuppss

Protocol groups are logical groupings of selected protocols. To apply specific security policies for

selected protocols, create a Protocol Group.

Protocol groups define the upper layer protocols destined to become part of the security policy. The

upper layer protocols include All, FTP, HTTP, SMTP, and IPP, and other protocols. You can configure

custom protocols. For details, refer to Creating a Protocol Group.

The following protocol groups are predefined:

• All: This group includes all protocols.

• System Services: This group includes all protocols necessary to start and configure the Xerox

device, except ISAKMP, the IPsec port.

• Non-System Services: This group includes all protocols that are not included in Systems Services,

except ISAKMP.

124

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

CCrreeaattiinngg aa PPrroottooccooll GGrroouupp

1. On the IPsec page, click Protocol Groups.

2. Click Add New Protocol Group.

3. Type a Name and a Description for the group.

4. For App Name, select the protocols that you want to add to the group.

5. To control an app that is not listed, in the Custom Protocols area, for Service Name, select the

check box. Type a name for the app.

6. For Protocol, select TCP or UDP.

7. Type the port number, and specify if the printer is the server or client.

8. To apply the new settings, click Save. To retain the previous settings, click Undo. To return to the

previous page, click Cancel.

EEddiittiinngg oorr DDeelleettiinngg aa PPrroottooccooll GGrroouupp

To edit or delete a protocol group, select the protocol group from the list, and click Edit or Delete.

MMaannaaggiinngg AAccttiioonnss

Use actions to more specifically manage how IPsec controls dependent protocols. Two actions are

predefined. You can create custom protocols.

The following actions are predefined:

• Pass: This action allows unencrypted traffic.

• Block: This action blocks unencrypted traffic.

CCrreeaattiinngg aa NNeeww AAccttiioonn

1. Click Actions at the top of the IPsec page.

2. Click Add New Action.

3. On the Step 1 of 2 page, under IP Action Details, type in the Name. This field is required.

4. In the Description field, type a description for the action, if desired.

5. Under Keying Method, select Manual Keying or Internet Key Exchange (IKE).

Note: Select Manual Keying if client devices are not configured for or do not support IKE.

6. If you selected IKE, under Pre-shared Key Passphrase, type the passphrase, then click Next.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

125

Security

Configuring Manual Keying Settings

Manual Keying is used when client systems either do not support IKE or are not configured for IKE.

1. For IPsec Mode, select Transport Mode or Tunnel Mode.

Transport mode only encrypts the IP payload, whereas Tunnel mode encrypts the IP header and

the IP payload. Tunnel mode provides protection for an entire IP packet by treating it as an

Authentication Header (AH), or Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP).

2. If you selected Tunnel Mode, for Enable Security End Point Address, select the address type.

Options are Disabled, IPv4 Address, or IPv6 Address.

3. For IPsec Security, select ESP, AH, or BOTH.

4. In the Security Parameter Index: IN field, type a 32-bit number larger than 256 that identifies

the inbound Security Association (SA).

5. In the Security Parameter Index: OUT field, type a 32-bit number larger than 256 that identifies

the outbound Security Association (SA).

6. If you selected ESP under IPsec security, for Hash, select SHA-1, SHA-256, or None.

7. For Enter Keys as, select ASCII format or Hexadecimal number.

8. If you selected SHA-1 or SHA-256 for Hash, enter a Hash Key. For Hash Key: IN and Hash Key:

OUT, type an ASCII key or a Hexadecimal key.

Note: Hash key lengths are determined by the security selection.

• For SHA-1, the key lengths are 20 ASCII or 40 Hexadecimal.

• For SHA-256, the key lengths are 32 ASCII or 64 Hexadecimal.

9. If you selected ESP or BOTH for the IPsec Security type, for Encryption, select an option.

Note: If you are configuring an IPsec security policy to communicate with a Linux

computer, and you selected BOTH for the security type, select 3DES encryption. If you

select AES encryption, the data transfer rate is reduced.

10. If you selected encryption, enter an Encryption Key. For Encryption Key: IN and Encryption Key:

OUT, type an ASCII key or a Hexadecimal key.

Note: The Encryption key lengths are determined by the encryption selection.

• For AES, the key lengths are 16 ASCII or 32 Hexadecimal.

• For 3DES, the key lengths are 24 ASCII or 48 Hexadecimal.

11. Click Save.

126

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

Configuring Internet Key Exchange Settings

IKE is a keying protocol that allows automatic negotiation and authentication, anti-replay services,

and CA support. It can also change encryption keys during an IPsec session. IKE is used as part of

virtual private networking.

IKE Phase 1 authenticates the IPsec peers and sets up a secure channel between the peers to enable

IKE exchanges. IKE Phase 2 negotiates IPsec SAs to set up the IPsec tunnel.

1. In the IKE Phase 1 area, for Key Lifetime, type the length of time until the key expires in Seconds,

Minutes, or Hours. When a key reaches this lifetime, the SA (Security Association) is renegotiated

and the key is regenerated or refreshed.

2. For DH Group, select DH Group 2 or DH Group 14:

• Group 2: This option provides a 1024-bit Modular Exponential (MODP) keying strength.

• Group 14: This option provides a 2048-bit MODP keying strength.

3. In the IKE Phase 2 area, for IPsec Mode, select Transport Mode or Tunnel Mode.

Note: Transport mode only encrypts the IP payload, whereas Tunnel mode encrypts the IP

header and the IP payload. Tunnel mode provides protection for an entire IP packet by

treating it as an Authentication Header (AH), or Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP).

4. If you selected Tunnel Mode, for Enable Security End Point Address, select the address type.

Options are Disabled, IPv4 Address, or IPv6 Address.

5. For IPsec Security, select ESP, AH, or BOTH.

Note: If the IPsec Mode is set to Tunnel Mode, the BOTH option does not appear.

6. Type the Key Lifetime, and select Seconds, Minutes, or Hours.

7. For Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS), select None, Group 2, or Group 14.

8. For Hash, select SHA-1, SHA-256, or None.

9. If you selected ESP or BOTH for the IPsec Security type, select one or more of the following

Encryption types.

Note: If the IPsec Security type is set to AH, the Encryption type options do not appear.

• AES

• 3DES

• Null

10. Click Save.

EEddiittiinngg oorr DDeelleettiinngg aann AAccttiioonn

To edit or delete an action, select the action from the list, then click Edit or Delete.

EEnnaabblliinngg IIPPsseecc

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click IPsec.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

127

Security

3. For Enablement, select Enabled.

4. To save the new settings, click Apply. To retain the previous settings, click Undo.

DDiissaabblliinngg IIPPsseecc aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Security Settings→IPsec.

3. Touch Disable IPsec.

Note: IPsec can be enabled only in the Embedded Web Server.

128

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

Security Certificates

A digital certificate is a file that contains data used to verify the identity of the client or server in a

network transaction. A certificate also contains a public key used to create and verify digital

signatures. To prove identity to another device, a device presents a certificate trusted by the other

device. The device can also present a certificate signed by a trusted third party and a digital signature

proving that it owns the certificate.

A digital certificate includes the following data:

• Information about the owner of the certificate

• The certificate serial number and expiration date

• The name and digital signature of the certificate authority (CA) that issued the certificate

• A public key

• A purpose defining how the certificate and public key can be used

There are four types of certificates:

• A Device Certificate is a certificate for which the printer has a private key. The purpose specified in

the certificate allows it to be used to prove identity.

• A CA Certificate is a certificate with authority to sign other certificates.

• A Trusted Certificate is a self-signed certificate from another device that you want to trust.

• A domain controller certificate is a self-signed certificate for a domain controller in your network.

Domain controller certificates are used to verify the identity of a user when the user logs in to the

printer using a Smart Card.

IInnssttaalllliinngg CCeerrttiiffiiccaatteess

To ensure that the printer can communicate with other devices over a secure trusted connection, both

devices must have specific certificates installed.

For protocols such as HTTPS, the printer is the server, and must prove its identity to the client Web

browser. For protocols such as 802.1X, the printer is the client, and must prove its identity to the

authentication server, typically a RADIUS server.

For features that use these protocols, perform the following tasks:

• Install a device certificate on the printer.

Note: When the printer uses HTTPS, a Xerox

Device Certificate is created and

installed on the printer automatically.

• Install a copy of the CA certificate that was used to sign the device certificate of the printer on

the other device.

Protocols such as LDAP and IPsec require both devices to prove their identity to each other.

For features that use these protocols, perform the tasks listed under one of the following options:

To install certificates, option 1:

• Install a device certificate on the printer.

• Install a copy of the CA certificate that was used to sign the device certificate of the printer on

the other device.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

129

Security

• Install a copy of the CA certificate that was used to sign the certificate of the other device on the

printer.

To install certificates, option 2:

If the other device is using a self-signed certificate, install a copy of the trusted certificate of the

other device on the printer.

CCrreeaattiinngg aanndd IInnssttaalllliinngg aa XXeerrooxx®® DDeevviiccee CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee

If you do not have a server functioning as a certificate authority, install a Xerox

Device Certificate

on the printer. When you create a Xerox

Device Certificate, the printer generates a certificate, signs

it, and creates a public key used in SSL encryption. After you install a Xerox

Device Certificate on the

printer, install the Device Root Certificate Authority in any device that communicates with the printer.

Examples of other devices include client Web browsers for HTTPS or a RADIUS authentication server

for 802.1X.

When the Device Root Certificate Authority is installed:

• Users can access the printer using the Embedded Web Server

• Certificate warning messages do not appear

Note: Creating a Xerox

Device Certificate is less secure than creating a certificate signed by a

trusted certificate authority.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Certificates.

3. Click Security Certificates.

4. Click the Xerox Device Certificate tab.

5. Select Create New Xerox Device Certificate.

6. Complete the form with the requested information.

7. Click Finish.

IInnssttaalllliinngg tthhee DDeevviiccee RRoooott CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee AAuutthhoorriittyy

If the device uses the Xerox

Device Certificate, and users attempt to access the device using the

Embedded Web Server, an error message can appear in their Web browser. To ensure that error

messages do not appear, in the Web browsers of all users, install the Device Root Certificate

Authority.

Note: Each browser provides a method of temporarily overriding the untrusted certificate

warning when connecting to a Xerox device Web page. This exception process may not work in

some browsers when using the Remote Control Panel. The browser may appear unable to

connect to the Remote Control Panel for the device. Some browsers can fail to connect to the

device Remote Control Panel. To resolve this issue, install the device certificate.

130

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

IInnssttaalllliinngg tthhee DDeevviiccee RRoooott CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee AAuutthhoorriittyy oonnttoo aa PPeerrssoonnaall

CCoommppuutteerr

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Certificates.

3. Click Security Certificates.

4. To save the file to your computer, click Download the Device Root Certificate Authority.

5. Install the file in your Web browser certificate store location. For details, refer to your Web

browser help.

Note:

• Windows users: Install the certificate in each browser that is used to connect to a Xerox

device.

• Mac users: Install the certificate using the KeyChain™ application.

• You can download the Device Root Certificate Authority from the HTTP page at

Properties→Connectivity→Protocols→HTTP.

IInnssttaalllliinngg tthhee DDeevviiccee RRoooott CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee AAuutthhoorriittyy oonnttoo MMuullttiippllee

CCoommppuutteerrss oorr SSeerrvveerrss

Installing a Device Root Certificate Authority to Multiple Computers or Servers

To install a Device Root Certificate Authority to multiple computers using an application:

1. Contact your IT department about the method for updating multiple browsers or operating

systems simultaneously.

2. Download the Device Root Certificate Authority from the Security Certificates page in the

Embedded Web Server.

a. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

b. Click Certificates.

c. Click Security Certificates.

d. Click Download the Device Root Certificate Authority.

3. Send the certificate to your IT department for distribution.

Configuring a Chain Of Trust for an Organization

To configure a chain of trust for an organization:

1. Contact your IT department about the method for obtaining a Certificate Signing Request (CSR).

A CSR is needed for each device that is signed by the root certificate for your organization.

2. Download a CSR from the Security Certificates page in the Embedded Web Server.

a. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

b. Click Certificates.

c. Click Security Certificates.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

131

Security

d. Click Create Certificate Signing Request (CSR).

e. On the Create Certificate Signing Request (CSR) page, type information and make selections,

as needed.

f. Click Finish.

3. Process the CSR using the certificate signing server for your IT department.

4. Install the resulting signed device certificate onto each Xerox

device.

CCrreeaattiinngg aa CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee SSiiggnniinngg RReeqquueesstt

If you do not install a Xerox Device Certificate, you can install a CA-signed device certificate. Create a

Certificate Signing Request (CSR), and send it to a CA or a local server functioning as a CA to sign the

CSR. An example of a server functioning as a certificate authority is Windows Server 2008 running

Certificate Services. When the CA returns the signed certificate, install it on the printer.

CCrreeaattiinngg aa CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee SSiiggnniinngg RReeqquueesstt

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Certificates.

3. Click Security Certificates.

4. Click the CA-Signed Device Certificate(s) tab.

5. Select Create Certificate Signing Request (CSR).

6. Complete the form with your 2-Letter Country Code, State/Province Name, Locality Name,

Organization Name, Organization Unit, and Email Address.

7. Select Subject Alternative Name if applicable, then type the MS Universal Principal Name.

Note: The Subject Alternative Name is only required when using 802.1X EAP -TLS for

Windows clients or servers.

8. Click Finish.

UUppllooaaddiinngg aa CCAA--SSiiggnneedd DDeevviiccee CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Certificates.

3. Click Security Certificates.

4. Click the CA-Signed Device Certificate(s) tab.

5. Select Install Certificate.

6. Click Browse or Choose File, then navigate to the signed certificate in .pem or PKCS#12 format.

7. Click Open or Choose.

8. Click Next.

9. If the certificate is password protected, type the password, then retype it to verify.

132

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

10. To help identify the certificate in the future, type a Friendly Name.

11. Click Next.

Note:

• The signed certificate can match a pending CSR created by the device.

• The signed certificate can be a PKCS#12 certificate generated by a Certificate

Authority.

IInnssttaalllliinngg RRoooott CCeerrttiiffiiccaatteess

You can install the certificates for the root certificate authority and any intermediate certificate

authorities for your company. You can install the self-signed certificates from any other devices on

your network.

Supported certificate encodings and typical file extensions include:

• Distinguished Encoding Rules (.cer, .crt, .der)

• Privacy Enhanced Mode/Base64 (.pem)

• PKCS#7 (.p7b)

• PKCS#12 (.pfx, .p12)

Note: To import a CA-Signed Device Certificate, use the PKCS#12 format.

To install a root certificate:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Certificates.

3. Click Security Certificates.

4. Click the Root/Intermediate Trusted Certificate(s) tab.

5. Click Install Certificate.

6. Click Browse or Choose File, then navigate to a signed certificate file.

7. Click Open or Choose.

8. Click Next.

9. To help identify the certificate in the future, type a Friendly Name.

10. Click Next.

The digital certificate appears in the list of Installed certificates.

IInnssttaalllliinngg DDoommaaiinn CCoonnttrroolllleerr CCeerrttiiffiiccaatteess

You can install the self-signed certificates from any domain controllers on your network.

Supported certificate encodings and typical file extensions include:

• Distinguished Encoding Rules (.cer, .crt, .der)

• Privacy Enhanced Mode/Base64 (.pem)

• PKCS#7 (.p7b)

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

133

Security

• PKCS#12 (.pfx, .p12)

Note: To import a CA-Signed Device Certificate, use the PKCS#12 format.

To install a domain controller certificate:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Certificates.

3. Click Security Certificates.

4. Click the Domain Controller Certificate(s) tab.

5. Click Install Certificate.

6. Click Browse or Choose File, then navigate to a signed certificate file.

7. Click Open or Choose.

8. Click Next.

9. To help identify the certificate in the future, type a Friendly Name.

10. Click Next.

The digital certificate appears in the list of Installed certificates.

VViieewwiinngg,, SSaavviinngg,, oorr DDeelleettiinngg aa CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee

1. On the Security Certificates page, click a certificate type tab.

2. To view or save a certificate, for Action, click View/Export.

Certificate details appear on the View/Save Certificate page.

1. To save the certificate file to your computer, click Export (Base-64 encoded-PEM).

2. To return to the Security Certificates page, click Close.

3. To delete a certificate, next to the certificate name, select the check box, then click Delete

Selected.

Note: You cannot delete the Default Xerox

Device Certificate.

4. To delete all certificates except for the Default Xerox

Device Certificate, click Reset to Machine/

Device Factory Defaults.

SSppeecciiffyyiinngg tthhee MMiinniimmuumm CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee KKeeyy LLeennggtthh

You can specify the minimum RSA encryption key length required for certificates. If a user attempts

to upload a certificate that contains an RSA key that does not meet this requirement, a message

appears. The message alerts the user that the certificate does not meet the key length requirement.

If you are using certificates with a smart card, ensure that the settings on the device do not cause

issues with the smart card. For example, if your smart card uses 1024-bit RSA certificates, do not

specify a minimum of 2048 on the device.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Certificates→Certificate Key Length.

134

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

3. For Minimum RSA Encryption Key Length, select 1024-bit minimum, 2048-bit minimum, or No

Minimum.

4. Click Apply.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

135

Security

802.1X

802.1X is an Institute for Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) standard that defines a method

for port-based network access control or authentication. In an 802.1X secured network, the printer

must be authenticated by a central authority, typically a RADIUS server, before it can access the

physical network.

You can enable and configure the device for an 802.1X secured network. You can configure the device

from the control panel or the Embedded Web Server.

Before you begin:

• Ensure that your 802.1X authentication server and authentication switch are available on the

network.

• Determine the supported authentication method.

• Create a user name and password on your authentication server.

EEnnaabblliinngg aanndd CCoonnffiigguurriinngg 880022..11XX iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd

WWeebb SSeerrvveerr

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For Network, for Wired Connection, click Edit.

3. To configure 802.1X settings, for 802.1X, click Edit.

4. For Protocol, select Enable 802.1X.

5. For Authentication Method, select the method used on your network.

Note: When the device is in FIPS 140 mode, EAP-TLS authentication is required.

6. For Server Validation - Validate server using, select the root certificate that you want to use to

validate the authentication server. If you do not want to validate a certificate, select No

Validation.

Note:

• You can require the device to validate certificates used to encrypt 802.1X only if you

selected PEAPv0/EAP-MS-CHAPv2 or EAP-TLS as the authentication method.

• TLS authentication and server verification both require X.509 certificates. To use these

features, install the necessary certificates on the Security Certificates page before

configuring 802.1X.

• The Default Xerox

Device Certificate cannot be used with EAP-TLS in Windows

environments. It can be used in FreeRADIUS server environments.

7. To view or save a certificate, select the certificate from the menu, then click View/Save.

Certificate details appear on the View/Save Device Certificate page.

a. To save the certificate file to your computer, click Export (Base-64 encoded - PEM).

b. To return to the previous page, click Close.

8. If you selected EAP-TLS as the authentication method, you can allow the device to encrypt

802.1X communication. For Device Certificate (TLS) - Authentication Certificate, select the

certificate that you want to use.

136

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

9. To view or save a certificate, select the certificate from the menu, then click View/Save.

Certificate details appear on the View/Save Device Certificate page.

a. To save the certificate file to your computer, click Export (Base-64 encoded - PEM).

b. To return to the previous page, click Close.

10. For User Name, type the user name for the authentication switch and server.

11. For Password, type and confirm a password.

12. To save the new password, click Select to save new password.

Note: A password is not required for EAP-TLS authentication.

13. Click Save.

EEnnaabblliinngg aanndd CCoonnffiigguurriinngg 880022..11XX aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Network Settings→Advanced Settings.

3. Touch 802.1X.

4. Touch Enabled.

5. To select the authentication method used on your network, touch the menu.

Note:

• When the device is in FIPS 140 mode, EAP-TLS authentication is required.

• To configure 802.1X settings for EAP-TLS, use the Embedded Web Server.

6. Touch Username.

7. To type the user name and server that your authentication switch requires, use the touch screen

keypad. Touch OK.

8. Touch Password, then to type the password, use the touch screen keypad. Touch OK.

9. Touch Finish.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

137

Security

System Timeout

You can specify how long the printer waits to log out an inactive user.

SSeettttiinngg SSyysstteemm TTiimmeeoouutt VVaalluueess

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Timeout and Resume→System Timeout.

3. For Touch User Interface System Timeout, type the time that the device waits before it logs a

user out of the touch screen.

4. To configure the device to display a warning message before it logs a user out of the touch

screen, select Enable Warning Screen.

5. To select the Web User Interface System Timeout settings, for Days, Hours, and Minutes, type a

value or use the arrows to select a value.

6. Click Apply.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee SSyysstteemm TTiimmeeoouutt VVaalluueess aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings→Timers→System Timeout.

3. To specify the time the printer waits to log out an inactive user at the control panel, for Minutes

and Seconds, touch the arrows, then select values.

4. To instruct the printer to display a warning message before it logs a user out of the touch screen,

for Warning Screen, touch Enabled.

5. Touch OK.

138

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

Overwriting Image Data

Image data is any in-process or temporary user data on the hard drive, such as current jobs, queued

jobs, temporary files, saved jobs, and saved folders. To ensure that image data on the printer hard

drive cannot be accessed, you can delete and overwrite image data.

Standard Image Overwrite deletes all image data from the printer memory and hard drive, except:

• Jobs and folders stored in the Reprint Saved Jobs feature

• Jobs stored in the Scan to Mailbox feature

• Fax Dial Directories

• Fax Mailbox contents

Note: Standard image overwrite takes approximately 20 minutes to complete.

Full Image Overwrite deletes all image data from the printer memory and hard drive, including:

• Jobs and folders stored in the Reprint Saved Jobs feature

• Jobs stored in the Scan to Mailbox feature

• Fax Dial Directories

• Fax Mailbox contents

Note: Full image overwrite takes approximately 60 minutes to complete.

Immediate Job Overwrite prompts the printer to overwrite each job immediately after it finishes

processing.

MMaannuuaallllyy DDeelleettiinngg IImmaaggee DDaattaa

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Image Overwrite Security.

3. Click the Disk Overwrite tab.

4. To enable Image Overwrite, click the Scheduled tab, then select Enabled.

5. To print a report after the device overwrites data, for Confirmation Report, select On. To print a

report only if an error occurs, select Errors only.

6. To start a disk overwrite:

a. Click the Overwrite Now tab.

b. Click Advanced Settings.

c. For Overwrite Mode, select an option:

• To overwrite all user image data or job data, except saved or stored jobs and folders, fax

dial directories, and fax mailbox contents, select Standard. Standard Image Overwrite

takes approximately 20 minutes to complete.

• To overwrite all user image data or job data, fax dial directories, or fax mailbox contents,

select Full. Full Image Overwrite takes approximately 60 minutes to complete.

d. Click Start Disk Overwrite Now.

e. At the warning message, click OK.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

139

Security

MMaannuuaallllyy DDeelleettiinngg IImmaaggee DDaattaa aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Security Settings→Image Overwrite Security.

3. Touch Disk Overwrite Now.

4. To change the overwrite mode, touch Overwrite Mode, then touch an option.

5. To set the printer to print a confirmation report after it overwrites data, touch Confirmation

Report, then select an option.

6. Touch Overwrite Now.

Note: If the number of files to delete is large, the printer can be offline for up to 60

minutes during the deletion process.

7. To acknowledge the message and start the process, touch Overwrite Now.

SScchheedduulliinngg RRoouuttiinnee DDeelleettiioonn ooff IImmaaggee DDaattaa

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Image Overwrite Security.

3. Click the Disk Overwrite tab.

4. Click the Scheduled tab.

5. On the Scheduled tab, select Enabled.

6. For Frequency, select how often the device overwrites data.

7. To set the time when the device overwrites data, for Time, type the hour and minutes.

8. If you selected Weekly for Frequency, for Day of the Week, select the day when the device

overwrites data. If you selected Monthly for Frequency, for Day of the Month, select the date

when the device overwrites data.

9. For Confirmation Report for Schedule Overwrites, select an option:

• On: This option directs the device to print a report after the device overwrites data.

• Errors Only: This option directs the device to print a report only if an error occurs.

• Off: This option disables confirmation report printing.

10. For Overwrite Mode, select an option:

• Standard: This option deletes all image data from the device memory and hard drive, except:

• Jobs and folders stored in the Reprint Saved Jobs feature

• Jobs stored in the Scan to Mailbox feature

• Fax Dial Directories

• Fax Mailbox contents

• Full: This option deletes all image data from the device memory and hard drive.

11. Click Apply.

140

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

SScchheedduulliinngg RRoouuttiinnee DDeelleettiioonn ooff IImmaaggee DDaattaa aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Security Settings→Image Overwrite Security.

3. Touch Disk Overwrite.

4. To specify how often the printer overwrites data, touch Never, Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.

5. If you selected Daily, to select the time, touch the arrows. If you selected Weekly or Monthly,

touch Day of Month, Day of Week, or Overwrite Time, then touch the arrows.

6. To change the overwrite mode, touch Overwrite Mode, then touch an option.

7. To set the printer to print a confirmation report after it overwrites data, touch Confirmation

Report, then select an option.

8. Touch OK.

IImmmmeeddiiaattee JJoobb OOvveerrwwrriittee

Immediate Job Overwrite prompts the device to overwrite each job immediately after it finishes

processing. Immediate Job Overwrite removes any remnants of all print, copy, scan, and fax jobs from

the image disk.

Note: Immediate Job Overwrite is the preferred setting for high security environments and is

enabled by default.

EEnnaabblliinngg IImmmmeeddiiaattee IImmaaggee OOvveerrwwrriittee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Image Overwrite Security.

3. Click the Immediate Job Overwrite tab.

4. On the Immediate Job Overwrite tab, for Enablement, select Enabled.

5. Click Apply.

Enabling Immediate Image Overwrite at the Control Panel

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Security Settings→Image Overwrite Security.

3. Touch Job Overwrite.

4. Touch Enable.

5. Touch OK.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

141

Security

PostScript Passwords

The PostScript language includes commands that allow PostScript print jobs to change the printer

configuration. By default, PostScript jobs can use these commands, and a password is not required. To

ensure that unauthorized changes are not made, you can require PostScript jobs to include a

password.

You can enable the following passwords:

• Run Start Job: This password controls the execution of the Sys/Start file.

• Device Parameters Password: This password controls the execution of PostScript programs that

modify PostScript device parameters.

• Start Job Password: This password is used with the Startjob and Exitserver operators to restrict

PostScript jobs from running unencapsulated. This prevents unencapsulated jobs from changing

default device settings.

For details, refer to the Help in the Embedded Web Server.

EEnnaabblliinngg oorr CCrreeaattiinngg PPoossttSSccrriipptt PPaasssswwoorrddss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click PostScript Passwords.

3. To enable the Run Start Job password, for Startup Mode, select Enabled.

4. For Device Parameters Password, type a password, then retype the password to verify.

5. For Start Job Password, type a password, then retype the password to verify.

6. Click Save.

142

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

Hiding User Names on the Control Panel

You can hide the user name for the logged-in user to prevent it from displaying on the device control

panel touch screen.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security→Hide User Name.

2. To hide the user name, for Hide User Name/Friendly Name within the Device's Touch Interface,

click Yes (Hide).

3. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

143

Security

Verifying the Software

You can test the printer software to confirm that it is operating correctly. The test checks software

files to confirm that they are not corrupt. If the printer software appears to be functioning

improperly, a Xerox representative can ask you to perform this test.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Software Verification Test.

3. To begin the test, click Start Test.

4. To interrupt and cancel the test, click Cancel.

Note:

• You can continue to use the device while the test is running.

• If the test fails, the software files are corrupt. Xerox recommends that you reinstall the

software. For help, contact a Xerox representative.

144

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

Restricting Print File Software Updates

You can restrict users from installing optional software features by sending a print file. This option

restricts users from updating the software.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Feature Installation.

3. To restrict users from installing features using the .csv file print method, for Allow Print File

Updates, select Disable.

4. Click Apply.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

145

Security

Specifying Email and Internet Fax Recipient

Restrictions

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Security Settings→Valid Recipients.

3. To allow users to send an email or Internet fax to addresses in the address book only, touch Limit

to Address Book Entries.

4. Touch OK.

146

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

System Administrator Password

The administrator password is required when you want to access locked settings in the Embedded

Web Server, or at the printer control panel. Most printer models have a default configuration that

restricts access to some settings. Access is restricted for settings on the Properties tab in the

Embedded Web Server, and settings on the Device menu at the control panel.

After you configure the printer, you can change the default password when you log in to the

Embedded Web Server as an administrator. If you continue to use the default password, you are

prompted to change the password each time you log in to the Embedded Web Server as the

administrator. You can continue to use the default administrator password at the control panel. For

details on changing the password, refer to Changing the System Administrator Password.

To set the policy to follow if you forget the administrator password, refer to Enabling the

Administrator Password Reset and Disabling the Administrator Password Reset.

Note: To avoid forgetting a single administrator password, it is recommended to create a

number of local accounts with administrator rights.

EEnnaabblliinngg tthhee AAddmmiinniissttrraattoorr PPaasssswwoorrdd RReesseett

To enable the password reset feature:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Password Policies, then click Admin Password.

3. Click the Reset Policy tab.

4. For Password Reset Policy, click Enable Password Reset.

5. Click Apply.

Note: If you enable the password reset feature, and forget the administrator password, for

instructions, contact Xerox Support. For security, you can reset the password at the device

control panel only.

DDiissaabblliinngg tthhee AAddmmiinniissttrraattoorr PPaasssswwoorrdd RReesseett

To disable the password reset feature:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security.

2. Click Password Policies, then click Admin Password.

3. Click the Reset Policy tab.

4. For Password Reset Policy, click Disable Password Reset.

5. Click Apply.

Caution: If you disable the password reset feature, and forget the administrator password,

contact a Xerox representative, then schedule a site visit. There is a fee for a Xerox

representative site visit to reset the administrator password.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

147

Security

148

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Security

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

149

Printing

This chapter contains:

• Paper Management ................................................................................................................. 150

• Saving and Reprinting Jobs ...................................................................................................... 155

• Printing Jobs from the Embedded Web Server .......................................................................... 158

• Configuring General Print Settings ........................................................................................... 159

• Printing an Error Sheet ............................................................................................................. 160

• Managing Banner Page Printing Options.................................................................................. 161

• Configuring Secure Print Settings ............................................................................................. 163

• Hold All Jobs ............................................................................................................................ 164

• Showing Printer Font Information ............................................................................................ 165

• UNIX, Linux, and AS/400 Printing............................................................................................. 166

• Print from USB ......................................................................................................................... 169

• Print from Mailbox ................................................................................................................... 170

• Allowing Users to Interrupt Active Print Jobs ............................................................................ 171

• Specifying Output Settings....................................................................................................... 172

Paper Management

SSeettttiinngg DDeeffaauulltt PPaappeerr TTyyppee aanndd CCoolloorr

You can specify the default settings for paper type and color.

Note: When the paper type and color are not specified for the print job, the system applies

default settings.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Paper Management.

2. If necessary, click the Default Paper Type and Color tab.

3. For Paper Type, set the default paper type.

4. For Paper Color, set the default paper color.

5. Click Save.

EEnnaabblliinngg RReeqquuiirreedd PPaappeerr PPoolliicciieess

You can configure policies for the paper tray confirmation prompt, nearest paper type match, and

paper-size replacement features.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Paper Management.

2. Click the Required Paper Policies tab.

3. To configure the prompt at the control panel when new same-size paper is loaded in a tray, for

Automatic Tray Confirmation Prompt, select the paper tray options.

a. For Bypass Tray, select an option:

• Always Show: This option displays the paper confirmation prompt at the control panel.

The prompt remains on the control panel until a user selects OK.

• Delayed Confirmation: This option displays the paper confirmation prompt at the control

panel for a specified time. For the Confirm and close prompt after setting, select a time

period.

Note: While the prompt appears at the control panel, you can confirm any change to

paper type, color, and size. At the end of the specified time, the prompt disappears.

b. For Other Adjustable Trays, select an option:

• Always Show.

• Delayed Confirmation.

• Auto Confirmation: This option confirms the paper type, color, and size without showing

a prompt at the control panel.

Note: Xerox does not recommend using the Auto Confirmation option unless you

always load the tray with paper of the exact same type, color, and size.

4. To replace the requested paper size with the closest replacement paper size, for Nearest Match,

select Enabled.

Note: To obtain the best fit of the image on the paper, this option can cause slight scaling

of the image.

150

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Printing

5. To replace the Legal paper size with one of two replacement paper sizes, for Replace 8.5 x 14",

select Enabled.

Note: If the first replacement paper size is not available, the printer uses the second

replacement paper size.

6. To set the default Legal paper size for when the scanner cannot detect the paper length, for

Default Legal Size, select a paper size.

7. To set an alert for when the required paper is not available, for Jobs Held for Required Paper,

select an option.

8. Click Apply.

SSeettttiinngg PPaappeerr SSiizzee PPrreeffeerreennccee

Use Paper Size Preference to control how paper-size measurements appear on the control panel. For

the unit of measure, select Inches or Metric. This setting affects custom-size measurement units.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Paper Management.

2. Click the Paper Size Preference tab.

3. For Inches or Metric, select an option:

• To set the paper size preference to inches, select Inches.

• To set the paper size preference to millimeters, select Metric.

4. Click Apply.

SSeettttiinngg PPaappeerr SSiizzee PPrreeffeerreenncceess aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings→Paper Management→Paper Size Preference.

3. Select an option.

• Inches: This option sets the paper-size preference to inches.

• Metric: This option sets the paper-size preference to millimeters.

4. Touch OK.

SSeelleeccttiinngg PPaappeerr TTrraayy SSeettttiinnggss

For each paper tray, you can view or configure the mode, priority, and auto-select settings.

1. Access the Embedded Web Server.

2. Access the Paper Management page using one of the following methods:

• Click Properties→General Setup→Paper Management.

• Click Home, then for Trays, click Settings.

3. Click the Tray Content & Settings tab.

4. To edit a specific paper tray, click Edit on that row.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

151

Printing

5. For Edit Tray, select an option:

• Fully Adjustable: This option prompts you to confirm the type of paper loaded in the tray.

• Dedicated: This option sets the paper tray as the only paper source for print jobs matching a

specific paper size, type and color. This option assumes that the paper you loaded in the tray

is the type specified for Paper Types.

• If you selected Dedicated, to edit the paper size, type, and color for this tray, click the pencil

icon.

• Select the desired options.

• Click Save.

6. For Priority, set the priority for the selected tray.

For example, the printer uses paper from the Priority 1 tray first. If that tray is empty, the printer

then prints using paper from the Priority 2 tray.

7. To have the print driver select the tray, for Auto Selection, select Enabled.

8. Click Save.

SSeelleeccttiinngg TTrraayy 11 oorr TTrraayy 22 SSeettttiinnggss

Your device model supports either Tray 1 configuration or Tray 2 configuration, but not both. The Tray

1 Usage setting or the Tray 2 Usage setting notifies the device about the paper tray configuration.

SSeelleeccttiinngg TTrraayy 11 SSeettttiinnggss ffoorr DDeevviiccee MMooddeellss tthhaatt SSuuppppoorrtt TTrraayy 11

CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn

To select Tray 1 settings for device models that support Tray 1 configuration:

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings→Paper Management→Tray 1 Usage.

3. Select an option.

• Standard Tray Only: This option indicates that only a Standard paper tray is installed.

• Envelope Tray Only: This option indicates that only the optional Envelope tray is installed.

• Both Standard and Envelope Tray: This option indicates that either of these trays is installed.

If you want to change between the Standard and Envelope trays, select this option.

Note: If you select Both Standard and Envelope Tray, select the check box on the

media configuration screen to indicate that the Envelope Tray is installed.

4. Touch OK.

SSeelleeccttiinngg TTrraayy 22 SSeettttiinnggss ffoorr DDeevviiccee MMooddeellss tthhaatt SSuuppppoorrtt TTrraayy 22

CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn

To select Tray 2 settings for device models that support Tray 2 configuration:

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings→Paper Management→Tray 2 Usage.

3. Select an option.

152

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Printing

• Standard Tray Only: This option indicates that only a Standard paper tray is installed.

• Envelope Tray Only: This option indicates that only the optional Envelope tray is installed.

4. Touch OK.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg CCuussttoomm MMeeddiiaa TTyyppeess

The Custom Media Types tab allows you to apply custom names to available media types. You can

add, edit, delete, import, or export custom media types. You can also determine what media types are

available in the system.

AAddddiinngg aa CCuussttoomm MMeeddiiaa TTyyppee

To add a custom media type:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Paper Management.

2. Click the Custom Media Types tab.

3. Click Add.

4. In the fields, type descriptive information as needed.

5. To position the paper type in the list, for Position, type a number. To position paper types higher

in the list, assign them lower numbers.

6. To hide the paper type from users, for Visibility in the System, select Hidden.

7. For Paper Type Profile, select an option.

8. Click Save.

EEddiittiinngg aa CCuussttoomm MMeeddiiaa TTyyppee

To edit a custom media type:

1. For the media type you want to edit, click Edit.

2. In the fields, type descriptive information as needed.

3. To position the paper type in the list, for Position, type a number. To position paper types higher

in the list, assign them lower numbers.

4. To hide the paper type from users, for Visibility in the System, select Hidden.

5. For Paper Type Profile, select an option.

6. Click Save.

AArrrraannggiinngg tthhee OOrrddeerr ooff CCuussttoomm MMeeddiiaa TTyyppeess iinn tthhee LLiisstt

To arrange the order of custom media types in the list:

1. Select a custom media type from the list.

2. To move the media type up or down in the list, click the arrows.

3. Click Apply.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

153

Printing

Note:

• To show all custom media types, for More Actions, select Show All.

• To hide all custom media types, for More Actions, select Hide All.

• To delete all custom media types and return to factory-default settings, for More Actions,

select Delete All / Return to Factory Defaults.

IImmppoorrttiinngg aa CCuussttoomm MMeeddiiaa TTyyppee

To import a custom media type:

1. For More Actions, select Import.

2. Click Browse or Choose File, select the file, then click Open or Choose.

3. For Encoding, select an option.

4. To import the file, click Import.

5. Click Close.

EExxppoorrttiinngg CCuussttoomm MMeeddiiaa TTyyppee SSeettttiinnggss

To export custom media type settings:

1. For More Actions, select Export.

2. For Encoding, select an option.

3. For Delimiter, select an option.

4. To export the file, select Export.

5. Click Close.

To display custom media names at the top of the media list, select Always Display Custom Types

First.

154

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Printing

Saving and Reprinting Jobs

The Reprint Saved Jobs feature allows you to save your print job on the device so that you can print it

at any time.

EEnnaabblliinngg tthhee RReepprriinntt SSaavveedd JJoobbss FFeeaattuurree

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Print From.

2. Click Reprint Saved Jobs→Enablement.

3. For Enablement, select Enabled.

4. To save the new settings, click Apply. To retain the previous settings, click Undo.

CCrreeaattiinngg aanndd MMaannaaggiinngg SSaavveedd JJoobbss FFoollddeerrss

By default, if Reprint Saved Jobs is enabled, jobs are saved in the Default Public Folder. You can create

folders to organize saved jobs.

Managing certain folder types requires that you log in as the creator of the folder or that you have

administrator-level permissions. You can delete, rename, or change the permissions for a folder. If you

want to limit access to the saved jobs, assign a password to a folder.

CCrreeaattiinngg aa FFoollddeerr

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Jobs→Saved Jobs.

2. For Folder Operations, click Create New Folder.

3. Type a name in the field provided.

4. For Folder Permissions, select the folder type.

5. Click Apply.

MMaannaaggiinngg aa FFoollddeerr

1. Click Manage Folders.

2. For the folder, click the pencil icon.

3. If allowed, you can rename the folder and change folder permissions.

4. Click Apply.

DDeelleettiinngg aa FFoollddeerr

1. Click Manage Folders.

The list of existing folders appears.

2. Select the folder you want to delete.

The Delete Folder button activates.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

155

Printing

3. Click Delete Folder.

A warning message appears informing you that the delete is permanent.

4. Click OK to delete or Cancel to exit.

SSaavviinngg aanndd PPrriinnttiinngg JJoobbss

SSaavviinngg aa JJoobb ffrroomm YYoouurr CCoommppuutteerr

1. With your file open, click the File menu in the application, then click Print.

2. From the application Print window, select your printer from the Printer Name menu.

3. Click Properties to access the print settings for the job.

4. On the Printing Options tab, click the Job Type menu, then select Saved Job.

5. Type a Job Name for the job or, to use the document file name being submitted, select Use

Document Name.

6. From the Save To menu, select the destination folder. Select Default Public Folder or type a

name for a new folder.

7. To save the job to the printer and print it immediately, click Save and Print.

8. To save your job as a secure job, select Private, type and retype a 4–10 digit passcode, then click

OK.

BBaacckkiinngg UUpp SSaavveedd JJoobbss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Print From.

2. Click Reprint Saved Jobs→Backup Jobs.

3. For Protocol, select FTP.

4. Select the address type for the FTP server to use for backup jobs. Options are IPv4 Address, IPv6

Address, or Host Name.

5. For IP Address: Port, type the appropriately formatted address in the IP Address and Port field.

The default port number is 21.

6. For Document Path, type the path to the file repository.

7. For File Name, type the name for the backup file. This name is appended to the end of the

document path.

8. For Login Name, type the login name for the FTP server.

9. Type a password, then retype the password.

10. To save the password, select the Select to save new password check box.

11. Select an option:

• To begin the backup, click Start.

• To retain the previous settings, click Undo.

156

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Printing

RReessttoorriinngg SSaavveedd JJoobbss ffrroomm aann FFTTPP RReeppoossiittoorryy

Caution: When you restore backed-up jobs, existing stored jobs are overwritten, and the

Default Public Folder is emptied.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Print From.

2. Click Reprint Saved Jobs→Restore Jobs.

3. For Protocol, select FTP.

4. Select the address type for the FTP server where the saved jobs are stored. Options are IPv4

Address, IPv6 Address, or Host Name.

5. For IP Address: Port, type the appropriately formatted address in the IP Address and Port field.

The default port number is 21.

6. For Document Path, type the path to the file repository.

7. For File Name, type the name for the backup file that you want to restore. This name is

appended to the end of the document path.

8. For Login Name, type the login name for the FTP server.

9. Type a password, and then retype the password.

10. To save the password, select the Select to save new password check box.

11. Select an option:

• To begin restoring saved Jobs, click Start.

• To retain the previous settings, click Undo.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

157

Printing

Printing Jobs from the Embedded Web Server

You can print .pdf, .ps, .pcl, and .xps files from the Embedded Web Server.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Print.

The Job Submission page appears.

2. Click the File Name field, then type the file name. To select the file from a local network or

remote location, click Browse or Choose File.

3. For Printing, select options for the job as needed.

4. To print the document, click Submit Job.

Note: To ensure that the job was sent to the queue, wait for the job submission confirmation

message to appear before you close this page.

158

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Printing

Configuring General Print Settings

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Printing→General.

3. To print a Configuration Report when the printer is powered on, for Configuration Report, select

Print at Power on.

4. To restrict printing of the Configuration Report and Information Pages to the system

administrator, for Configuration / Information Pages Report, select Restrict to System

Administrator.

5. To erase all print jobs from the print queue at power-on, select Delete All print jobs at Power On.

6. For Held Job Policy, select options as needed.

• To require active jobs to print in the order received after a held job, for Allow Print Around on

Held Jobs, select No.

• To enable the user to print active jobs before a held job prints, for Allow Print Around on Held

Jobs, select Yes.

• To allow a job to print to an alternate paper source, for Allow Print on Alternate Paper When

Job is Held for Resources, select Yes.

7. To set the amount of time that the device holds print jobs before it deletes them, for Delete Held

Jobs After, specify the number of days, hours, and minutes.

8. For Banner Sheet, select options as needed.

• To print a banner page with each print job, for Print Banner Sheets, select Yes. To disable this

option, select No.

• To allow the print driver to override the setting for banner pages, for Allow the Print Driver to

Override, select Yes.

• To select the text that appears on the banner pages, for Banner Sheet Identification, select an

option.

9. To print an error sheet when a print job fails, for Print Error Sheets, select Enable.

10. For Defaults and Policies, for each setting, select options as needed.

11. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

159

Printing

Printing an Error Sheet

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Printing→General.

3. To print an error sheet when a print job fails, for Output Error Sheet, for Print Error Sheets, select

Enable.

4. Click Save.

160

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Printing

Managing Banner Page Printing Options

You can set the device to print a banner page with each print job. The banner page contains

information identifying the user and job name. You can set this option in the print driver, in the

Embedded Web Server, or at the control panel.

Note: Enable banner page printing in the print driver, at the control panel, or in the Embedded

Web Server. Otherwise, a banner page does not print.

EEnnaabblliinngg BBaannnneerr PPaaggee PPrriinnttiinngg iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb

SSeerrvveerr

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Printing→General.

3. In the Banner Sheet area, for Print Banner Sheets, select options as needed.

• To print a banner page with each print job, for Print Banner Sheets, select Yes. To disable this

option, select No.

• To allow the print driver to override the setting for banner pages, for Allow the Print Driver to

Override, select Yes.

• To select the text that appears on the banner pages, for Banner Sheet Identification, select an

option.

4. To save the new settings, click Save. To retain the previous settings, click Undo.

EEnnaabblliinngg BBaannnneerr PPaaggee PPrriinnttiinngg aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings.

3. Touch Job Sheets→Banner Pages.

4. For Print Banner Pages, touch Yes.

5. To allow users to turn banner page printing on or off in the print driver, for Allow the Print Driver

to Override, touch Yes.

6. For Banner Page Identification, select the information that prints on the banner page.

7. Touch OK.

EEnnaabblliinngg BBaannnneerr PPaaggee PPrriinnttiinngg iinn tthhee PPrriinntt DDrriivveerr

1. With your file open in the application, click the File menu, then click Print.

2. From the application Print window, select your printer from the Printer Name menu.

3. To access the print settings for the job, click Properties.

4. Click the Advanced tab.

5. Click to expand the Paper/Output option.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

161

Printing

6. Click Banner Sheets, then click the Down arrow and select Enabled or Disabled.

7. Click OK.

Note: If banner page printing is disabled in the Embedded Web Server or at the control

panel, setting the print driver to print banner pages is ignored.

162

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Printing

Configuring Secure Print Settings

You can configure Secure Print settings to specify how the printer behaves when a user sends a

Secure Print job to the printer.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg SSeeccuurree PPrriinntt DDeevviiccee PPoolliicciieess

1. To access the Secure Print page, click Properties→Apps→Printing→Secure Print, or click

Security→Secure Print.

2. Click the Device Policies tab.

3. To show or conceal the characters in job names, for Conceal Job names, select an option.

Note:

• When a Secure Print job is sent to the printer, by default, the job name appears in the

list of jobs on the control panel touch screen.

• When the characters are concealed, they appear as asterisks in the job name to hide

the title of the document that is being printed.

4. To display hidden job names for reporting or accounting, select options as needed:

• Show Concealed Job Names in Network Accounting Reports: This option shows the

concealed job names in network accounting reports.

• Show Concealed Job Names in Audit Log: This option shows the concealed job names in the

audit log.

5. For Release Policies for Secure Print Jobs Requiring Passcode When the User is Already Logged-In,

select an option:

• Release Jobs Without Prompting for Passcode: This option allows users who are logged in to

release a Secure Print job without typing a passcode.

• Prompt for Passcode Before Releasing Jobs: This option requires users who are logged in to

type a passcode to release the job.

6. Click Save.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg SSeeccuurree PPrriinntt DDrriivveerr DDeeffaauullttss

1. On the Secure Print page, click the Defaults tab.

2. To set the minimum passcode length, for Secure Print Passcode Length, type a number from 4–

10.

3. To set the default login method, for Print Driver, select an option:

• Passcode: This option requires you to log in using the 4–10 digit passcode that you submitted

with the print job.

• User ID: This option requires you to log in using your assigned device user ID.

4. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

163

Printing

Hold All Jobs

You can enable and configure the Hold All Jobs feature to require users to release print jobs manually

at the control panel.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg tthhee HHoolldd aallll JJoobbss FFeeaattuurree

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Printing→Hold All Jobs.

3. For Enablement, select an option.

• Hold all Jobs in a Private Queue: The printer holds sent jobs in a locked folder. Users are

required to log in at the control panel to view, print, and delete jobs.

• Hold all Jobs in a Public Queue: The printer holds sent jobs in an unlocked folder. Users are

not required to log in at the control panel unless accessing a Secure Print job.

4. For Unidentified Job Policies, select an option.

Note:

• Unidentified jobs are jobs that are not associated with a user name. Unidentified jobs

originate from a computer that does not require a user to log in. Examples include jobs

sent from a DOS or UNIX window environment using LPR, Port 9100, or from the Jobs

tab in the Embedded Web Server.

• Changing the setting for Unidentified Jobs Policy deletes existing unidentified jobs that

are waiting for authentication.

• Hold Jobs; All Users can Manage Jobs: This option allows all users to view, print, and delete

unidentified jobs. Users are required to enter a passcode to release Secure Print jobs.

• Hold Jobs; Only Administrators can Manage Jobs: This option allows only system

administrators to view, print, and delete unidentified jobs. System administrators are required

to enter a passcode to release Secure Print jobs.

• Delete Jobs Immediately: This option deletes all unidentified jobs. Deleted jobs appear in a

list at the control panel in the Completed Jobs queue.

• Print Jobs Immediately: This option immediately prints all unidentified jobs except for

unidentified Secure Print jobs. Users are required to enter a passcode to release Secure Print

jobs.

5. For Release Job Policy After Log On, select an option.

6. Click Save.

164

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Printing

Showing Printer Font Information

The printer can print text using PostScript emulation fonts and PCL fonts. Permanent fonts are

installed on the printer by default. You cannot delete Permanent fonts. You can install downloaded

fonts on the printer using the Xerox

Font Management Utility. You can download the Xerox Font

Management Utility from the Xerox website at www.support.xerox.com.

To show font information:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Printing→Printer Fonts.

2. In the Samples area, select a set of fonts.

3. Click Print Font Samples.

4. To select the fonts in the printer font list, for View by Font Type, select an option.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

165

Printing

UNIX, Linux, and AS/400 Printing

UNIX-based printing uses LPD/LPR port 515 or lp to port 9100 to provide printer spooling and

network print server functionality. Xerox

printers can communicate using either protocol.

XXeerrooxx

®®

PPrriinntteerr MMaannaaggeerr

Xerox

Printer Manager is an application that allows you to manage and print to multiple printers in

UNIX and Linux environments.

Xerox

Printer Manager allows you to:

• Configure and check the status of network connected printers.

• Set up a printer on your network as well as monitor the operation of the printer once installed.

• Perform maintenance checks and view supplies status at any time.

• Provide a common look and feel across the many different suppliers of UNIX and Linux operating

systems.

IInnssttaalllliinngg XXeerrooxx

®®

PPrriinntteerr MMaannaaggeerr

Before you begin:

Ensure that you have root or superuser privileges to install Xerox

Printer Manager.

1. Download the appropriate package for your operating system. To locate drivers for your printer,

go to www.support.xerox.com. The available files are:

• Xeroxv5Pkg-AIXpowerpc-x.xx.xxx.xxxx.rpm for the IBM PowerPC family.

• Xeroxv5Pkg-HPUXia64-x.xx.xxx.xxxx.depot.gz to support HP Itanium workstations.

• Xeroxv5Pkg-Linuxi686-x.xx.xxx.xxxx.rpm to support RPM-based 32-bit Linux environments.

• Xeroxv5Pkg-Linuxi686-x.xx.xxx.xxxx.deb to support Debian-based 32-bit Linux environments.

• Xeroxv5Pkg-Linuxx86_64-x.xx.xxx.xxxx.rpm to support RPM-based 64-bit Linux environments.

• Xeroxv5Pkg-Linuxx86_64-x.xx.xxx.xxxx.deb to support Debian-based 64-bit Linux

environments.

• Xeroxv5Pkg-SunOSi386-x.xx.xxx.xxxx.pkg.gz for Sun Solaris x86 systems.

• Xeroxv5Pkg-SunOSsparc-x.xx.xxx.xxxx.pkg.gz for Sun Solaris SPARC systems.

2. To install the custom driver, log in as root then type the following command:

• AIX: rpm -U Xeroxv5Pkg-AIXpowerpc-x.xx.xxx.xxxx.rpm

• HPUX: swinstall -s Xeroxv5Pkg-HPUXia64-x.xx.xxx.xxxx.depot.gz \*

• Linux (RPM based): rpm -U Xeroxv5Pkg-Linuxi686-x.xx.xxx.xxxx.rpm

• Linux (Debian based): dpkg -i Xeroxv5Pkg-Linuxi686-x.xx.xxx.xxxx.deb

• Solaris (x86 based): pkgadd -d Xeroxv5Pkg-SunOSi386-x.xx.xxx.xxxx.pkg

• Solaris (SPARC based): pkgadd -d Xeroxv5Pkg-SunOSsparc-x.xx.xxx.xxxx.pkg

The installation creates a Xerox directory in /opt/Xerox/prtsys.

166

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Printing

LLaauunncchhiinngg XXeerrooxx

®®

PPrriinntteerr MMaannaaggeerr

To launch Xerox

Printer Manager from a terminal window prompt as root, type xeroxprtmgr, then

press Enter or Return.

PPrriinnttiinngg ffrroomm aa LLiinnuuxx WWoorrkkssttaattiioonn

To print from a Linux workstation, install either a Xerox

print driver for Linux or a CUPS print driver.

You do not need both drivers.

Xerox recommends that you install one of the full-featured custom print drivers for Linux. To locate

drivers for your printer, go to www.support.xerox.com.

If you use CUPS, ensure that CUPS is installed and running on your workstation. The instructions for

installing and building CUPS are contained in the CUPS Software Administrators Manual, written and

copyrighted by Easy Software Products. For complete information on CUPS printing capabilities, refer

to the CUPS Software Users Manual available from www.cups.org/documentation.php.

IInnssttaalllliinngg tthhee PPPPDD oonn tthhee WWoorrkkssttaattiioonn

1. Download the Xerox

PPD for CUPS from the Drivers and Downloads page on the Xerox Support

website.

2. Copy the PPD into the CUPS ppd/Xerox folder on your workstation. If you are unsure of the

location of the folder, use the Find command to locate the PPD files.

3. Follow the instructions that are included with the PPD.

AAddddiinngg tthhee PPrriinntteerr

1. Verify that the CUPS daemon is running.

2. Open a Web browser and type http://localhost:631/admin, then click Enter or Return.

3. For User ID, type root. For password, type the root password.

4. Click Add Printer and follow the onscreen prompts to add the printer to the CUPS printer list.

PPrriinnttiinngg wwiitthh CCUUPPSS

CUPS supports the use of both the System V (lp) and Berkeley (lpr) printing commands.

1. To print to a specific printer in System V, type: lp -dprinter filename, then click Enter.

2. To print to a specific printer in Berkeley, type: lpr -Pprinter filename, then click Enter.

AASS//440000

Xerox provides Work Station Customization Object (WSCO) files to support AS/400 or Iseries, V5R2 or

later systems. The WSCO file provides printer-specific PCL codes. The host print transform uses these

codes to select the correct tray, 2-sided printing option, font size and type, and orientation. The

XTOOLSxxxx library provides a source WSCO for each supported Xerox

printer. You only download

and install the library once.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

167

Printing

Note:

• The host print transform only works on AFPDS and SCS files. Convert IPDS formatted printer

files to AFPDS files to use the WSCO for printing.

• You must have IOSYSCFG permissions to create a device description or a remote queue.

• For details on AS/400, refer to the IBM AS/400 Printing V, (Red Book), available on the IBM

website.

IInnssttaalllliinngg tthhee WWSSCCOO aanndd SSeettttiinngg uupp PPrriinntt QQuueeuueess

For detailed instructions on installing the library and setting up print queues, refer to the installation

instructions that are included with the library.

168

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Printing

Print from USB

This feature allows you to print a file that is stored on a USB Flash Drive from the USB port on the

printer control panel.

Before you begin:

Enable USB ports. For details, refer to USB Port Security.

EEnnaabblliinngg PPrriinntt ffrroomm UUSSBB

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Print From→Print from USB.

3. For Enablement, select Enabled.

4. Click Apply.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

169

Printing

Print from Mailbox

Print from mailbox allows you to print a file that is stored in a folder on the printer hard drive.

EEnnaabblliinngg PPrriinntt FFrroomm MMaaiillbbooxx

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Print From→Print From Mailbox.

3. For Scan to Mailbox, select Enabled.

4. For Print From Mailbox, select Enabled.

Note: You must enable Scan to Mailbox before you can enable Print From Mailbox.

5. To set the default view to show folders on the Scan tab in the Embedded Web Server, select On

Scan tab, view Mailboxes by default. If you clear this option, the default becomes Workflows.

6. Click Save.

Note: For instructions on using this feature, refer to the User Guide for your printer model.

170

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Printing

Allowing Users to Interrupt Active Print Jobs

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings→Interrupt Printing Enablement.

3. Touch Enable.

4. Touch OK.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

171

Printing

Specifying Output Settings

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings.

3. Touch Output.

4. To prioritize copy and print jobs, select Contention Management. Select an option, then touch

OK.

• Priority: This option specifies the relative priority of the copy or print jobs. The lower the

number, the higher the priority.

• First In/First Out: This option schedules jobs to print, based on their entry into the Job Queue.

5. To specify how the device handles a print job that requires staples when the stapler is empty,

select Out of Staples Options. Select an option, then touch OK.

6. To specify the default output location for jobs that do not have finishing options, select Output

Location. Select an option, then touch OK.

7. To specify where the device applies staples to a print job, select Staple Productivity Mode, select

an option, then touch OK.

8. To specify whether jobs are offset in the output tray, touch Offset. As needed, select or clear the

check boxes for Center Tray Offset, and Offsetting of Sets Within Copy Jobs. Touch OK.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a

specific device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type. Some options are

available only if a finisher is installed.

172

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Printing

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

173

Copying

This chapter contains:

• Setting Copy Presets ................................................................................................................ 174

• Specifying ID Card Copy Settings............................................................................................. 177

• Specifying Output Settings....................................................................................................... 178

Setting Copy Presets

SSppeecciiffyyiinngg DDeeffaauulltt CCooppyy SSeettttiinnggss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Copy→Setup.

3. For color devices, do the following:

• To require users to select the output color at the control panel, for Color Presets Screen, select

On. This setting allows you to conserve supplies. For example, when Auto Detect is on, the

device detects color in an original document that is almost entirely black and white. This

setting prevents you from accidentally copying in color when you intend to copy in black and

white.

• For Output Color, select the color mode that the device uses for copies. If you select Single

Color, for Single Color, select the color.

• For 2-Sided Copying, select an option.

• To rotate the second side, select Rotate Side 2.

4. For monochrome devices, for Toner Saver, select an option.

5. Click Apply.

SSppeecciiffyyiinngg FFeeaattuurree DDeeffaauullttss ffoorr CCooppyy SSeettttiinnggss aatt tthhee

CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Copy App.

3. Touch Feature Defaults.

4. Edit settings as needed for output, image quality, layout, output format, and job assembly.

5. Touch Done.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a specific

device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee CCoolloorr PPrreesseettss SSccrreeeenn

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Copy App.

3. Touch Color Preset Screen or Toner Saver.

4. Select an option.

5. Touch OK.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a specific

device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

174

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Copying

SSeettttiinngg EEddggee EErraassee PPrreesseettss

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Copy App.

3. Touch Edge Erase Presets.

CCrreeaattiinngg aann EEddggee EErraassee PPrreesseett

To create an Edge Erase Preset:

1. Touch Presets, then from the list of presets, touch Available.

2. To name the preset, touch the existing preset name, then type a new name using the touch

screen keyboard.

Note: The default name for a new preset is [Available].

3. Edit the edge-erase settings as needed.

4. Touch OK.

EEddiittiinngg aann EExxiissttiinngg PPrreesseett

To edit an existing preset:

1. Touch Presets, then touch the needed preset.

2. To change the preset name, touch the existing preset name, then type a new name using the

touch screen keyboard.

3. Touch Side 1, then to change the amount to erase from each edge, touch the arrows.

4. Touch Side 2, then to change the amount to erase from each edge, touch the arrows, or touch

Mirror Side 1.

5. To change the preset name, touch the name field, type the new name, then touch OK.

6. Touch OK.

SSeettttiinngg IImmaaggee SShhiifftt PPrreesseettss

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Copy App.

3. Touch Image Shift Presets.

4. Touch Presets, then touch the desired preset.

5. For Side 1, to change the amount of Up/Down and Left/Right shift, touch the arrows.

6. For Side 2, to change the amount of Up/Down and Left/Right shift, touch the arrows, or touch

Mirror Side 1.

7. To change the preset name, touch the name field, type the new name, then touch OK.

8. To save the settings, touch OK.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

175

Copying

SSeettttiinngg RReedduuccee//EEnnllaarrggee PPrreesseettss

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Copy App.

3. Touch Reduce/Enlarge Presets.

4. To change a proportional preset:

a. Touch Proportional %.

b. Select a preset.

c. To type the percentage, use the touch-screen keypad, or touch Plus (+) or Minus (-).

d. Touch OK.

5. To change a preset that uses an independent percentage for the width and length of the image:

a. Touch Independent %.

b. Select a preset.

c. To type the scale percentage, use the touch-screen keypad, or touch Plus (+) or Minus (-).

d. Touch OK.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee RReeaaddiinngg OOrrddeerr OOppttiioonnss

You can change the order that pages are scanned in books, which impacts Book Copy and Book Fax

features. You can also change the order that pages are printed, which impacts the Page Layout and

Booklet Creation features.

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Copy App.

3. Touch Reading Order Options.

4. For Scan Order or Print Order, touch an option.

5. If you selected Show Reading Order, for Default Reading Order, touch Left to Right or Right to

Left.

6. Touch OK.

DDiissaabblliinngg AAuuttoommaattiicc IImmaaggee RRoottaattiioonn

When you have Auto Reduce/Enlarge or Auto Paper selected, the printer automatically rotates the

image as needed. You can disable image rotation when either Auto Reduce/Enlarge or Auto Paper is

selected.

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Copy App.

3. Touch Auto Image Rotation.

4. For Auto Reduce/Enlarge or Auto Paper, select Disable Rotation.

5. Touch OK.

176

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Copying

Specifying ID Card Copy Settings

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→ID Card Copy App.

SSeettttiinngg IIDD CCaarrdd CCooppyy DDeeffaauullttss

To set ID card copy defaults:

1. Touch Defaults.

2. Do one or more of the following.

• To edit the default setting for number of copies to print, touch Quantity. Select a number,

then touch Enter.

• To set the default percentage that copy output is reduced or enlarged, touch Reduce /

Enlarge, then select an option.

• To edit the default setting for paper tray or type, touch Paper Supply, then select a paper tray

or type.

• To edit the default setting for the proportion of text to images on the original document,

touch Original Type, then select an option.

• To edit the default setting for lightness or darkness, for Lighten / Darken, move the slider.

• To edit the default setting for Automatic Background Suppression, touch the toggle button.

Note: A check mark on the toggle button indicates Enabled.

• To reset all features to the original factory-default settings, touch Reset.

3. Touch Next.

4. Touch Done.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

177

Copying

Specifying Output Settings

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings.

3. Touch Output.

4. To prioritize copy and print jobs, select Contention Management. Select an option.

• Priority: This option specifies the relative priority of the copy or print jobs. The lower the

number, the higher the priority.

• First In/First Out: This option schedules jobs to print based on their entry into the Job Queue.

5. To specify the output location for jobs, select Output Location, then select an option.

6. To separate print sets within a print job, select Within Job Offsetting, then select Enable or

Disable.

Note: If you select Disable, the device stacks all printed sets together.

7. To specify how the device handles a print job that requires staples when the stapler is empty,

select Out of Staples Options, then select an option.

8. To save the settings, touch OK.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a

specific device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type. Some options are

available only if a finisher is installed.

178

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Copying

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

179

Scanning

This chapter contains:

• Scanning to an Email Address .................................................................................................. 180

• Workflow Scanning .................................................................................................................. 185

• Scanning to a Folder on the Device .......................................................................................... 196

• Scan to USB............................................................................................................................. 200

• Scanning to a User Home Folder .............................................................................................. 201

• Configuring Scan To................................................................................................................. 203

• Configuring the Printer for the Xerox

Scan Utility ................................................................... 205

Scanning to an Email Address

The email feature allows you to scan a document and send it to an email address as an attachment.

Before you begin:

• Configure SMTP settings. Note the IP Address or host name of your SMTP server. For details, refer

to Configuring SMTP Server Settings.

• Create an email account for the printer. The printer uses this address as the default text in the

From: field of the email.

For instructions on using this feature, refer to the User Guide for your printer model.

EEmmaaiill

Configure email settings in the Embedded Web Server, on the Email Setup page. Email settings apply

to other apps that use SMTP.

AAcccceessssiinngg tthhee EEmmaaiill SSeettuupp PPaaggee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Email→Setup.

EEddiittiinngg UUsseerr PPoolliiccyy SSeettttiinnggss

1. On the Email Setup page, click the Security tab.

2. To edit permissions roles, for Manage user permissions, click Edit.

3. To configure email recipient settings, for Only send to self, click Edit.

• To restrict authenticated users from sending emails to others, for Only send to Self, select On.

This setting disables the New Recipient and Address Book buttons, preventing users from

adding more recipients.

• To require users to select email addresses from an address book, for Restrict Manual Entry of

Email Address, select On.

• To clear the To, CC, and BCC fields after a user presses the Start button on the control panel,

for Clear To:, Cc:, and Bcc: fields after selecting Send, select On.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg RReeqquuiirreedd SSeettttiinnggss

1. On the Email Setup page, click the Required Settings tab.

2. To configure SMTP settings, next to SMTP, click Edit. For details, refer to SMTP Server.

3. To configure From Field settings, next to the From Field, under Action, click Edit.

Configuring From Field Settings

1. For Default From Address, type the email address you want sent from the printer.

2. To always use the default email address, for Always use Default From Address, select Yes.

3. Select the LDAP search result conditions in which authenticated users are allowed to edit the

From field.

180

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Scanning

4. To allow users to edit the From field without authentication, for Edit From Field when

Authentication is not Required, select Yes.

5. To use sender's name with the email address, select Add sender's name to email address.

6. Click Save.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg GGeenneerraall EEmmaaiill SSeettttiinnggss

1. On the Email Setup page, click the General tab.

2. For Subject, type the text that you want to appear in the subject line of emails sent from the

printer.

3. For Message body, type the text that you want to appear in the body of emails.

4. To include the user name or email address in the body of emails, for User, select User Name,

Email Address, or both.

5. To include attachment information in the message body, select Number of Images, Attachment

File Type, or both.

6. To include information about the printer in the message body, for Multifunction Device System,

select the information that you want to include.

7. For Signature, type the information that appears at the end of the email message.

8. For Confirmation Sheet, select an option:

• Errors Only: This option instructs the printer to print a confirmation sheet only when a

transmission error occurs. The confirmation sheet lists error information and indicates that the

job has reached the SMTP server. The confirmation sheet does not indicate that the email

message was delivered.

• On: This option instructs the printer to print a confirmation sheet.

• Off: This option instructs the printer not to print a confirmation sheet. You can find status

about a job in the job log.

Note: To see the job log, at the control panel touch screen, touch Jobs→Completed Jobs.

9. To add the email address of the sender to the To field in email, for Auto Add Me, select Enabled.

10. Click Apply.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg AAddddrreessss BBooookk SSeettttiinnggss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Email→Setup.

2. Click the Address Books tab.

3. To configure the Address Book settings stored in the device, for Device Address Book, click Edit.

4. To use a Network Address book, configure LDAP server settings, for Network Address Book, click

Edit.

5. If you configured Address Book settings stored in the device, for Use Device Address Book, select

an option.

• To allow users to access the address book, select Yes. To show Favorites as the initial view

upon entering the address book, select View Favorites on Email Service Entry.

• To restrict users from accessing the address book, select No.

6. If you configured a Network Address Book, for Use Network Address Book, select an option.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

181

Scanning

• To allow users to access this address book, select Yes.

• To restrict users from accessing the address book, select No.

7. To set the policy for creating and editing contacts on the device touch screen, for Create / Edit

Contact from Touch Screen, select an option.

• To allow all users to create and edit contacts on the device touch screen, select All Users.

• To restrict creating and editing contacts on the device touch screen to system administrators,

select System Administrators Only.

8. Click Apply.

Note: For details, refer to Help in the Embedded Web Server.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg DDeeffaauulltt EEmmaaiill SSeettttiinnggss

1. On the Email Setup page, click the Defaults tab.

2. To edit default Scan to Email settings, for Scan to Email, click Edit.

3. To edit default Image Options, Image Enhancement, Resolution, and Quality / File Size settings,

for Advanced Settings, click Edit.

4. To edit default Original Orientation, Original Size, Edge Erase, and Blank Page Management

settings, for Layout Adjustment, click Edit.

5. To edit default File Format and Filename Extension settings, for Email Options, click Edit.

6. To create a custom email attachment file name, for Email Options, click Edit.

Note: For details, refer to Help in the Embedded Web Server.

SSeettttiinngg FFiillee CCoommpprreessssiioonn OOppttiioonnss

1. On the Email Setup page, click the Compression tab.

2. Select .tiff, .pdf, and .xps compression settings as needed. For details, refer to the Help in the

Embedded Web Server.

3. Click Apply.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg EEmmaaiill SSeeccuurriittyy SSeettttiinnggss

Configuring Encryption and Signing Settings

1. On the Email Setup page, click the Security tab.

2. To edit encryption and signing settings, on the Security tab, under Encryption/Signing, click Edit.

182

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Scanning

Configuring Email Signing Settings

Before you begin:

• Configure Smart Card Authentication. For details refer to Configuring Smart Card Authentication

Settings.

• Ensure that signing certificates are installed on all Smart Cards.

1. On the Email Encryption/Signing page, click the Signing tab.

2. To enable Email Signing, on the Signing tab, under Email Signing Enablement, select an option:

• Always On; Not editable by user restricts users from turning Email Signing off at the control

panel.

• Editable by user allows users to turn on or off Email Signing at the control panel.

3. If you select Editable by user, select the default setting for users at the control panel. Under Email

Signing Default, select On or Off.

4. Under Signing Hash, select a method.

5. Click Apply.

Configuring Email Encryption Settings

Before you begin:

• If you want to use the public keys stored on smart cards to encrypt email messages, configure

Smart Card Authentication.

• If you want to use the public keys stored in an address book, configure a Network Address Book or

the Device Address Book.

Note:

• If you only configure Smart Card Authentication, users can send encrypted emails to

themselves only.

• To store public keys in the Device Address Book, configure the Import Using Email feature,

and select Import encryption certificate from signed emails.

1. Click the Encryption tab.

2. To enable Email Encryption, on the Encryption tab, under Email Encryption Enablement, select an

option:

• Always On; Not editable by user restricts users from turning off Email Encryption at the

control panel.

• Editable by user allows users to turn Email Encryption on or off at the control panel.

If you select Editable by user, select the default setting for users at the control panel. Under Email

Encryption Default, select On or Off.

3. Under Encryption Algorithm, select an encryption method.

4. Click Apply.

Editing Domain and Email Filter Settings

1. On the Email Setup page, click the Security tab.

2. To edit domain filter and email filter settings, under Network Policies, click Edit.

3. To enable a domain filter list, under Domain Filter settings, select Allow Domains or Block

Domains.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

183

Scanning

4. Under New Domain, type the domain you want to add to the list and click Add.

5. To remove a domain from the list, select a domain, and click Remove.

6. To allow LDAP email address searches without the @ symbol, under Allow LDAP Email Address

without the @ Requirement, select On.

Note:

• Ensure that your mail server supports this requirement.

• If you select On under Allow LDAP Email Address without the @ Requirement, the

number of items returned by an LDAP search can increase.

184

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Scanning

Workflow Scanning

Workflow Scanning allows you to scan an original document, distribute, and archive the scanned

image file. The Workflow Scanning feature simplifies the task of scanning many multiple-page

documents and saving the scanned image files in one or more file locations.

Note: For instructions on using this feature, refer to the User Guide for your device.

To specify how and where scanned images are stored, create a workflow. You can create, manage,

and store multiple workflows in a workflow pool repository on a network server.

There are several workflow options:

• Distribution workflows enable you to scan documents to one or more file destinations. File

destinations include an FTP site, a website, and a network server. You can add fax destinations to

workflows too. To configure the default workflow, refer to Configuring the Default Workflow.

• Scan to Mailbox enables you to scan documents to public or private mailbox folders on the printer

hard drive. To configure the Scan to Mailbox feature, refer to Scanning to a Folder on the Device.

• Scan to USB enables you to scan documents to a connected USB Flash drive. To configure the

Scan to USB feature, refer to Scan to USB.

• Scan to Home enables you to scan documents to a personal home folder on your network. To

configure the Scan to Home feature, refer to Scanning to a User Home Folder.

EEnnaabblliinngg WWoorrkkffllooww SSccaannnniinngg

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→Scanning Web Apps.

3. For Scan Workflow Management, click Edit.

The HTTP page opens.

4. On the HTTP page, for Scan Services, enable Scan Workflow Management.

5. Click Save.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg FFiillee RReeppoossiittoorryy SSeettttiinnggss

A file repository is a network location where scanned images are stored. Before you create a workflow,

configure the file repository settings.

Note: You can add file destinations to a workflow from the predefined list of file repository

settings.

• In the Embedded Web Server, to create a new workflow, you can add file destinations from

the predefined list.

• In the Workflow Scanning App, for a selected workflow, you can add more file destinations

from the predefined list.

Your device supports the following transfer protocols:

• FTP

• SFTP

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

185

Scanning

• SMB

• HTTP/HTTPS

Note: HTTP/HTTPS scans to a Web server using a CGI script.

FFTTPP oorr SSFFTTPP

Before you begin:

• Ensure that FTP or SFTP services are running on the server or computer being used to store

scanned image files. Note the IP address or host name.

• Create a user account and password with read and write access for the printer to use to access the

repository folder. Note the user name and password.

• Create a folder within the FTP or SFTP root. Note the directory path, user name, and password.

This folder is your file repository.

• Test the connection. Log in to the file repository from a computer with the user name and

password. Create a folder in the directory, then delete it. If you cannot create and delete the

folder, check the user account access rights.

To configure file repository settings for FTP or SFTP:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→File Repository Setup.

3. Click Add New.

4. In the Friendly Name field, type a name for the repository.

5. For Default Repository Protocol, click the arrow, then select FTP or SFTP.

6. Select the address type. Options for FTP include IPv4, IPv6, or Host Name. Options for SFTP

include IPv4, or Host Name.

7. Type the appropriately formatted address and port number of your server.

8. For Default Repository Document Path, type the directory path of the folder beginning at the root

of FTP or SFTP services. For example, //directoryname/foldername.

9. If you want the printer to create .XSM subfolders for single page format files, select Sub-folder (.

XSM) for 1 File Per Page, File Format jobs.

10. For Default Repository Login Credentials, select an option:

• Authenticated User and Domain: This option instructs the device to use the user name and

domain of the logged-in user when the device accesses the repository.

• Logged in User: This option instructs the device to log in to the repository with the

credentials of the logged-in user.

• Prompt at device control panel: This option instructs the device to prompt users at the

control panel for the repository credentials.

• Device: This option instructs the device to use specific credentials when it accesses the

repository.

11. For Login Name and Password, type the credentials.

12. To update an existing password, select Select to save new password.

13. Click Save.

186

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Scanning

SSMMBB

Before you begin:

• Ensure that SMB services are running on the server or computer where you want to store scanned

image files. Note the IP address or host name.

• On the SMB server, create a shared folder. This folder is your file repository. Note the directory

path, Share Name of the folder, and the Computer Name or Server Name.

• Create a user account and password with read and write access for the printer to use to access the

repository folder. Note the user name and password.

• Test the connection by logging in to the file repository from a computer with the user name and

password. Create a folder in the directory, then delete it. If you cannot do this test, check the user

account access rights.

To configure file repository settings for SMB:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→File Repository Setup.

3. Click Add New.

4. In the Friendly Name field, type a name for the repository.

5. For Default Repository Protocol, click the arrow, then select SMB.

6. Select the address type. Options are IPv4 or Host Name.

7. Type the appropriately formatted address and port number of your server.

8. In the Share field, type the share name.

9. For Default Repository Document Path, type the directory path of the folder starting at the root

of the shared folder. For example, if you have a folder named scans in the shared folder, type

\scans.

10. If you want the printer to create .XSM subfolders for single-page-format files, select Sub-folder (.

XSM) for 1 File Per Page, File Format jobs.

11. For Default Repository Login Credentials, select an option:

• Authenticated User and Domain: This option instructs the device to use the user name and

domain of the logged-in user when it accesses the repository.

• Logged in User: This option instructs the device to log in to the repository with the

credentials of the logged-in user.

• Prompt at device control panel: This option instructs the device to prompt users at the

control panel for the repository credentials.

• Device: This option instructs the device to use specific credentials when it accesses the

repository.

12. For Login Name and Password, type the credentials.

13. To update an existing password, select Select to save new password.

14. Click Save.

HHTTTTPP//HHTTTTPPSS

Before you begin:

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

187

Scanning

• Enable HTTP or Secure HTTP (SSL). Ensure that a certificate is installed on the printer if you are

using SSL.

• Configure your Web server, and ensure that HTTP/HTTPS services are running. POST requests and

scanned data are sent to the server and processed by a CGI script. Note the IP address or host

name of the Web server.

• Create a user account and password for the printer on the Web server. Note the user name and

password.

– Create a /home directory for the printer.

– Create a /bin directory in the home directory.

– Copy an executable CGI script into the /bin directory. You can create your own script, or

download a sample script. For details, refer to CGI Scripts. Note the path to the script. The

script can be defined with script_name.extension or by path/script_name.extension.

• Create a folder with read and write permissions on the Web server, or alternate server. Note the

directory path, user name, and password. This folder is your file repository.

• Test the connection by logging in to the home directory of the printer on the Web server. Send a

POST request and file to the Web server. Check to see if the file is in the repository.

CGI Scripts

A CGI (Common Gateway Interface) script is a program on a Web server that is executed when the

server receives a request from a browser. A CGI script is required to allow files to be transferred to

your HTTP server from your printer.

When a document is scanned, the printer logs in to the Web server, sends a POST request along with

the scanned file, then logs out. The CGI script handles the remaining details of file transfer.

To download a sample CGI script:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→File Repository Setup.

3. Click Add New.

4. For Default Repository Protocol, select HTTP or HTTPS.

5. For Script path and filename, click Get Example Scripts.

6. Select a script language supported by your Web server. Right-click and save the appropriate .zip

or .tgz file to your computer.

7. Extract the downloaded file to the root of the Web services home directory.

Configuring File Repository Settings for HTTP/HTTPS

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Workflow Scanning→File Repository

Setup.

2. Click Add New.

3. In the Settings area, configure the following items:

a. For Friendly Name, type a name for the repository.

b. For Default Repository Protocol, select HTTP or HTTPS, then select an address type. Options

are IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, or Host Name.

188

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Scanning

c. For Default Repository Server, type the appropriately formatted address and port number of

your server.

4. To validate the SSL certificate used for HTTPS, select Validate Repository Certificate.

Note: To verify that a digital certificate is installed on the device, click View Root/

Intermediate Trusted Certificates.

5. For Script path and filename, type the path to the CGI script, starting at the root. For example:

/directoryname/foldername. To download working example scripts, click Get Example Scripts.

6. For Default Repository Document Path, type the directory path of the folder. For Web server

directories, type the path, starting at the root. For example, //directoryname/foldername.

7. If you want the device to create .XSM subfolders for single-page-format files, select Sub-folder (.

XSM) for 1 File Per Page, File Format jobs.

8. For Default Repository Login Credentials, select an option:

• Authenticated User and Domain: This option instructs the device to use the user name and

domain of the logged-in user when it accesses the repository.

• Logged in User: This option instructs the device to log in to the repository with the

credentials of the logged-in user.

• Prompt at device control panel: This option instructs the device to prompt users at the

control panel for the repository credentials.

• Device: This option instructs the device to use specific credentials when it accesses the

repository. If you select Device, type the credentials in the Login Name and Password fields.

To update an existing password, select Select to save new password.

• None: This option instructs the device to access the repository without providing credentials.

9. To update an existing password, select Select to save new password.

10. Click Save.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg tthhee DDeeffaauulltt WWoorrkkffllooww

Before you can use the Workflow Scanning feature, create and edit a workflow. A workflow contains

scan settings, and at least one destination for the scanned image files.

Configure the default workflow before you create a workflow. After the default workflow is

configured, all new workflows inherit the default workflow settings. You can edit new workflows as

needed.

The default workflow cannot be deleted.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→Default Workflow.

3. For Destination Services, select an option:

• To add File Destinations, select File.

• To add Fax Destinations, select Fax.

4. Add File Destinations, Fax Destinations, Document Management Fields, then configure other

scanning options as needed.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

189

Scanning

AAddddiinngg aa FFiillee DDeessttiinnaattiioonn

1. For File Destinations, click Add.

2. From the menu, select the required Filing Policy.

3. Click Save.

AAddddiinngg aa FFaaxx DDeessttiinnaattiioonn

1. For Fax Destinations, click Add.

2. Type a fax number in the Add Fax Number field, then click Add.

3. For Delivery, select Delayed Send, then type a time if you want to send the fax at a specific time.

4. Click Apply to save the new settings or Cancel to return to the previous screen.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg OOtthheerr DDeeffaauulltt WWoorrkkffllooww SSccaannnniinngg OOppttiioonnss

1. Click Edit to edit the following settings. For details, refer to the Help in the Embedded Web Server.

• Workflow Tags

• Workflow Scanning

• Advanced Settings

• Layout Adjustment

• Filing Options: To enable the Add to pdf Folder feature for a scan file that already exists, for

File Format, select PDF and 1 File Per Page.

• Job Assembly

• Filename Extension

• Report Options

• Scan to Image Settings

• Compression Settings

2. To restore the Default Workflow to its original settings, click Apply Factory Settings. This action

deletes any custom settings applied to the Default Workflow.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg WWoorrkkffllooww SSccaannnniinngg GGeenneerraall SSeettttiinnggss

Workflow Scanning allows you to scan an original document, distribute, and archive the scanned

image file. The Workflow Scanning feature simplifies the task of scanning many multi-page

documents and saving the scanned image files in one or more file locations.

You can create workflows or edit the default workflow to specify how and where scanned images are

stored or sent. Workflows can reside on the printer or in a pool of workflows that are stored on a

remote server. When you configure the default workflow, all subsequent workflows inherit the settings

from the default workflow.

To configure Workflow Scanning general settings:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→General Settings.

190

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Scanning

3. For Confirmation Sheet, select when you want a confirmation sheet to print.

• Errors Only: This option instructs the printer to print a confirmation sheet only when a

workflow scanning job generates an error.

• On: This option instructs the printer to print a confirmation sheet.

• Off: This option instructs the printer not to print a confirmation sheet. You can find status

about a job in the job log.

Note: To see the job log, at the control panel touch screen, touch Jobs→Completed Job

Queue.

4. To allow users to add file destinations to workflows manually, for Allow Manual Entry of File

Destinations, select Enabled.

5. To configure the list of workflows contained in a network workflow pool repository to refresh

automatically, for Enable Automatic Refresh, select Enabled. The list of workflows appears on the

control panel.

6. To change the time that workflows update, for Daily Start time, enter the hour and minute, then

select AM or PM.

7. To update the workflow list immediately, click Refresh Workflow List Now.

8. To configure the user name to appear in the job log, for Optional Information, select User Name.

If you added Document Management Fields to a workflow, the job log is stored with scanned

image files.

9. Click Apply.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg SSiinnggllee--TToouucchh AApppp

You can customize the naming convention of files generated during Workflow Scanning. For example,

you can:

• Assign file names in a numbered sequence.

• Select standard options or add custom text.

• Add advanced features such as including the date and time in the name.

To customize file names:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→Single-Touch App.

3. Click Create.

4. On the New Service page, type a name and description for the app.

5. Click Create.

Note:

• After you create an app, you can edit the description, but not the name of the app.

• You can create up to 10 apps.

• After you design your app and select a scan workflow for your app, the single-touch app

appears on the control panel touch screen.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

191

Scanning

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg CCuussttoomm FFiillee NNaammiinngg

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→Custom File Naming.

3. To add a prefix for the scanned image file name, for File Naming, select Auto. For Name, type the

prefix.

4. To choose the elements that you want to use to build the file name, select Custom Naming.

a. Select elements as needed. As you select display elements, they appear in the Position field.

• Date

• Time

• Job ID

• User ID

• Custom Text

Note: For Custom Text, type the custom text that you that want to appear in the file

name. For example, select the first Custom Text field and then type an underscore ( _ ).

The underscore appears in the Position field. You can include up to four Custom Text

strings in the file name.

b. To reposition the order of multiple Custom Text strings, for Position, click a text string. To

move the selected text string into the correct position for the file name, use the Arrow

buttons. The generated file name uses all of the text strings in order, from top to bottom.

c. Advanced: To create the file name, type a string with variables. For details, refer to the Help

in the Embedded Web Server.

5. Click Apply.

SSeettttiinngg WWoorrkkffllooww DDiissppllaayy SSeettttiinnggss ffoorr tthhee CCoonnttrrooll

PPaanneell

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→Display Settings.

3. To specify the workflow that appears at the top of the list, for Workflows, select a workflow, then

click Promote.

4. To prevent users from using the default scanning workflow, for Display Default Workflow, select

Hide Default Template in the Templates list.

Note: If you select Hide Default Template and there are no other workflows, the default

workflow appears until you add at least one more workflow.

5. To configure workflow selection when users access the Scan app, for Workflow Selection on Entry

of App, select an option:

• Automatically select the Promoted template: This option selects the promoted workflow

automatically.

• User must select a template before pressing Start: This option requires users to select a

workflow before they touch Start.

6. Click Apply.

192

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Scanning

EEnnaabblliinngg RReemmoottee SSccaannnniinngg uussiinngg TTWWAAIINN

Enable Remote Start to allow users to scan images into a TWAIN-compliant application using the

TWAIN driver.

Before you begin, enable the Scan Extension Web service. For details, refer to HTTP Web Services.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→Remote Start (TWAIN).

3. For Start Job via Remote Program, click On.

4. Click Apply.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg aa VVaalliiddaattiioonn SSeerrvveerr

You can use a validation server to verify scan metadata entered at the printer control panel. A

validation server compares the metadata with a list of valid values.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→Validation Servers.

3. Click Add.

4. Select HTTP or HTTPS.

5. For Protocol, select the address type. Options are IPv4, IPv6, or Host Name.

6. Type the appropriately formatted address and port number in the IP Address: Port field. The

default port number is 80 for HTTP and 443 for HTTPS.

7. For Path, type the path on the server.

Note: The format for a directory path for FTP is /directory/directory, whereas the format for

a directory path for SMB is \directory\directory.

8. For Response Timeout, type a number in seconds.

9. To save the settings, click Apply. To return to the previous screen, click Cancel.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg WWoorrkkffllooww PPooooll RReeppoossiittoorryy SSeettttiinnggss

You can store scanning workflows on your network in a workflows pool repository. Scanning workflows

contain details about scan jobs that can be saved and reused for other scan jobs.

If you use a scanning management application, such as SMARTsend or ScanFlowStore, provide

information about the server that hosts the workflows on this page.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→Advanced→Workflow Pool Management.

3. For Settings, from the menu, select the desired protocol.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

193

Scanning

4. Type the required information for the protocol. Follow the same steps used for setting up a file

repository for the protocol.

Note:

• For details, in the Embedded Web Server, view the online help for the selected protocol.

• The format for a directory path for FTP is /directory/directory, whereas the format for a

directory path for SMB is \directory\directory.

5. To save the new settings, click Apply. To retain the previous settings, click Cancel.

6. To reset settings to default values, click Default All.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg UUnnssppeecciiffiieedd DDeeffaauullttss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→Advanced→Unspecified Defaults.

3. For Advanced Settings, select a scanning resolution.

4. For Filing Options, select a TIFF Rotation Method.

5. For Workflow Distribution Repositories, select a Login Source.

6. Click Apply.

MMaannaaggiinngg SSccaann WWoorrkkfflloowwss

A workflow contains scan settings and at least one destination for the scanned image files. You can

associate a scan workflow with your app or use the default workflow.

Note: If you select Default Workflow, configure the default workflow and add at least one file

destination to the workflow.

VViieewwiinngg aa SSccaann WWoorrkkffllooww

To view a scan workflow:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Scan.

2. For Display, select Workflows.

3. Select a workflow from the workflow list.

CCrreeaattiinngg aa SSccaann WWoorrkkffllooww

To create a scan workflow:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Scan.

2. For Display, select Workflows.

3. Click Create New Workflow.

194

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Scanning

DDeelleettiinngg aa SSccaann WWoorrkkffllooww

To delete a scan workflow:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Scan.

2. For Display, select Workflows.

3. Select a workflow from the workflow list.

4. At the top of the workflow page, click Delete.

CCooppyyiinngg aa SSccaann WWoorrkkffllooww

To copy a scan workflow:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Scan.

2. For Display, select Workflows.

3. Select a workflow from the workflow list.

4. Click Copy.

5. Type the Workflow Name, Description, and Ownerdetails, as needed.

6. Click Add.

EEddiittiinngg aa SSccaann WWoorrkkffllooww

To edit a scan workflow:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Scan.

2. For Display, select Workflows.

3. Select a workflow from the workflow list.

4. Click Edit.

5. On the workflow page, change the settings as needed:

• To change the settings for a field, for the desired field, select the setting, then click Edit.

Configure the settings as needed, then click Apply or Save.

• To add settings to a field, for the desired field, click Add. Configure the settings as needed,

then click Apply or Save.

• To delete a setting from a field, select the setting, click Delete, then click OK.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

195

Scanning

Scanning to a Folder on the Device

The Scan to Mailbox feature allows users to scan files to mailboxes, which are folders created on the

device hard drive. These files can then be retrieved through the Embedded Web Server. This feature

provides network scanning capability without the need to configure a separate server and is

supported in Workflow Scanning. For details, refer to Workflow Scanning.

For instructions on using this feature, refer to the User Guide for your device model.

EEnnaabblliinngg oorr DDiissaabblliinngg SSccaann ttoo MMaaiillbbooxx

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Scan to Mailbox→Enablement.

3. For Scan to Mailbox, select Enabled.

Note: When you enable Scan to Mailbox, at the control panel, folders appear as workflows

in the list of scanning workflows.

4. To set the default view to show folders in the Embedded Web Server Scan tab, select On Scan

tab, view Mailboxes by default.

5. To save the new settings, click Save. To retain the previous settings, click Undo.

SSeettttiinngg SSccaann PPoolliicciieess

Scan policies allow you to manage how users are allowed to scan files, create folders, and assign

passwords to their folders on the printer.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Scan to Mailbox→Scan Policies.

3. For Scan Policies, select or clear:

• Allow scanning to Default Public Folder: This option allows users to scan files to the Default

Public Folder without requiring a password.

• Require per job password for public folders: This option requires users to type a password for

every job they scan to the public folder.

• Allow additional folders to be created: This option allows users to create public or private

folders on the printer. If Require password when creating additional folders is disabled,

assigning a password to the folder is optional and creates a public folder. If Allow additional

folders to be created is disabled, the Create Folder button does not appear on the Scan tab.

• Require password when creating additional folders: This option requires users to type a new

password every time they create a folder. This feature only allows users to create private

folders.

• Prompt for password when scanning to private folder: This option requires users to type the

password at the control panel every time they scan a job to a private folder.

• Allow access to job log data file: This option allows users to print a job log containing details

for any scanned image. Third-party applications can be used to search, file, and distribute jobs

based on job log information.

4. For Password Management, type a minimum and maximum password length. Select password

policies as needed.

5. Click Save.

196

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Scanning

MMaannaaggiinngg FFoollddeerrss aanndd SSccaannnneedd FFiilleess

CCrreeaattiinngg aa FFoollddeerr

By default, all users are allowed to scan to the Default Public Folder. If this option has been enabled in

Scan Policies, users can create and edit additional folders.

To create a folder:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Scan.

2. For Display, select Mailboxes.

3. For Scan to Mailbox, click Create Folder.

4. Type a unique name for the folder.

Type and retype a password as needed.

5. Click Apply.

EEddiittiinngg aa FFoollddeerr

To edit a folder:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Scan.

2. For Display, select Mailboxes.

3. Select the folder that you want to edit. If the folder is private, type the password, then click OK.

4. To change the folder password, click Modify Folder.

5. To edit the default scan settings for the folder, click Personalize Settings→Edit. For details, refer

to the Help in the Embedded Web Server.

DDeelleettiinngg SSccaannnneedd FFiilleess

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Scan to Mailbox→Files.

3. To remove the files from the server immediately, select an option.

• To delete all files on the server, select Delete all files now.

• To delete files older than a specified number of days, select Delete all files older than. Type

how many days old files must be for deletion.

4. Click Delete Files.

5. For Schedule Clean Up of Folder Files, specify the files that you want to delete. Type how many

days old files must be for deletion.

6. For Cleanup time, select an option.

• To have files deleted at the beginning of every hour, select Hourly.

• To specify the time of day for the delete process to run, select Daily, then type the number of

days.

7. Click Save.

Note: You can also delete scanned files from the Scan tab.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

197

Scanning

DDeelleettiinngg SSccaann FFoollddeerrss

You can modify or delete scan folders from two locations in the Embedded Web Server. Deleting

folders from either location deletes them from the device.

Deleting Folders from the Properties Tab

To delete folders from the Properties tab:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Scan to Mailbox→Folders.

3. To delete a folder, select the folder, then click Delete Folder.

Deleting Folders from the Scan Tab

To delete folders from the Scan tab:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Scan.

2. For Display, click Mailboxes, then select the folder that you want to delete. If the folder is private,

type the password, then click OK.

3. Click Modify Folder, then click Delete Folder. If the folder is private, in the Old Password field,

type the password again, then click Delete Folder.

MMaannaaggiinngg FFoollddeerr PPaasssswwoorrddss

You can modify folder passwords from two locations in the Embedded Web Server. Modifying

passwords from either location changes them on the device.

Modifying Folder Passwords from the Properties Tab

To modify folder passwords from the Properties tab:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Scan to Mailbox→Folders.

3. For Created Folder Operations, select the folder from the list.

4. For Change Folder Password, type a new password.

5. For Confirm Folder Password, retype the password, then click Save Password.

Modifying Folder Passwords from the Scan Tab

To modify folder passwords from the Scan tab:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Scan.

2. Select Mailboxes, then select the folder you want to modify.

3. Click Modify Folder.

4. Type the old password.

5. For Change Folder Password, type a new password.

6. For Confirm Folder Password, retype the password, then click Save Password.

198

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Scanning

MMoonniittoorriinngg CCaappaacciittyy

Capacity is the total space available for all mailboxes.

Note: If the available space is less than 100 MB or the current percentage used is above 99%,

your system requires cleanup to remove old, unneeded mailboxes and files.

To view the current capacity usage:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Scan to Mailbox→Capacity.

• Capacity: The total amount of space available on the device for scanned images.

• Used: The space currently used to hold scanned images.

• Available: The space left for scanned images.

• Percentage Used: The amount of space used by scanned images as a percentage of the total

space.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

199

Scanning

Scan to USB

You can insert a USB Flash Drive into the printer, scan a document, and store the scanned file on the

USB drive.

Before you begin:

Enable USB ports. For details, refer to USB Port Security.

EEnnaabblliinngg SSccaann ttoo UUSSBB

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Scan to USB→General.

3. For Enablement, select Enabled.

4. To save the new settings, click Save. To retain the previous settings, click Undo.

200

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Scanning

Scanning to a User Home Folder

You can use the Scan to Home feature to scan to the home folder, as defined in your LDAP directory,

or to a shared network folder.

Before you begin, configure authentication. For details, refer to Configuring Authentication Settings.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Scan to Home→General.

3. In the Setup area, configure the following items:

a. For Status, click Enabled.

b. Type a Friendly Name. The Friendly Name is the default description of the workflow that

appears when you select the workflow from the list at the control panel.

c. Type a Workflow Name. The Workflow Name is the name of the workflow that appears in the

list of workflows at the control panel. If you leave this field blank, the workflow name

defaults to @S2HOME.

4. In the File Path area, configure the following items:

a. For Home Directory, select an option:

• To scan to the home folder defined in an LDAP directory, select LDAP Query.

• To scan to a shared network folder, select No LDAP Query, then type the complete

network path of the external server. For example, type \\servername\foldername.

b. If you created a subdirectory, specify your existing directory structure. For Sub-Directory,

configure the following:

• To create a subdirectory in the network home path, for Subdirectory, type a network path.

For example, to scan to \\servername\foldername\subdirectoryfoldername, type

\subdirectoryfoldername.

• To store scanned images in folders that are named according to each user on your

network home path, select Append User Name to Path. An example path is \\servername

\foldername\username. The user name is the name used when logging in at the control

panel.

• To create individual folders for each user, select Automatically Create User Name

directory if one does not exist.

5. If network authentication is configured to use a Kerberos server, and you want to modify the

Kerberos settings, click the link Prefer Filing with Kerberos Ticket. Kerberos Tickets let you use

the SMB protocol without selecting login credentials.

6. For Login Credentials to Access the Destination, select an option:

• Authenticated User and Domain: This option instructs the device to use the user name and

domain of the logged-in user when accessing the repository.

• Logged-in User: This option instructs the device to log in to the repository using the

credentials of the logged-in user.

• Prompt at User Interface: This option instructs the device to prompt users at the control

panel for the repository credentials.

• Device: This option instructs the device to use specific credentials when accessing the

repository. If you select Device, type the credentials in the Login Name and Password fields.

To update an existing password, select Select to save new password.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

201

Scanning

7. To save a copy of the job log in the scan repository, for Save Job Log (.XST) in Repository, select

Enable.

8. Click Apply.

202

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Scanning

Configuring Scan To

The Scan To feature allows you to associate scan destinations with address book contacts. Users can

select the contacts when scanning using the Scan To feature.

Users can select multiple scan destinations in a single scan job. Scan destinations include the

following locations:

• An email destination associated with an address book contact. Users can select contacts from the

Device Address Book or the Network Address Book.

• An FTP, SFTP, or SMB folder location associated with a contact in the Device Address Book.

• A USB Flash drive.

• An SMB shared folder. Users can specify a network folder path or browse to a shared folder.

Note: For instructions on using this feature, refer to the User Guide for your device.

BBeeffoorree YYoouu BBeeggiinn

• For scanning to destinations associated with address book contacts:

– Add at least one contact to the Device Address Book.

– Add scan destinations to address book contacts.

For details, refer to Address Books.

• For scanning to an email address, refer to Scanning to an Email Address.

• For scanning to a USB Flash drive, refer to Scan to USB.

• For scanning to an SMB shared folder, refer to SMB.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg DDeeffaauulltt SSccaann SSeettttiinnggss

Use the Scan To Setup page in the Embedded Web Server to configure default scan settings. For the

Required Settings and General tabs, Scan To shares settings with the Email App. The settings on the

Defaults tab apply to the Scan To App only.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Scan To→Setup.

3. Click the Required Settings tab. Edit settings as needed. For details, refer to Configuring Required

Settings

4. Click the General tab. Edit settings as needed. For details, refer to Configuring General Email

Settings

5. Click the Defaults tab. Edit settings as needed. For details, refer to the Help in the Embedded

Web Server.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

203

Scanning

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg DDeeffaauulltt SSccaann SSeettttiinnggss ffoorr AAddddrreessss BBooookkss

For address book settings and policies, Scan To shares configuration settings with the Email App.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Scan To→Setup.

3. Click the Address Books tab.

4. To configure the Address Book settings stored in the device, for Device Address Book, click Edit.

5. To use a Network Address book, configure LDAP server settings, for Network Address Book, click

Edit.

6. If you configured Device Address Book settings, for Use Device Address Book, select an option.

• To allow users to access the address book, select Yes. To show Favorites as the initial view

upon entering the address book, select View Favorites on App Entry.

• To restrict users from accessing the address book, select No.

7. If you configured Network Address Book settings, for Use Network Address Book, select an option.

• To allow users to access this address book, select Yes.

• To restrict users from accessing the address book, select No.

8. To reset the device to factory settings, click Apply Factory Settings.

9. Click Apply.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg DDeeffaauulltt SSccaann SSeettttiinnggss ffoorr SSeeccuurriittyy

For security settings and policies, the Scan To feature shares some configuration settings with the

Email App.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Scan To→Setup.

3. Click the Security tab.

4. To configure security settings, for Scan To Destination, click Edit.

5. To edit encryption and signing settings, for Encryption / Signing, click Edit. For details, refer to

Configuring Email Encryption Settings and Configuring Email Signing Settings.

6. To edit domain filter and email filter settings, for Network Policies, click Edit. For details, refer to

Editing Domain and Email Filter Settings.

7. To edit user security policies, for User Policies, click Edit. For details, refer to Editing User Policy

Settings.

8. To allow walk-up users to view all available SMB Share Locations, in the SMB Browsing

Enablement area, for Browse to SMB share locations, select Enabled.

9. To allow scanning to FTP and SFTP directories, for FTP / SFTP Enablement, select the check boxes

for each feature that you want to enable.

• For Allow scanning to FTP directories, click Enabled.

• For Allow scanning to SFTP directories, click Enabled.

10. Click Save.

204

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Scanning

Configuring the Printer for the Xerox

Scan

Utility

The Xerox

Scan Utility allows you to scan directly to your computer and helps you manage and

distribute scanned image files. Before you can scan, create a workflow in the utility. The workflow is

saved on the device. The Xerox

Scan Utility installs when you install scan drivers.

Note:

• Before scanning using the Xerox

Scan Utility, ensure that Secure HTTP (SSL) is enabled

and a certificate is installed on the device.

• Ensure that SMB is enabled on your computer. SMB is not enabled by default on

Macintosh

computers.

• You cannot delete workflows created in the Xerox

Scan Utility from the device control

panel or from the Embedded Web Server. Workflows must be deleted in the Xerox

Scan

Utility by the user who created them.

• The Xerox

Scan Utility is available for Macintosh

computers only.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

205

Scanning

206

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Scanning

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

207

Faxing

This chapter contains:

• Fax Overview............................................................................................................................ 208

• Fax........................................................................................................................................... 209

• Internet Fax ............................................................................................................................. 222

• LAN Fax ................................................................................................................................... 225

Fax Overview

You can send a fax in one of four ways:

• Fax, or embedded fax, scans the document and sends it directly to a fax machine.

• Server Fax scans the document and sends it to a fax server, which transmits the document to a

fax machine.

• Internet Fax scans the document and emails it to a recipient.

• LAN Fax sends the current print job as a fax. For details, see the print driver software.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all printers. Some options apply only to a specific

printer model, configuration, operating system, or print driver type. For details, contact your

Xerox representative.

208

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Faxing

Fax

When you send a fax from the printer control panel, the document is scanned and transmitted to a

fax machine using a dedicated telephone line. To use the embedded fax feature, ensure that your

printer has access to a functioning telephone line with a telephone number assigned to it.

Note:

• Not all printer models can send faxes. Some printers require an optional fax hardware kit.

• Not all printer models have multiple fax lines.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg RReeqquuiirreedd FFaaxx SSeettttiinnggss aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll

PPaanneell

Before you can send a fax at the control panel:

• Set the fax country.

• Configure the embedded fax settings.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee FFaaxx CCoouunnttrryy aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Fax App→Fax Country Setting.

3. Select your country from the list.

4. Touch OK.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg EEmmbbeeddddeedd FFaaxx SSeettttiinnggss

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Fax App.

3. Touch Line 1 Setup or Line 2 Setup.

4. Touch Fax Number, use the touch screen keypad to type the fax number, then touch OK.

5. Touch Line Name, use the touch screen keypad to type a Line Name for the printer, then touch

OK.

6. For Options, select fax send and receive options.

7. If allowed, for Dial Type, select your dialing method. If you have a tone line, select Tone. If you

have a 10-pulse-per-second line, select Pulse. If in doubt, touch Tone.

8. Touch OK.

Note:

• At least one fax line must be configured.

• Most countries use tone dialing.

• The Pulse/Tone feature is not available in some countries.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

209

Faxing

FFaaxx SSeeccuurriittyy

When the Fax Secure Receive feature is enabled, users must type a fax passcode to release a fax. Fax

passcodes are also used to secure fax mailboxes. You can specify the required fax passcode length.

Note:

• Existing passcodes are not changed.

• If you edit an existing passcode after changing the passcode length requirement, the new

password must meet the current length requirement.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg FFaaxx PPaassssccooddee LLeennggtthh

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Fax→Setup→Security.

2. To configure fax passcode options, for Fax Passcode Length, click Edit.

3. To set the passcode length, use the Plus (+) and Minus (-) buttons.

4. Click Save.

Configuring Fax Passcode Length at the Control Panel

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Fax App.

3. Touch Fax Passcode Length.

4. To set the passcode length, touch the arrows.

5. Touch OK.

SSeettttiinngg FFaaxx DDeeffaauullttss

SSeettttiinngg RRiinngg VVoolluummee

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Fax App→Fax Volume.

3. For Incoming Ring Volume, touch the desired selection.

4. For Outgoing Ring Volume, touch the desired selection.

5. Touch OK.

SSeettttiinngg IInnccoommiinngg FFaaxx DDeeffaauullttss

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Fax App.

3. To open the Incoming Fax Defaults window, touch Incoming Fax Defaults.

210

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Faxing

Enabling Auto Answer Delay

1. On the Incoming Fax Defaults window, touch Automatic Answer Delay.

2. To set the answer delay, touch the arrows.

3. Touch OK.

Selecting Default Paper Settings

1. On the Incoming Fax Defaults window, touch Paper Settings.

2. To direct the printer to print faxes on the paper size that most closely matches the attributes of

the incoming fax, touch Automatic. If the exact paper size is not available, the printer prints to

the next best match and scales the fax to fit if needed.

3. To specify exact paper attributes for incoming faxes, touch Manual. If the specified paper size is

not available, incoming faxes are held until resources are available.

4. Touch OK.

Enabling or Disabling the Secure Fax Feature

To secure fax transmissions, enable the Secure Fax feature.

When Secure Fax is enabled, a password is required before you can print or delete a fax.

1. On the Incoming Fax Defaults screen, touch Secure Receive Settings.

2. To enable the Secure Receive feature, touch Passcode Protect.

Note: To engage or disengage the Secure Fax Receive option, use the system administrator

password.

3. To change the passcode, use the touch screen keypad to type the new passcode.

4. To allow guest users to enable or disable the Secure Fax feature, for Permission Policy, touch

Allow User to Manage.

Note: Guest users cannot change the passcode.

5. Touch OK.

Setting Default Output Options at the Control Panel

1. On the Incoming Fax Defaults screen, touch Default Output Options.

2. To staple documents, for staple, touch Enable.

3. To punch holes in documents, for Hole Punch, touch Enable.

4. To set faxes to print on both sides of the page, for 2-Sided, touch Enable.

5. Touch OK.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all printers. Some options apply only to a

specific printer model, configuration, operating system, or print driver type. Some options

are available only if a finisher is installed.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

211

Faxing

Disabling Advanced Capabilities

If your printer is not communicating successfully with older fax machines, disable the advanced

document transmission speed and resolution capabilities.

1. On the Incoming Fax Defaults screen, touch Advanced Capabilities.

2. Touch Disable.

3. Touch OK.

SSeettttiinngg OOuuttggooiinngg FFaaxx DDeeffaauullttss

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Fax App.

3. Touch Outgoing Fax Defaults.

Setting Automatic Redial

1. On the Outgoing Fax Defaults screen, touch Automatic Redial Setup.

2. Use the arrows to set:

• Redial Time Interval: This option sets the time interval before the fax system redials after a

failed transmission. The range is 1–25 minutes.

• Automatic Redial Attempts: This option sets the number of attempts the fax system makes

before it rejects the job. The range is 0–14.

3. Touch OK.

Send Header Text

1. On the Outgoing Fax Defaults screen, touch Send Header Text.

2. To type up to 30 characters of text to include in the header for the fax, use the touch-screen

keyboard.

3. Touch OK.

Automatic Resend

1. On the Outgoing Fax Defaults screen, touch Automatic Resend.

2. To set the number of resend attempts the printer makes, for Set Number of Resends, touch the

arrows, then select a number between 0–5.

3. From the list of options, select the condition that prompts the printer to resend jobs

automatically.

4. Touch OK.

Batch Send

The Batch Send feature allows you to send multiple fax jobs to a single destination during a single fax

transmission session. This feature reduces the connection time and cost of call connection that occurs

when the faxes are sent independently.

1. On the Outgoing Fax Defaults screen, touch Batch Send.

2. To enable Batch Send, touch Enabled.

3. Touch OK.

212

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Faxing

SSeettttiinngg FFaaxx FFeeaattuurree DDeeffaauullttss

The printer uses the default fax feature settings on all embedded fax jobs unless you change them for

an individual job. You can modify the default fax feature settings.

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Fax App.

3. Touch Feature Defaults.

4. Edit settings for size, resolution, image quality, layout, fax options, and job assembly, as needed.

5. Touch Done.

FFaaxx FFoorrwwaarrddiinngg

You can configure the printer to forward incoming faxes to email or file destinations by creating a Fax

Forward Rule. For different situations, you can configure up to five rules, and apply them to the

available fax lines.

Note: After you configure the fax forwarding rule, apply the rule to a fax line.

EEddiittiinngg aa FFaaxx FFoorrwwaarrddiinngg RRuullee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Fax→Setup→Forwarding.

2. For the desired rule, click Edit.

3. To base the new rule on an existing rule, for Based on Rule, from the list, select a rule.

4. For Rule Name, type a name for the rule.

5. For File Format Type, from the list, select an option.

6. For Print Local Copy, select an option:

• To print all incoming faxes, select Always.

• To print a copy only if the forwarded fax transmission fails, select On Error Only.

7. Add an email address or file destination to the rule.

8. Click Save.

Adding Email Addresses to the Rule

1. On the Forwarding page, next to the desired rule, click Edit.

2. To forward to an email address, select Email.

3. In the Address fields, type the email addresses of the recipients.

4. Type the From Address, From Name, and Subject.

5. To customize the name of the attachment, click Customize.

a. Under Display, select the check boxes next to Date or Time to add the date or time to the file

name.

b. To customize the file name, type the new name in Custom Text, then click Add.

c. Under Position, select an item, and click the arrows to arrange the items as you want them to

appear in the file name.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

213

Faxing

d. Click Save.

6. Type the Message text for the body of the email.

7. Type the Signature text for the email message.

8. Click Save.

Adding File Destinations to the Rule

1. On the Forwarding page, next to the desired rule, click Edit.

2. To forward to a file location, select SMB Protocol.

3. Select IPv4 Address or Host Name, then type the address or host name.

4. Type the following information:

a. In the Share field, type the share name.

b. In the Document Path field, type the directory path of the folder.

c. Type a Login Name for the printer to use to access the shared folder.

d. Enter the computer login password for the printer to use to access the shared folder, then

confirm it.

5. To update an existing password, type the new password, then click Select.

6. To customize the name of the file, click Customize.

a. Under Display, select the check boxes next to Date or Time to add the date or time to the file

name.

b. To customize the file name, type the new name in Custom Text, then click Add.

c. Under Position, select an item, and click the arrows to arrange the items as you want them to

appear in the file name.

7. To receive email notifications of forwarded faxes, select Email Notification, then enter your email

address.

8. To send an email confirmation when file transfer is complete, select Email Notification (without

Attachment), and type the email address in the Notification Address field.

9. Click Save.

AAppppllyyiinngg aa FFaaxx FFoorrwwaarrddiinngg RRuullee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Fax→Setup→Forwarding.

2. For the desired rule, click Edit.

3. To apply a rule, select Apply to Fax Line 1 or Apply to Fax Line 2.

4. Click Apply.

DDiissaabblliinngg FFaaxx FFoorrwwaarrddiinngg

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Fax→Setup→Forwarding.

2. To disable fax forwarding for a line, for No Fax Forwarding, select Apply to Fax Line 1 or Apply to

Fax Line 2.

3. Click Apply.

214

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Faxing

FFaaxx MMaaiillbbooxxeess

You can store faxes locally in the printer or on a remote fax machine. You can use Remote Polling to

print or access a stored fax. There are 200 available fax mailboxes.

EEddiittiinngg aa FFaaxx MMaaiillbbooxx

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Fax App.

3. Touch Mailbox Setup.

4. From the list, touch a mailbox.

• To edit a mailbox name, touch Friendly Name. Use the touch screen keypad to type a name

for the mailbox up to 30 characters, then touch OK.

• To assign a passcode to the mailbox, touch Passcode & Notification, then touch Passcode

Protect. To type a 4-digit passcode, use the numeric keypad, then touch OK.

Note: The passcode is required when users store faxes to the mailbox or print faxes

from the mailbox.

• To notify users of mailbox status changes, touch Passcode & Notification, then for Mailbox

Notification, touch Enabled.

• To reset and delete mailbox contents, touch Reset Mailbox & Cont, then touch Reset.

• To print mailbox content, touch Print Mailbox List.

5. Touch Close.

DDeelleettiinngg aa FFaaxx MMaaiillbbooxx

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Fax App.

3. Touch Mailbox Setup.

4. Touch the assigned mailbox that you want to delete, then touch Reset Mailbox & Contents.

Caution: If you touch Reset Mailbox, the mailbox and all documents that it contains are

deleted permanently.

5. At the Delete Mailbox confirmation prompt, to delete the mailbox, touch Reset, or to exit, touch

Cancel.

6. Touch Close.

FFaaxx RReeppoorrttss

You can configure three different reports:

• Activity Report

• Confirmation Report

• Broadcast and Multipoll Report

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

215

Faxing

SSeettttiinngg UUpp FFaaxx RReeppoorrttss

You can set up Fax Reports at the control panel touch screen. You can configure the reports that the

device can generate, and configure the default report that the device produces.

Setting Up the Generated Fax Reports

To set up the fax reports that the device can generate:

1. At the control panel touch screen, log in as administrator.

2. Touch Device, then touch Tools.

3. Touch App Settings→Fax App.

4. Touch Setup Fax Reports.

5. Touch Fax Activity Report, then touch an option:

• To print an activity report that shows all fax transactions, select Auto Print.

• To disable printing activity reports, select Off.

6. Touch OK.

7. Touch Confirmation Report. For Report Options, touch an option:

• To allow users to print a confirmation report when a fax transmission error occurs, select Print

On Error. If you select Print On Error, users can choose Print Confirmation Report, or Print on

Error Only in the Fax App.

• To allow users to disable printing a confirmation report, select Off. If you select Off, users can

choose Print Confirmation Report, or Off in the Fax App.

8. For Print Options, touch a thumbnail printing option:

• To print a smaller thumbnail image of the first page of the fax on the confirmation report,

select Reduced Image.

• To print a larger thumbnail image of the first page of the fax on the confirmation report,

select Cropped Image.

• To disable printing thumbnail images of the first page of the fax on the confirmation report,

select No Image.

9. Touch OK.

10. Touch Broadcast and Multipoll Report, then touch an option:

• To print a confirmation report only when a fax transmission error occurs, select Print On Error.

• To print a confirmation report every time a user sends a fax, select Always Print.

• To disable printing confirmation reports when a user sends a fax, select Off.

11. Touch OK.

12. Touch Close.

Setting the Default Fax Confirmation Report

To set up the default fax report that is generated when a user sends a fax:

1. At the control panel touch screen, log in as administrator.

2. Touch Fax App. If needed, close the Fax pop-up window.

3. Touch Show Additional Features.

4. Touch Confirmation Report.

216

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Faxing

5. Select an option:

• Touch Print Confirmation, or touch Print on Error Only.

• Touch Print Confirmation, or touch Off.

The options that are available depend on the reports that you set up. For details, refer to Setting

Up the Generated Fax Reports.

6. Touch Customize.

7. Touch Save Setting as Default.

8. Touch Save.

PPrriinnttiinngg aa FFaaxx RReeppoorrtt

You can print the following fax reports from the printer control panel:

• Activity Report

• Protocol Report

• Fax Address Book Report

• Options Report

• Pending Jobs Report

To print a fax report:

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Fax App.

3. Touch Print Fax Reports.

4. Touch the desired report, then touch Print.

5. Touch Close.

DDeelleettiinngg SSeenntt FFaaxx JJoobbss ffrroomm MMeemmoorryy

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Jobs.

2. Touch the Down arrow, then touch Scan and Fax Sent Jobs.

3. Touch the pending fax in the list.

4. Touch Delete.

SSeerrvveerr FFaaxx

Server fax allows you to send a fax over a network to a fax server. The fax server then sends the fax to

a fax machine over a phone line.

Before you can send a server fax, configure a fax filing repository, or filing location. The fax server

retrieves the documents from the filing location and transmits them over the telephone network. You

can also print a transmission report.

Note: Not all printer models support this feature.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

217

Faxing

Configuring a Server Fax Filing Repository

Before you can send a server fax, configure fax repository settings. Once configured, the printer

transfers faxed images to the repository. The fax server then sends the fax to its destination over the

phone line.

You can set up a repository that uses one of the following protocols:

• FTP

• SFTP

• SMB

• HTTP/HTTPS: A Web server using a CGI script.

• SMTP: A mail server.

• NetWare

Configuring a Fax Repository Using FTP or SFTP

Before you begin:

• Ensure that FTP or SFTP services are running on the server or computer where images faxed by the

printer are stored. Note the IP address or host name.

• Create a user account and password for the printer. When the server fax feature is used, the

printer logs in using the account, transfers the file to the server or computer and logs out. Note

the user account and password.

• Create a directory within the FTP or SFTP root to be used as a fax repository. Note the directory

path.

To configure a fax repository using FTP or SFTP:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Server Fax→Fax Repository Setup.

3. Select the address type. Options for FTP include IPv4, IPv6, or Host Name. Options for SFTP

include IPv4, or Host Name.

4. In the Repository Server field, type the appropriately formatted address and port number for the

FTP or SFTP location.

5. In the Document Path field, type the directory path of the folder, beginning at the root of FTP or

SFTP services. For example, //directoryname/foldername.

6. Under Login Credentials to Access the Destination, select an option.

• Authenticated User and Domain: This option instructs the device to use the user name and

domain of the logged-in user when it accesses the repository.

• Logged-in User: This option instructs the device to log in to the repository using the

credentials of the logged-in user.

• Device: This option instructs the device to use specific credentials when accessing the

repository. If you select Device, type the credentials in the User Name and Password fields. To

update an existing password, select Select to save new password.

7. Click Apply.

218

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Faxing

Configuring a Fax Repository Using SMB

Before you begin:

• Create a shared folder to be used as a fax repository. Note the share name of the folder and the

computer name or server name.

• Create a user account and password for the printer with full access rights to the fax repository.

Note the user account and password.

To configure a fax repository using SMB:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Server Fax→Fax Repository Setup.

3. From the Protocol menu, select SMB.

4. Select the address type. Options are IPv4 or Host Name.

5. Type the appropriately formatted address in the Repository Server field for the server where the

file repository is located.

6. In the Share field, type the share name.

7. In the Document Path field, type the directory path of the folder starting at the root of the

shared folder. For example, if you have a folder named scans in the shared folder, type \scans.

8. Under Login Credentials to Access the Destination, select an option.

• Authenticated User and Domain: This option instructs the device to use the user name and

domain of the logged-in user when it accesses the repository.

• Logged-in User: This option instructs the device to log in to the repository using the

credentials of the logged-in user.

• System: This option instructs the device to use specific credentials when accessing the

repository. If you select System, type the credentials in the User Name and Password fields. To

update an existing password, select Select to save new password.

9. Click Apply.

Configuring a Fax Repository Using HTTP/HTTPS

Before you begin:

• Ensure that Web services are installed on the server where you want to store scanned images.

Examples of Web servers include Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) and Apache. Note

the IP address or host name of the server.

• For HTTPS, ensure that your Web server is installed with a secure certificate.

• Create a user account and password for the printer. When a document is scanned, the printer logs

in using the account, transfers the file to the server or workstation and logs out. Note the user

account and password details.

• Create a directory on the HTTP/HTTPS server to use as a scan filing location. Note the directory

path.

• Note any script that is required to be run.

To configure a fax repository using HTTP/HTTPS:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Server Fax→Fax Repository Setup.

3. From the Protocol menu, select HTTP or HTTPS.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

219

Faxing

4. Select the address type. Options are IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, or Host Name.

5. Type the appropriately formatted address and port number of your server.

6. To verify that a digital certificate is installed on the printer, for HTTPS, click View Trusted SSL

Certificates.

7. To validate the SSL certificate used for HTTPS, select Validate Repository SSL Certificate.

8. In the Script path and filename field, type the path to the CGI script starting at the root. For

example, //directoryname/foldername.

9. In the Document Path field, type the directory path of the folder.

10. Under Login Credentials to Access the Destination, select an option.

• Authenticated User and Domain: This option instructs the device to use the user name and

domain of the logged-in user when it accesses the repository.

• Logged-in User: This option instructs the device to log in to the repository using the

credentials of the logged-in user.

• System: This option instructs the device to use specific credentials when it accesses the

repository. If you select System, type the credentials in the User Name and Password fields. To

update an existing password, select Select to save new password.

• None: This option instructs the device to access the repository without providing credentials.

11. Click Apply.

Configuring a Fax Repository Using SMTP

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Server Fax→Fax Repository Setup.

3. For Protocol, select SMTP.

4. In the Domain Name field, type the domain name of your SMTP server.

5. In the Default "From:" Address field, type the address you want to display automatically on the

fax.

6. For Enable Email Security, select Enable.

7. To save the settings, click Apply. To retain the previous settings, click Undo.

Configuring Server Fax General Settings

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Server Fax→Defaults and Policies.

3. For General, click Edit.

4. For Save Job Log in Repository, select the options to include on the Job Log. The device adds the

selected fields to the job log saved on the server.

5. For Confirmation Sheet, select an option.

220

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Faxing

• Errors Only: This option instructs the device to print a confirmation sheet only when a

transmission error occurs. The confirmation sheet lists error information and indicates that the

job has reached the SMTP server. The confirmation sheet does not indicate that the email

message was delivered.

• On: This option instructs the device to print a confirmation sheet after every server fax job.

The confirmation sheet specifies the success or failure of the server fax job. If the fax is

successful, the location of the document on the fax server is also specified.

• Off: This option instructs the device not to print a confirmation sheet.

6. Click Save.

Configuring Server Fax Settings

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Server Fax→Defaults and Policies.

3. For Server Fax, click Edit.

4. Select options as needed.

5. Click Save.

Configuring Server Fax Image-Quality Settings

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Server Fax→Defaults and Policies.

3. For Image Quality, click Edit.

4. Select options as needed.

5. Click Save.

Configuring Layout Adjustment Settings

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Server Fax→Defaults and Policies.

3. For Layout Adjustment, click Edit.

4. Select options as needed.

5. Click Save.

Configuring Server Fax Filing Options

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Server Fax→Defaults and Policies.

3. For Filing Options, click Edit.

4. Select options as needed.

5. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

221

Faxing

Internet Fax

Internet fax allows you to scan documents at the control panel, send them to destination email

addresses, or receive and print emails with attachments. You can also print a transmission report. A

telephone line connection is not required.

AAcccceessssiinngg tthhee IInntteerrnneett FFaaxx SSeettuupp PPaaggee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Internet Fax→Setup.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg RReeqquuiirreedd SSeettttiinnggss

1. On the Internet Fax Setup page, click the Required Settings tab.

2. To configure SMTP settings, next to SMTP, click Edit. For details, refer to SMTP Server.

3. To configure POP3 settings, next to POP3, click Edit. For details, refer to POP3.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg GGeenneerraall IInntteerrnneett FFaaxx SSeettttiinnggss

1. On the Internet Fax Setup page, click the General tab.

2. To print a report after all recipients receive the fax, next to acknowledgment report, select Print

Report.

Note: The report can be delayed depending on the response time of the recipient.

3. To print an activity report after 50 jobs have been processed, next to Activity Report, select

Enable. An activity report lists Internet fax jobs and the current delivery status of each job. To

print an activity report, click Print Activity Report.

4. To set the time that the printer waits for a delivery confirmation from recipients, type the time in

hours next to Delivery Confirmation Timeout.

5. For Subject, type the text that you want to appear in the subject line of emails sent from the

printer.

6. Next to Message body, type the text that you want to appear in the body of emails.

7. To include the user name or email address in the body of emails, under User, select User Name or

Email Address.

8. To include attachment information in the message body, select Number of Images, or

Attachment File Type.

9. To include information about the printer in the body, under Multifunction Device System, select

the information that you want to include.

10. Next to Signature, type the information that appears at the end of the email message.

11. Next to Confirmation Sheet, select an option:

222

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Faxing

• Errors Only instructs the printer to print a confirmation sheet only when a transmission error

occurs. The confirmation sheet lists error information and indicates that the job has reached

the SMTP server. The confirmation sheet does not indicate that the email message was

delivered.

• On instructs the printer to print a confirmation sheet.

• Off instructs the printer not to print a confirmation sheet. You can find status about a job in

the job log. To see the job log, at the control panel, press Job Status→Completed Jobs.

12. Click Apply.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg IInntteerrnneett FFaaxx RReecceeiivvee SSeettttiinnggss

1. On the Internet Fax Setup page, click the Receive Settings tab.

2. To print email messages without attachments, on the Receive Settings Tab, under Filter Options,

select Accept Email with no attachment.

3. Under Accept the following attachments, select what types of attachments can be received.

4. Under Finishing Options, click the drop-down menu and select the desired settings for Stapling

and 2-Sided Printing.

5. To send a Mail Delivery Notification (MDN) email to the requester when the fax job completes,

under Receipt Options, select Send confirmation reply when requested.

6. To print a cover sheet containing the email message of the requester before printing the fax job,

select Print cover sheet with incoming Email messages.

7. Click Apply.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg AAddddrreessss BBooookk SSeettttiinnggss

1. On the Internet Fax Setup page, click the Address Books tab.

2. To configure the Address Book settings stored in the printer, on the Address Books tab, next to

Device Address Book, under Action, click Edit.

3. To use a Network Address book, configure LDAP server settings. Next to Network Address Book

(LDAP), under Action, click Edit.

4. If you configured Address Book settings stored in the printer, under Policies, Use Device Address

Book, to allow users to access the book, select Yes. To restrict users from accessing the address

book, select No.

5. If you configured a Network Address Book, under Policies, under Use Network Address Book

(LDAP) to allow users to access this address book, select Yes. To restrict users from accessing the

address book, select No.

6. To set the default address book that users see at the control panel, under Default Address Book

View, select an address book.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

223

Faxing

7. To allow users to create or edit contacts in the Device Address Book from the printer control

panel, select All Users.

8. Click Apply.

Note: If the Network Address Book does not appear, on the LDAP Server configuration

page, ensure that Internet fax is not set to No Mappings Available. This setting prevents

the Network Address Book from displaying on the Internet fax page. If your LDAP server

does not contain a unique Internet fax address field, it can be set to match the heading for

email address.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg DDeeffaauulltt IInntteerrnneett FFaaxx SSeettttiinnggss

1. On the Internet Fax Setup page, click the Defaults tab.

2. To edit default Internet fax settings, for Internet Fax, click Edit.

3. To edit default Image Options, Image Enhancement, Resolution, and Quality/File Size settings, for

Advanced Settings, click Edit.

4. To edit default Original Orientation, and Original Size settings, for Layout Adjustment, click Edit.

5. To edit default File Format and Filename Extension settings, for Internet Fax Options, click Edit.

Note: For details, refer to the Help in the Embedded Web Server.

SSeettttiinngg FFiillee CCoommpprreessssiioonn OOppttiioonnss

1. On the Internet Fax Setup page, click the Compression tab.

2. Select TIFF and PDF settings as needed. For details, refer to the Help in the Embedded Web

Server.

3. Click Save.

EEddiittiinngg IInntteerrnneett FFaaxx NNeettwwoorrkk PPoolliicciieess

1. On the Internet Fax Setup page, click the Security tab.

2. To set the user policies for Internet fax, next to Access Control for Internet Fax Service, click Edit.

3. To set domain filter and email filter settings, under Network Policies, click Edit.

4. To enable a domain filter list, under Domain Filter settings, select Allow Domains or Block

Domains.

5. Under New Domain, type the domain you want to add to the list and click Add.

6. To remove a domain from the list, select a domain, and click Remove.

7. To allow LDAP email address searches without the @ symbol, under Allow LDAP Email Address

without the @ Requirement, select On.

Note: If you select On under Allow LDAP Email Address without the @ Requirement, the

number of items returned by an LDAP search can increase.

224

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Faxing

LAN Fax

Local Area Network (LAN) Fax allows you to send faxes using the print driver on your computer to a

fax machine over a telephone line.

For details about using or configuring LAN Fax, see the print driver software help.

Note: Not all printer models support this feature. Some printers require an optional fax

hardware kit.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

225

Faxing

226

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Faxing

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

227

Accounting

This chapter contains:

• Xerox

Standard Accounting.................................................................................................... 228

• Network Accounting................................................................................................................. 236

• Accounting Using an Auxiliary Access Device ........................................................................... 240

• Enabling Accounting in Print Drivers......................................................................................... 243

• Printing a Copy Activity Report................................................................................................. 244

Xerox

Standard Accounting

Xerox

Standard Accounting tracks the numbers of copy, print, scan, and fax jobs for each user. You

can set limits to restrict the total number of jobs by type that a user can produce. You can generate

reports that list usage data for individual users and groups. When Xerox

Standard Accounting is

enabled, users are required to enter an accounting code to access the apps. Before users can print

documents from their computer, they must enter an accounting code in the print driver.

Note:

• You can create a maximum of 2497 unique user IDs, 500 General Accounts, and 498 Group

Accounts.

• All user IDs must be assigned to one or more group accounts.

• Xerox

Standard Accounting settings and account data are stored in the printer.

• Xerox recommends that you use the Cloning feature to back up settings. If Xerox

Standard

Accounting settings are lost or deleted, you can restore them using the cloning backup file.

EEnnaabblliinngg XXeerrooxx SSttaannddaarrdd AAccccoouunnttiinngg

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting→Accounting

Methods.

2. For Control Panel & Website Login Methods, click Edit.

3. For Current Accounting Method, select Xerox Standard Accounting.

4. Click Save.

SSeettttiinngg SSeerrvviiccee TTrraacckkiinngg OOppttiioonnss

1. On the Accounting page, in the Action section, for Service Tracking, click Edit.

2. For Presets, select an option:

• Disable tracking for all services:This option instructs the device not to track Copies, Prints,

Scans, and Faxes.

• Enable tracking for all services: This option instructs the device to track Copies, Prints, Scans,

and Faxes.

• Enable color tracking only: This option instructs the device to track color Copies and Prints.

• Custom: This option allows you to enable tracking for specific apps. If you select Custom,

select Enabled or Color Tracking Only. for the apps you want to track.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a

specific device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

3. Click Save.

GGeenneerraall aanndd GGrroouupp AAccccoouunnttss

You can create a group account to track and limit the number of copies, prints, scans, and faxes for a

group of users. The number of copies, prints, scans, and faxes of each user are tracked against the

user account and the group account. You can limit the usage for each user.

You can create a general account to track the total usage for a group of users. The number of copies,

228

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Accounting

prints, scans, and faxes of each user are not tracked against the user account. The usage is tracked

against the general account only. You cannot specify usage limits for a general account.

If a user is associated with a group account and a general account, they can access the printer using

the accounting code for either account. Individual copies, prints, scans, and faxes, are tracked against

the user and group accounts if the user accesses the printer using the group account. If the user

accesses the printer using a general account, the usage is tracked against the general account only

and not the user account.

CCrreeaattiinngg aann AAccccoouunntt

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting→Accounting

Methods.

2. In the Configuration Settings area, for Group & General Accounts, click Edit.

3. Click the Group Accounts tab or the General Accounts tab.

4. For Add New Group Account, type a unique Account ID number. Type a unique Account Name for

the new group.

5. Click Add Account.

EEddiittiinngg,, VViieewwiinngg,, oorr DDeelleettiinngg aann AAccccoouunntt

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting→Accounting

Methods.

2. In the Configuration Settings area, for Group & General Accounts, click Edit.

3. On the Group & General Accounts page, click Group Accounts or General Accounts.

4. To edit the account name, or assign users to an account, under Actions, click Edit.

• To assign users to the account, select the check box next to a user ID.

• To edit the Account Name, under Account Name, type a new name.

• Click Save.

5. To view usage details for an account, under Actions, click View Usage.

6. To delete an account, in the table at the bottom of the page, select the check box next to the

account and click Delete Selected.

AAddddiinngg aa UUsseerr aanndd SSeettttiinngg UUssaaggee LLiimmiittss

Before you can associate users with an accounting group, add or import user information to the user

database. To edit the user database, see Configuring Authentication Settings.

To add a user and set usage limits for the user:

1. On the Accounting Methods page, in the Configuration Settings area, for Users and Limits, click

Edit.

2. Click Add New User.

3. For Display Name, type a name for the user. This name is associated with the user in the user

database.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

229

Accounting

4. For User Name, type a unique user name for the new user. To log in at the control panel, the user

types this name.

5. Set limits for the user in the Usage Limits area:

• Color Impressions, in the User Limits field, type the maximum number of impressions or sent

images allowed for Prints or Copies.

• For Black Impressions, in the User Limits field, type the maximum number of impressions or

sent images allowed for Prints or Copies.

• For Scanned Images, in the User Limits field, type the maximum number of impressions or

sent images allowed for Scans.

• For Fax Images, in the User Limits field, type the maximum number of impressions or sent

images allowed for Sent or Black Faxed Impressions.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a

specific device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

6. Click Apply.

MMaannaaggiinngg UUsseerr IInnffoorrmmaattiioonn

You can import or export user information and accounting data as a .csv file. For details, refer to the

Embedded Web Server help.

IImmppoorrttiinngg UUsseerr IInnffoorrmmaattiioonn

Setting Up File Importing

1. On the Accounting Methods page, for Users & Limits, click Edit.

2. From the Management Actions menu, select Import.

3. For File, click Browse or Choose File, select your .csv file, then click Open or Choose.

4. For Delimiting Character, select an option.

5. For Language, select the language of the text in your .csv file.

6. For When importing your File, select an option:

• Append to existing: This option adds user information from the .csv file to the existing user

information stored in the database.

• Overwrite existing data: This option replaces all user information in the database with user

information from your .csv file.

7. Click Next.

8. Continue to Editing the Fields for Importing.

230

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Accounting

Editing the Fields for Importing

1. In the Required Fields area, for Imported Heading, select the column heading from your .csv file

containing information for User Name and Display Name.

• To build User Name and Display Name from First Name and Last Name, for First Name and

Last Name, select a column heading.

• For User Name and Display Name, select Build from First and Last Name.

2. If you created your .csv file by exporting from a non-Xerox

device, the .csv file format can

contain unwanted characters. To remove unwanted characters from all fields, select Remove

Unwanted Characters.

• For Leading Characters, Body Characters, and Trailing Characters, select an option.

• If you selected Custom String, type the string of characters that you want to remove from

each field.

3. For Limits, select an option:

• Quick Setup for All Users: This option allows you to set a default limit for all services for all

users. For Default for All Services, type the limit.

• Manual Setup for All Users: This option allows you to set the limit for each service and

impression type. For User Limits, type the limit.

• Import Existing Limits from File: This option allows you to import limits from your .csv file.

For Imported heading, for the limit for each service and impression type, select the column

heading from your .csv file.

Note: Limits must be in the range of 0–16,000,000. If you do not assign a limit, the limit is

set to 16,000,000.

4. Continue to Setting Up Account Permissions.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

231

Accounting

Setting Up Account Permissions

1. For Accounts, under Group Accounts, select the default group to which you want to add imported

users:

• Use System Default: This option adds all users to the current system default group.

• Assign New Account: This option allows you to create an account and add all users to the

account. Under Group Account ID, type a unique Account ID number. Type a unique Account

Name for the new group. Select Make this the new system default group account as needed.

• Import Existing Accounts from File: This option allows you to import accounts from your .csv

file. For Imported heading, for the Group Account ID and Group Account Name, select the

column heading from your .csv file.

Note:

• Combine Account ID and Account Name in a single column. Use a colon (:) to separate

Account Name and Account ID. For example, 123:account_A.

• You can associate a user with multiple accounts. Separate the account names using a

number (#) symbol. For example, 111:account_A#222:account_B. The first account is

the default user account. To associate a user with multiple accounts, but use the default

system account, type the # symbol, then type the account names. For example, #222:

account_B.

2. For General Accounts, select an option:

• No General Accounts: This option does not add users to a General Account.

• Import Existing Accounts from File: This option allows you to import accounts from your .csv

file. For Imported heading, for the General Account ID and General Account Name, select the

column heading from your .csv file.

Note:

• Combine Account ID and Account Name in a single column. Use a colon (:) to separate

Account Name and Account ID. For example, 123:account_A.

• You can associate a user with multiple accounts. Separate the account names using a

number (#) symbol. For example, 111:account_A#222:account_B.

3. Click Import.

DDoowwnnllooaaddiinngg aa SSaammppllee FFiillee

You can download a sample file to see how to format your .csv file for import.

1. On the Accounting page, next to Users and Limits, click Edit.

2. From the Management Actions menu, select Download Sample.

3. Under Delimiting Character, select an option.

4. Under Language, select the language of the text in your .csv file.

5. Click Generate.

EExxppoorrttiinngg UUsseerr IInnffoorrmmaattiioonn

1. On the Accounting page, next to Users and Limits, click Edit.

2. From the Management Actions menu, select Export.

232

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Accounting

3. Under Delimiting Character, select an option.

4. Under Language, select the language of the text in your .csv file.

5. Click Export.

AAssssiiggnniinngg UUsseerrss ttoo aann AAccccoouunntt

1. On the Accounting page, next to Users and Limits, click Edit.

2. Select the check box next to the User ID of the user that you want to add to an account.

3. Under Action, click Access, Limits, & Accounts.

4. Click the Group Accounts tab or the General Accounts tab.

5. Select the check box next to the User ID of the user that you want to add to an account.

6. Click Apply.

UUssaaggee LLiimmiittss

When users reach their maximum usage limit, they can no longer use that feature until the

administrator resets their limit. When they log in to the printer, they are presented with a notification

message that indicates that their limit has been reached for that feature.

Any impressions made after users reach their limit are subtracted from their limit after it is reset. If

the user limit is reached before a print job completes, an error report prints that notifies the user that

their limit has been reached. The job is deleted from the print queue, and any sheets remaining in the

paper path finish printing.

Note:

• The maximum number of impressions or images sent is 16,000,000.

• Cover sheets, banner pages, fax acknowledgment reports, and scan confirmation reports

count as impressions.

• Color Impression Prints includes all color print jobs and received server fax documents. Color

Impression Copies includes all color copies.

• Black Impression Prints includes all black and white print jobs and received server fax

documents. Black Impression Copies includes all black and white copies.

• Scanned Images includes documents sent over the network, including network scans, scans

to email, server faxes, and Internet faxes.

• Fax Images Sent includes faxed documents. The total number of documents is the number

of faxed documents, including cover sheets, multiplied by the number of destinations.

Documents sent using the server fax feature are not included.

• Black Fax Impressions includes received fax documents that are printed. Documents sent

using the server fax feature are not included.

• Not all options listed are supported on all printers. Some options apply only to a specific

printer model, configuration, operating system, or print driver type.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

233

Accounting

DDoowwnnllooaaddiinngg aa UUssaaggee RReeppoorrtt

The usage report lists the number of impressions recorded for each user and each account. You can

download a usage report as a .csv file.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login / Permissions / Accounting→Accounting

Methods.

2. Click Report and Reset.

3. On the Usage Report tab, for Show User ID in Report, select an option.

• To include the user ID in the report, select Yes.

• To exclude the user ID from the report, select No.

4. Click Download Report (.csv).

The .csv file is downloaded to the Downloads folder.

5. Click Close.

RReesseettttiinngg UUssaaggee LLiimmiittss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting→Accounting

Methods.

2. Click Report and Reset→Resets.

3. To reset all usage data to zero, click Reset Usage Data.

4. Click OK.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg VVaalliiddaattiioonn PPoolliicciieess aanndd PPrriinntt JJoobb

EExxcceeppttiioonnss

You can set validation policies and configure print job exceptions for unidentified print jobs.

Unidentified jobs are jobs that are not associated with a user name.

Unidentified jobs originate from a computer that does not require a user to log in. Examples are a job

sent from a DOS or UNIX window using LPR, Port 9100, or from the Jobs tab in the Embedded Web

Server. Unidentified print jobs can originate from IPP clients, including mobile clients that support

AirPrint and Mopria.

VVaalliiddaattiinngg AAccccoouunnttiinngg CCooddeess

Setting The Printer To Validate The Accounting Code For All Jobs

To set the printer to validate the accounting code for all jobs:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting→Accounting

Methods.

2. In the Configuration Settings area, for Validation Polices / Print Job Exceptions, click Edit.

3. For Validate Accounting Code, select Yes.

Note: When you select Yes for Validate Accounting Code and tracking is enabled for Print,

unidentified jobs are deleted.

4. Click Save.

234

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Accounting

Configuring Validation Options For Unidentified Print Jobs

To configure validation options for unidentified print jobs:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login / Permissions / Accounting→Accounting

Methods.

2. In the Configuration Settings area, for Validation Policies / Print Job Exceptions, click Edit.

3. For Validate Accounting Code, select Yes with Exceptions.

4. To allow the device to print unidentified print jobs from any computer, for Exceptions for Jobs Not

Containing an Accounting Code, select Guest Mode.

5. To allow IPP print jobs, for Exceptions for Jobs Not Containing an Accounting Code, select IPP

Exception Mode. Select an option.

• Track IPP jobs with invalid accounting codes against the IPP Exception User and Account

IDs: Use this option to allow print jobs with invalid accounting codes from IPP sources. This

configuration prevents IPP clients from rejecting jobs such as Google Cloud Print, AirPrint, and

Mopria™.

• Reject IPP jobs with invalid accounting codes: Use this option to reject print jobs with

invalid accounting codes.

Note: Some Apple iOS and OSX clients send an unalterable accounting user ID value

during job submission. To allow jobs from these clients, select Track IPP jobs with invalid

accounting codes against the IPP Exception User and Account IDs. For details, refer to

the AirPrint User Guide.

6. To allow unidentified print jobs from specific sources only, for Exceptions for Jobs Not Containing

an Accounting Code, select Designated Source Mode. The device deletes invalid unidentified

print jobs.

a. To specify the computers or other sources that are allowed to send unidentified print jobs in

Designated Source Mode, click Add Device.

b. Select IPv4 Address or Host Name.

c. Type the address of the source that is allowed to send unidentified print jobs.

d. For User ID, select the information that the printer uses for the User ID. If you selected

Custom, type the User ID.

e. Click Save.

7. To save the settings, click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

235

Accounting

Network Accounting

Network Accounting tracks print, scan, fax, Internet fax, server fax, and copy jobs by User ID and

Account ID and stores them in a job log. You can use this information to manage device usage and to

perform detailed cost analysis. Users are prompted for accounting information when submitting jobs

to the device. You can compile job log information from the accounting server and produce formatted

reports.

Before you begin, complete the following items:

• Install and configure Xerox

certified network accounting software on your network. For help,

refer to the manufacturer instructions.

• Test communication between the accounting server and the device. Open a Web browser, type the

IP Address of the printer in the address bar, then press Enter. The device Embedded Web Server

home page appears.

• To track print and LAN Fax jobs, install device drivers on all user computers.

EEnnaabblliinngg NNeettwwoorrkk AAccccoouunnttiinngg

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting→Accounting

Methods.

2. Click Edit.

3. For Current Accounting Method, select Network Accounting.

4. Click Save.

SSeettttiinngg NNeettwwoorrkk AAccccoouunnttiinngg WWoorrkkffllooww OOppttiioonnss

1. On the Accounting Methods page, for Accounting Workflow, click Edit.

2. For each Job Type, select an option from the Accounting Workflow list:

• Pre-Authorization and Capture Usage: This option requires a job limits server to approve

each job that a user attempts to send or print. The job limits server approves a job based on

the credentials of the user and the configured job attributes.

• Capture Usage: This option does not require pre-authorization and the job validation is

performed only after the job is submitted.

3. Click Save.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg JJoobb LLiimmiittss SSeerrvveerr SSeettttiinnggss

1. On the Accounting Methods page, for Job Limits Server (Pre-Authorization), click Edit.

Note: The Job Limits Server setting is only visible when pre-authorization is selected for a

job type.

2. For Server URL, type the URL of your job limits server.

3. For Timeout, type the time in seconds that the printer waits for the job limits server to respond to

job approval requests before it disconnects.

4. Click Save.

236

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Accounting

DDiissaabblliinngg tthhee JJoobb LLiimmiittss WWeebb AApppp

If your accounting solution provider recommends disabling the Job Limits Web service, or if your job

limits server only requires client-based calls, disable the service.

1. On the Accounting Methods page, for Job Limits (Web Service), click Edit.

Note: The Job Limits setting is only visible when pre-authorization is selected for a job

type.

2. In the Authentication and Accounting area, for Job Limits, clear the check box.

3. Click Save.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg UUsseerr PPrroommppttss

You can customize accounting prompts. An accounting prompt is the text that prompts users to enter

accounting information at the control panel. You can enable up to two prompts, as your validation

server requires. For example, if your company uses a unique numeric identifier for each department,

you can use that number as the accounting code. Then, you can customize the prompt text to ask

users for a Department ID Code, rather than a User ID or Account ID.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a specific

device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

To customize accounting prompts:

1. On the Accounting Methods page, for User Accounting Prompts, click Edit.

2. To display prompt 1 or 2, for Display Prompt, select Yes. To hide prompts, select No.

3. For Label and Default Value, type the text that you want to appear at the control panel.

4. To hide text typed at the control panel, for Mask Entries, select Yes. Asterisks * replace any

characters typed in the field.

5. For Prompt Options, select a Preset option from the list, or select Prompt, No Prompt, or Color

Promptingfor each app as needed.

6. Click Save.

Note: When prompts are turned off, jobs that do not contain an accounting ID are tracked

with a generic code.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg VVaalliiddaattiioonn PPoolliicciieess aanndd PPrriinntt JJoobb

EExxcceeppttiioonnss

You can set validation policies and configure print job exceptions for unidentified print jobs.

Unidentified jobs are jobs that are not associated with a user name.

Unidentified jobs originate from a computer that does not require a user to log in. Examples are a job

sent from a DOS or UNIX window using LPR, Port 9100, or from the Jobs tab in the Embedded Web

Server. Unidentified print jobs can originate from IPP clients, including mobile clients that support

AirPrint and Mopria.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

237

Accounting

VVaalliiddaattiinngg AAccccoouunnttiinngg CCooddeess

Setting the Device to Validate the Accounting Code for All Jobs

To set the device to validate the accounting code for all jobs:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login / Permissions / Accounting→Accounting

Methods.

2. On the Accounting Methods page, for Validation Policies / Print Job Exceptions, click Edit.

3. For Enablement, select Enabled.

4. For Validate Accounting Code, select Yes.

5. Click Save.

Configuring Validation Options for Unidentified Print Jobs

To configure validation options for unidentified print jobs:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/ Permissions/ Accounting→Accounting

Methods.

2. On the Accounting Methods page, in the Configuration Settings area, for Validation Policies /

Print Job Exceptions, click Edit.

3. For Enablement, select Enabled.

4. For Validate Accounting Code, select Yes with Exceptions.

5. To allow the device to print unidentified print jobs from any computer, for Exceptions for Jobs Not

Containing An Accounting Code, select Guest Mode.

6. To allow IPP print jobs, for Exceptions for Jobs Not Containing an Accounting Code, select IPP

Exception Mode. Select an option.

• Track IPP jobs with invalid accounting codes against the IPP Exception User and Account

IDs: Use this option to allow print jobs with invalid accounting codes from IPP sources. This

configuration prevents rejection of jobs from IPP clients such as Google Cloud Print, AirPrint,

and Mopria.

• Reject IPP jobs with invalid accounting codes: Use this option to reject print jobs with

invalid accounting codes.

Note: Some Apple iOS and OSX clients send an unalterable accounting user ID value

during job submission. To allow jobs from these clients, select Track IPP jobs with invalid

accounting codes against the IPP Exception User and Account IDs. For details, refer to

the AirPrint User Guide.

238

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Accounting

7. To allow unidentified print jobs from specific sources only, for Exceptions for Jobs Not Containing

an Accounting Code, select Designated Source Mode.

Note: The device deletes invalid unidentified print jobs.

a. To specify the computers or other sources that are allowed to send unidentified print jobs in

Designated Source Mode, click Add Device.

b. Select IPv4 Address or Host Name.

c. Type the address of the source that is allowed to send unidentified print jobs.

d. For User ID, select the information that the device uses for the User ID. If you selected

Custom, type the User ID.

e. Click Save.

8. To save the settings, click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

239

Accounting

Accounting Using an Auxiliary Access Device

You can configure the printer to use an auxiliary access device for accounting.

Before you begin, purchase and install the Auxiliary Interface Kit. An Auxiliary Interface Kit, or a

Foreign Device Interface Kit, is a third-party access and accounting device. These kits, such as a coin

operated printer accessory or a card reader, can be attached to the printer. Installation instructions

are included with the Foreign Device Interface Kit.

EEnnaabblliinngg AAccccoouunnttiinngg UUssiinngg aann AAuuxxiilliiaarryy AAcccceessss

DDeevviiccee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Login/Permissions/Accounting→Accounting

Methods.

2. Click Edit.

3. For Accounting Method, select Auxiliary Access Device.

4. Click Save.

DDiissppllaayyiinngg YYoouurr CCoommppaannyy LLooggoo oonn tthhee BBlloocckkiinngg

SSccrreeeenn

You can customize the blocking screen to display your company logo. The blocking screen appears on

the printer touch screen when card reader authentication or an auxiliary accounting device is

configured. The screen displays a message when a user attempts to access a restricted feature,

reminding users to swipe an identification card to access the feature.

CChhaannggiinngg tthhee WWiinnddooww TTiittllee aanndd IInnssttrruuccttiioonnaall TTeexxtt

1. In the Embedded Web Server, on the Accounting Methods page, for Import Customer Logo, click

Import.

2. For the area that you want to change, click the area on the sample screen. Type the text that you

want to appear in that area:

• In the area near the top of the sample screen, type a title.

• In the area below the title, type instructions for users. For example, type Swipe your

employee badge over the card reader to log in.

IImmppoorrttiinngg tthhee CCoommppaannyy LLooggoo

1. In the Embedded Web Server, on the Accounting Methods page, for Import Customer Logo, click

Import.

2. Click Browse or Choose File.

3. Select a .png file that is not larger than 300 x 200 pixels, then click Open.

4. Click Import.

5. Click Restart Device.

240

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Accounting

DDeelleettiinngg tthhee CCoommppaannyy LLooggoo

1. In the Embedded Web Server, on the Accounting Methods page, for Import Customer Logo, click

Import.

2. For Logo Placement, click Delete Image, then click OK.

3. To ensure that the changes take effect, click Restart Device.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee AAuuxxiilliiaarryy DDeevviiccee TTyyppee

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Accounting Settings→Accounting Mode.

3. Touch Auxiliary Access→Auxiliary Device Type.

4. Touch your auxiliary access device type.

5. Touch OK.

SSeelleeccttiinngg AAppppss ttoo RReessttrriicctt oorr TTrraacckk

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Accounting Settings→Accounting Mode.

3. Touch Auxiliary Access→App Access and Accounting.

4. To track usage of the copy and printing apps, for Track App Usage, select an option.

5. To restrict particular apps, for Restrict App Access, select options as needed.

6. Touch OK.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee JJoobb TTiimmeeoouutt

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Accounting Settings→Accounting Mode.

3. Touch Auxiliary Access→Job Timeout.

4. Touch Enabled.

5. To specify the amount of time that the printer waits before it deletes a job, for Job Timeout,

enter the time in seconds using the Up and Down arrows.

Note: The printer only deletes held network print jobs or jobs that are waiting for payment.

6. Touch OK.

SSppeecciiffyyiinngg DDoouubbllee CCoouunntt LLaarrggee IImmpprreessssiioonnss

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Accounting Settings→Accounting Mode.

3. Touch Auxiliary Access→Double Count Large Impressions.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

241

Accounting

4. Touch Count Once or Count Twice.

5. Touch OK.

PPrreemmiiuumm SSeelleecctt

Premium Select allows you to specify that Legal-sized paper (8.5 x 14 in.) is counted for large

impressions.

To change the Premium Select setting:

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Accounting Settings→Accounting Mode.

3. Touch Auxiliary Access→Premium Select.

4. Select an option.

• Legal 8.5 x 14: This option enables Premium Select.

• None: This option disables Premium Select.

5. Touch OK.

242

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Accounting

Enabling Accounting in Print Drivers

EEnnaabblliinngg AAccccoouunnttiinngg iinn aa WWiinnddoowwss PPrriinntt DDrriivveerr

1. From the Start menu, select Devices and Printers.

2. Right-click the printer in the list, then select Properties→Configuration→Accounting.

3. From the Accounting System menu, select Xerox Standard Accounting or Auditron, or Xerox

Network Accounting.

4. To prompt users to type their User ID and Account ID each time they print, select Always

Prompt. If you do not want users to log in, select Do Not Prompt. Type the user information in

the Default User ID and Default Account ID fields. Select Mask User ID and Mask Account ID to

show characters as asterisks when an ID is entered.

5. To show the last entered code when users are prompted for their Account ID, select Remember

Last Entered Codes.

6. If you are using Xerox Standard Accounting with an external accounting device, select Auxiliary

Accounting Interface.

7. To specify the default User ID and Account ID, type the information in the Default User ID and

Default Account ID fields. Select the default account type.

8. Click OK.

9. To exit, click OK.

EEnnaabblliinngg AAccccoouunnttiinngg iinn aann AAppppllee MMaacciinnttoosshh PPrriinntt

DDrriivveerr

Users must select this preset each time they print or send a LAN fax using the print driver.

1. Open a document and select File, then select Print.

2. Select the Xerox

printer.

3. From the menu, select Accounting.

4. For Accounting System, select Xerox Standard Accounting, Auditron, or Xerox Network

Accounting.

5. If you want users to type their User ID and Account ID every time they print, select Prompt for

Every Job.

6. To show characters as asterisks when the user types an ID, select Mask User ID and Mask

Account ID.

7. To specify the default User ID and Account ID, type them in the Default User ID and Default

Account ID fields, then select the default account type.

8. To use Xerox Standard Accounting with an external accounting device, select Auxiliary

Accounting Interface.

9. To save your settings, click the Presets menu, then select Save As.

10. Type a name for the preset.

11. Click OK.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

243

Accounting

Printing a Copy Activity Report

The copy activity report is a usage report that prints after each copy session. The report lists details

about the job and the number of copies made during the session.

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Accounting Settings→Copy Activity Report.

3. Touch Enabled.

4. Touch OK.

244

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Accounting

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

245

Administrator Tools

This chapter contains:

• Viewing Device Status and Configuring Frequently Used Functions .......................................... 246

• Display Device Information...................................................................................................... 248

• Customizing Device Contact Information ................................................................................. 249

• Configuring Alerts .................................................................................................................... 250

• Energy Saving Settings............................................................................................................. 254

• Remote Control Panel .............................................................................................................. 257

• Entry Screen Defaults............................................................................................................... 258

• Remote Services....................................................................................................................... 259

• Remote Server Management.................................................................................................... 260

• Fleet Orchestrator .................................................................................................................... 261

• Cloning .................................................................................................................................... 274

• Language and Keyboard .......................................................................................................... 276

• Backup and Restore Settings .................................................................................................... 278

• Billing Impression Mode........................................................................................................... 280

• Configuration Watchdog.......................................................................................................... 281

• Address Books.......................................................................................................................... 282

• Font Management Utility......................................................................................................... 288

• Network Logs........................................................................................................................... 289

• Restarting the Device in the Embedded Web Server.................................................................. 290

• Restarting the Device at the Control Panel ............................................................................... 291

• Taking the Device Offline ......................................................................................................... 292

• Erase Customer Data ............................................................................................................... 293

• Resetting the User Interface to Factory Default Settings .......................................................... 294

• Reverting to Previous Settings .................................................................................................. 295

• Updating the Device Software ................................................................................................. 296

• Adjusting Color, Image, and Text Detection Settings ................................................................ 297

Viewing Device Status and Configuring

Frequently Used Functions

The Home page in the Embedded Web Server displays device status and information. The Home page

provides a quick view of notifications, supplies usage, tray settings, app configuration, and billing

information. The Quick Links provide access to device driver downloads, reports, the Remote Control

Panel, and other frequently used functions.

Note: For details on the Embedded Web Server, refer to Configuration Steps.

Notifications: To configure control panel alerts and emails, click Settings. For details, refer to

Configuring Alerts.

Trays: To manage paper and tray settings, click Settings. For details, refer to Tray Content and

Settings in Paper Management.

Supplies: To view detailed information for toner, cleaning kits, and other user-replaceable items, click

Details.

Billing: To view billing meter and usage details, click Usage.

Apps: You can use this section to view the configuration status and configure any app, or device

function, installed on the device. To configure apps and device functions, click the link associated with

the app or function that you want to edit.

Note: The apps listed here are configured to appear on the control panel touch screen. User-

installed apps appear at the end of this list. For details, refer to Displaying or Hiding Apps.

• To configure the copy function, click Copy. For details, refer to Specifying Default Copy Settings.

• To show or hide the ID Card Copy app, click ID Card Copy. For details, refer to Displaying or

Hiding Apps.

• To configure Scan to Destination, click Scan To. For details, refer to Configuring Scan To.

• To enable or disable Print from USB or Print from Mailbox, click Print From. For details, refer to

Print from USB.

• To configure the Fax function, click Fax. For details, refer to Faxing.

• To manage file repositories, click Workflow Scanning. Refer to Configuring File Repository

Settings.

• To configure the fax repository, click Server Fax. For details, refer to Server Fax.

• To configure email functions, click Email. For details, refer to Accessing the Email Setup Page.

• To configure display settings and permissions for custom apps, click Xerox

App Gallery. For

details, refer to Weblet Management.

• To configure Internet fax functions, click Internet Fax. For details, refer to Accessing the Internet

Fax Setup Page.

• To show or hide other weblets or EIP Apps, click the weblet or EIP App name. For details, refer to

Displaying or Hiding Apps.

Quick Links: You can use the links in this section for quick access to frequently used features. To

access a feature, click the appropriate Quick Links icon.

246

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

• To create or install a clone file, click Cloning. For details, refer to Cloning.

• To download the most current print driver, click Download Driver.

• To enable or disable remote control panel access, or to use the remote control panel feature, click

Remote Control Panel. For details, refer to Remote Control Panel.

• To view or print a Configuration Report or other information, click Information Pages. For details,

refer to More Information.

• To access remote services settings, click Remote Services Upload. For details, refer to Remote

Services.

• To restart the device, click Reboot Device.

• To view or print current device settings, including hardware descriptions, software versions, and

other information, click Configuration Report. For details, refer to Printing the Configuration

Report.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

247

Administrator Tools

Display Device Information

You can specify the details, such as device model, IPv4 address, host name, contact name, or HTTP

address, to appear on the control panel.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Display Device Information.

2. To display the required device information, for Information Field, select an option from the list.

3. Click Apply.

248

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

Customizing Device Contact Information

The Support page in the Embedded Web Server displays contact information for service and supplies

and for your system administrator. You can customize this information to display your company

details for device users.

To add your own custom information:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Support.

2. Click Edit Settings.

3. Update the fields with your information, then click Apply.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

249

Administrator Tools

Configuring Alerts

You can configure the following warnings and alerts:

• Low supply and scan disk memory warnings to appear on the control panel

• Email alerts

• Status LEDs and sounds

To view alerts, in the Embedded Web Server, click the Home tab.

To configure alerts:

1. Access the Embedded Web Server.

2. Access the Notification Settings page using one of the following methods:

• Click Properties→General Setup→Notification Settings.

• Click Home, then for Notifications, click Settings.

CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell AAlleerrttss

You can specify when you want the device to display a warning on the control panel touch screen.

SSeettttiinngg SSccaann DDiisskk MMeemmoorryy WWaarrnniinngg

You can specify when you want the printer to display a warning on the control panel if the printer

scan disk memory is low. Low memory can cause the printer to slow down or lose jobs.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Notification Settings→Control Panel Alerts.

3. For Scan Disk Memory Warning, select the estimated number of scanned pages that the device

can hold in scan memory before a warning appears.

Note: The higher the number of pages that you select, the more frequently warnings

appear.

SSeettttiinngg LLooww SSuuppppllyy WWaarrnniinngg

You can set the device to display a warning on the control panel when supplies reach a low level.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Notification Settings→Control Panel Alerts.

3. To display low supply warnings on the control panel, select Display Low Supply Warnings on the

device's touch screen.

4. To display a low toner warning on the control panel, for Toner, select Show Warning.

5. Click Apply.

250

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg LLooww SSuuppppllyy WWaarrnniinngg

To set when the device displays low supply warnings:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Notification Settings→Control Panel Alerts.

3. In the Days Remaining area, for each supply, select when you want the device to display an alert.

The range is 1–20 days.

4. Click Apply.

Note: To view current supplies status, on the Home tab, navigate to Supplies, then click

Details.

EEmmaaiill AAlleerrttss

You can define groups to receive email notifications when selected status alerts occur on the printer.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Notification Settings→Email Alerts.

3. For Recipient Group Addresses, select which group you want to enable. You can type up to five

email addresses to receive selected alerts.

4. In the Recipient Group Preferences area, for the group you created, select the type of alerts that

cause email notifications to occur. You can set up to three groups to receive any combination of

email alerts.

5. In the Status Codes area, for Email billing meters for manual submission, click Edit. Select the

days and times to send a billing meter report, then click Apply.

6. To view definitions of the alert types, in the Recipient Group Preferences area, for Status Codes,

click (Glossary).

7. For "Reply to:" Email Address, type the email address of the administrator or user designated to

receive any replies sent by Alert Notification group members.

8. Specify how long the device waits after a jam is detected before sending an email status

message. For Set jam timer for release of status to selected groups, type a number between 0–60

minutes. The default time is 0 minutes.

9. Click Apply.

SSttaattuuss LLEEDD aanndd SSoouunnddss

You can configure the device to enable Status LED lights to flash and play sounds to alert users to

various device conditions or events. You can enable or disable Status LED lights and sounds

independently of each other. You can set the volume for each sound independently of each other.

Note: Status LED lights and sounds are enabled by default.

Status LED lights flash blue when:

• A print job, copy job, or receive-fax job has completed

• A user has swiped a card for authentication

• The device is powering on

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

251

Administrator Tools

• A mobile client is using AirPrint to locate the device

Status LED lights flash amber when:

• The device has an error or shows an alert. The LED flashes on and off to indicate a more serious

condition, which can require a call for service.

• The device requires user attention. The LED fades in and out to indicate a less serious condition.

Sliders allow you to control the sound volume independently for each of the following events:

• Touch: A sound plays when a user interacts with the control panel touch screen.

• Job Completion: A sound plays when a print job, copy job, or receive-fax job completes.

• Login: A sound plays when a user swipes an authentication card.

• Fault/Alert: A sound plays when the device issues an alert or when the device requires user

attention.

• Power: A sound plays when the device is powering down.

• Energy Saver: A sound plays when the device enters or exits Energy Saver mode.

DDiissppllaayyiinngg tthhee SSttaattuuss LLEEDD

Configuring the Status LED in the Embedded Web Server

To configure the status LED in the Embedded Web Server:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Status LED & Sounds.

2. Select Display Status LED.

3. Click Apply.

Configuring the Status LED at the Control Panel

To configure the status LED at the control panel:

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings→General→Status LED.

3. For Status LED, select the toggle button.

Note: A check mark on the toggle button indicates Enabled.

4. Touch OK.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg SSoouunnddss

Configuring Sounds in the Embedded Web Server

To configure sounds in the Embedded Web Server:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Status LED & Sounds.

2. To enable sounds, select Enable Sounds.

3. To adjust the sound volume for an event, move the appropriate volume slider control as needed.

4. Click Apply.

252

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

Configuring the Sounds at the Control Panel

To configure the sounds at the control panel:

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings→General→Sounds.

3. For Enable Sounds, select the toggle button.

Note: A check mark on the toggle button indicates Enabled.

4. To adjust the sound volume for an event, move the appropriate volume slider control as needed.

5. Touch OK.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

253

Administrator Tools

Energy Saving Settings

SSeettttiinngg EEnneerrggyy SSaavveerr MMooddee

Note: Any user activity or network activity that is related to the device brings the device out of

Sleep Mode. This rule applies to all Energy Saver modes.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg EEnneerrggyy SSaavveerr SSeettttiinnggss iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb SSeerrvveerr

To configure Energy Saver settings in the Embedded Web Server:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Energy Saver.

2. For Exit Sleep Mode Strategy, select an option.

• Intelligent Ready: When this option is enabled, the device wakes and sleeps based on

previous usage.

• Job Activated: When this option is enabled, the device wakes when it detects activity.

• To set the delay before the device enters Sleep Mode, select Ready Mode→Sleep Mode,

then enter the minutes.

Note: Depending on when the device was manufactured, you can set the

period of time for the device to go into Low Power Mode. This feature is not

supported on the latest version of the device.

• To allow the device to power off after a period of time in Sleep Mode, select Auto Power

Off.

Note: Selecting Auto Power Off is not recommended because the device does

not respond until you power on the device manually.

• Sleep and wake up at scheduled times: The device wakes and sleeps according to a schedule

that you specify. To specify the schedule:

• To allow the device to wake when it senses activity on a specific day of the week, for

Schedule Based on, select Activity.

• To allow the device to wake and sleep at a specific time of day, for Schedule Based on,

select Time. For Wake Up time and Sleep, select the time of day.

3. Click Apply.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg EEnneerrggyy SSaavveerr SSeettttiinnggss aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

To configure Energy Saver settings at the control panel:

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings→General→Energy Saver.

Note: If the Energy Saver feature does not appear, log in as a system administrator. For

details, refer to Accessing the Control Panel as a System Administrator.

3. To configure the device to wake and sleep based on previous usage, select Intelligent Ready.

4. To configure the device to wake when it detects activity, select Job Activated.

254

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

a. To change the default power saver timeout periods, touch Sleep Timers.

• To change the number of minutes before the device enters sleep mode, for Sleep Mode,

touch the Plus (+) or Minus (-) icon, or touch the minute number, then use the keypad to

enter a value.

Note: Depending on when the device was manufactured, you can set the

period of time for the device to go into Low Power Mode. This feature is not

supported on the latest version of the device.

• To enable Auto Power Off from Sleep Mode, for Allow Auto Power Off from Sleep Mode,

touch the toggle button. To change the number of hours before the device powers off

after entering Sleep Mode, for Power Off, touch the Plus (+) or Minus (-) icon, or touch the

hour number, then use the keypad to enter a value.

Note: A check mark on the toggle button indicates that the feature is enabled.

b. Touch OK.

5. To configure the device to wake and sleep according to a schedule that you specify, select

Scheduled.

a. To specify the schedule, touch Scheduled Settings.

• To allow the device to wake when it senses activity on a specific day of the week, touch a

day of the week. For Schedule Based on, touch Activity.

• To allow the device to wake and sleep at a specific time of day, touch a day of the week.

For Schedule Based on, touch Time. To select the time of day for wake and sleep, touch

Wake Up Time or Sleep Time. To set the time, for Hours, touch the arrows. If you are

using a 12-hour clock, touch AM or PM.

b. Touch OK.

6. Touch OK.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg UUSSBB PPoorrtt SSttaattee iinn SSlleeeepp MMooddee

The USB Port State in Sleep Mode feature controls power supply to USB (Type A) accessories when

the device is in Sleep Mode. To remain active, accessories, such as Xerox

Wireless Network Adapter

and USB card readers, require that power is maintained to the USB port in sleep mode.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

255

Administrator Tools

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg UUSSBB PPoorrtt SSttaattee iinn SSlleeeepp MMooddee iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb

SSeerrvveerr

To configure USB Port Sleep Mode in the Embedded Web Server:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Connectivity→Setup.

2. For USB Port State in Sleep Mode, select Edit.

• To permit USB accessories to operate during Sleep Mode, select Powered.

Note: The Powered option can cause an increase in power consumption during Sleep

Mode.

• To disconnect power from USB accessories during Sleep Mode, select Not Powered.

Note: When wireless networking is active on the device, you cannot disconnect power from

USB accessories. The Not Powered option is not available.

3. Click Save.

EEnnaabblliinngg UUSSBB PPoorrtt SSttaattee iinn SSlleeeepp MMooddee aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

To enable USB Port State in Sleep Mode at the control panel:

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Network Settings→USB Settings.

3. Touch USB Port State in Sleep Mode.

4. For Power USB Port in Sleep Mode, select the toggle button.

Note: A check mark on the toggle button indicates that a feature or option is enabled.

When wireless networking is active on the device, you cannot disconnect power from USB

accessories, and you cannot disable the setting.

5. Touch OK.

256

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

Remote Control Panel

The Remote Control Panel allows you to access the control panel of the printer from a Web browser.

To enable the Remote Control Panel feature:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Support→Remote Control Panel or click Home→Remote

Control Panel.

2. For Configuration, click Edit.

3. For Enablement, select Enable, then select an option:

• For Admin only: This option allows system administrators to access the Remote Control Panel.

• For Admin and Diagnostics Users Only: This option allows system administrators and Xerox

representatives to access the Remote Control Panel.

• For All Users: This option allows all users to access the Remote Control Panel.

4. Click Save.

To restrict other users from accessing the control panel when you are connected, select Block device

control panel. If a user attempts to access the control panel, a message appears.

To access the control panel remotely, click Start Remote Session.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

257

Administrator Tools

Entry Screen Defaults

You can set the default screens that appear on the touch screen when you press buttons on the

device control panel.

SSeelleeccttiinngg tthhee EEnnttrryy SSccrreeeenn DDeeffaauullttss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Entry Screen Defaults.

3. For Default Walkup Screen, select the screen that appears when you walk up to the printer.

4. For Default Screen when Originals are Detected, select the screen that appears when you load

original documents into the automatic document feeder or onto the document glass.

5. Click Apply.

258

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

Remote Services

Remote Services is a suite of features that simplify printer ownership and administration. It provides

free services to enable administration of metered billing and supplies replenishment plans for printers

on a network.

Before you begin, if your network uses an HTTP proxy server, provide information about your proxy

server. For details, refer to Proxy Server.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg RReemmoottee SSeerrvviicceess

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Remote Services Setup.

2. For Remote Services, select Enabled.

3. Configure Remote Permissions:

• To allow the printer to request software files from Xerox, for Software Download, select

Enabled.

• To allow the printer to synchronize with the Xerox licensing server, for Feature Activation,

select Enabled.

• To allow a Xerox remote server to modify internal device settings, for Update Device Settings,

select Enabled.

• To allow the printer to send diagnostic information to Xerox when an error occurs, for

Automatically Send Diagnostic Information, select Enabled.

4. To synchronize the printer with the Xerox

Remote Services data center on a defined schedule, for

Daily Synchronization Time, type the time.

5. To verify communication with the Xerox

Remote Services data center, click Synchronize Now.

A status message appears.

6. If your network uses an HTTP proxy server, to set or update your proxy server, for HTTP Proxy

Server, click Edit.

7. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

259

Administrator Tools

Remote Server Management

The Remote Management Server Setup feature allows the printer to detect, and communicate with

one or more remote management servers in the network. The remote management servers can be

Xerox CentreWare

Web, Xerox Device Manager, or other Xerox partner servers.

The Remote Management Server Setup feature is enabled by default. The setup feature uses industry-

standard DNS mechanisms to locate management servers in the network. Ensure that you set up DNS

server addresses on the printer. The simplest way to set up DNS is to use DHCP, at least temporarily.

When the printer is set up, you can switch to a DHCP reserved address, or a static IP address.

The feature uses the Xerox Discovery Service to detect the remote-management servers. To detect the

remote-management server, the feature queries your DNS server.

• The feature searches for a server called XeroxDiscoverService in the same network domain as the

printer, for example yourdomain.com. If you have only one remote-management server in your

network, name the remote-management server XeroxDiscoverService.yourdomain.com in your

DNS servers.

• The Remote Management Server Setup feature looks for a server with an alias address. For

example, if the remote-management server is called server1.yourdomain.com, create a DNS alias

XeroxDiscoverService.yourdomain.com. Use the alias to refer to server1.yourdomain.com.

• The feature looks in DNS for DNS-SD records. DNS-SD records are DNS text records that contain

service discovery keywords. The DNS server can have many remote-management servers listed

with a XeroxDiscoverService keyword. DNS returns the server list to the printer. The printer works

down the list of up to 10 servers, then attempts to check in to all of them.

• If your DNS servers do not have DNS-SD records, enter the remote-management server address

using an IP address, host name, or IPv6 address.

The service discovery runs after the printer starts, or when you request that the printer performs the

discovery.

For more information on setting up the Xerox Discovery Service in DNS, refer to www.xerox.com.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg aa RReemmoottee MMaannaaggeemmeenntt SSeerrvveerr

CCoonnnneeccttiioonn

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Remote management server

setup.

2. For Enablement, select Enabled.

3. To discover a management server, click Discover servers.

4. If needed, to enter the remote-management server address manually, for Server address, enter

the IP address, host name, or IPv6 address.

5. To test communication between the remote-management server and the printer, click Check in

now.

Information about the last check-in appears in the Last status results area.

6. Click Apply.

260

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

Fleet Orchestrator

The Fleet Orchestrator feature allows you to configure many devices in similar ways, automatically.

After you configure one device, you can distribute any of the configuration settings to other devices,

as needed. You can set up schedules to share configuration settings regularly and automatically.

The Fleet Orchestrator feature enables you to share the following types of configuration files:

• Software upgrade files: A software upgrade file contains the latest firmware for the device. Xerox

releases upgrades when needed.

• Clone files: A clone file contains configuration settings from a device. When you install a clone file

on another device, the clone file changes the configuration settings to match the settings on the

cloned device.

• 1-Touch Add-On files: A 1-Touch Add-On file adds workflows to a device without overwriting

existing apps or workflows.

SSooffttwwaarree UUppggrraaddee FFiilleess

When Xerox releases a new version of software for your device, you can use Fleet Orchestrator to

install the software upgrade file. Software upgrade files do not overwrite printer configuration

settings.

Note: You can update your device manually, using a USB Flash drive. For details, refer to

Manually Updating the Software Using a USB Flash Drive.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee SSeeccuurriittyy IInnssttaallllaattiioonn PPoolliiccyy ffoorr SSooffttwwaarree UUppggrraaddee

To set the installation policy for software upgrades:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security→Installation Policies.

2. To allow software upgrades to install on the device, for Software Upgrade, select Allow Software

Upgrades.

This setting allows software upgrades at the control panel touch screen, at the Embedded Web

server, automatic software upgrades using FTP, and using print submission.

3. Click Apply.

IInnssttaalllliinngg aa SSooffttwwaarree UUppggrraaddee FFiillee

To install a software upgrade file:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. Click Create/Install File→Install a File.

3. Click Software Upgrade File.

4. To change the installation policy, in the Details area, for Installation Policy, click the current policy

setting. Change the policy as needed, then navigate back to the Install Configuration File page.

5. In the File to Install field, click Browse, then select the software upgrade file that you want to

install.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

261

Administrator Tools

6. If you are installing the upgrade on a publisher, and are using file sharing, select the Share This

File option.

7. Click Install.

Software installation begins several minutes after you submit the software to the device. When

installation begins, the Embedded Web Server is disabled. You can monitor the installation progress

from the control panel touch screen.

After the upgrade completes, the device restarts, then prints a Configuration Report. To verify that the

software has updated, check the Extended Software Upgrade Details, or the Configuration Report.

EEnnaabblliinngg AAuuttoommaattiicc SSooffttwwaarree UUppggrraaddee

You can configure the device to connect to an FTP directory on your network to update the device

software. To use this feature, download the latest software file, then copy it to an FTP server. After

the software upgrade completes, the device retains all configured network settings and installed

options.

Note: You can use the file-sharing function of Fleet Orchestrator to manage clone files and 1-

Touch Add-On files. You can manage software upgrades using either the Fleet Orchestrator file-

sharing function, or automatic software upgrades with FTP. It is recommended that you use

only one software-upgrade method.

To schedule automatic upgrades:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. Click Create/Install File→Install a File.

3. Click Automatic Software Upgrade.

4. To change the installation policy, in the Details area for Installation Policy, click the current policy

setting. Change the policy as needed.

5. In the Schedule area, select Enabled.

6. For Refresh Start Time, select Hourly or Daily. If you select Daily, type the time in hours and

minutes.

7. Enter the FTP server information:

a. In the Connection area, for Host, select the address type. The options are IPv4, IPv6, or Host

Name.

b. For Host, type the appropriately formatted address and port number of the server where the

upgrade software is located. The default port number is 21.

c. For Directory Path, type the full path to the .dlm software upgrade file on the server.

d. For Login Name, type the name that the device uses to access the server.

e. Type the password, then type the password again to verify.

f. To update an existing password, select Save Password.

8. Click Save.

262

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

EExxtteennddeedd SSooffttwwaarree UUppggrraaddee DDeettaaiillss

If there are software upgrades installed on your device, you can view information about the

upgrades:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Configuration Files area, for Software Upgrade, click View.

• Current Software: The Current Software section shows the date and time of the most recent

installation, and the current software version number.

• Last Upgrade Attempt: The Last Upgrade Attempt section shows the date and time of the

most recent software upgrade attempt, the software version, and the installation status.

3. Click Close.

CClloonnee FFiilleess

Clone files contain configuration settings from a device. You can use the clone file to overwrite the

configuration settings on another device with the configuration settings from the original device.

You can create clone files to suit your cloning strategy. For example:

• To standardize general device settings across a group of devices, create a clone file that contains

configuration settings from one device.

• To standardize security settings on all your devices, create a clone file with a set of specific

settings, such as security policies.

Note: Unique configuration settings, such as an IP address, are not cloned.

The Fleet Orchestrator feature allows you to create, install, and share clone files.

Note: You can use a clone file to create a backup file of the configuration settings for your

printer, except for unique settings such as the IP address. For information on creating a

complete backup, refer to Backup and Restore Settings.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee SSeeccuurriittyy IInnssttaallllaattiioonn PPoolliiccyy ffoorr CClloonniinngg

To set the installation policy for cloning:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security→Installation Policies.

2. For Cloning, select an option.

• To limit clone file installation to encrypted clone files only, select Only encrypted clone files

can be installed.

• To allow any clone file installation, select Both encrypted and unencrypted clone files can be

installed.

Note: Clone files from older devices are unencrypted. Select this option when installing

unencrypted clone files.

• To prevent clone file installation, select Clone files cannot be installed.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

263

Administrator Tools

3. To allow clone files to install by sending a print job, select Allow Print Submission. This option

allows you to send a clone file to multiple devices by writing a script and printing the file.

Note: The Allow Print Submission option is valuable for use with older software versions,

but because the print path is not authenticated, this option can present a security risk. For

details, click Fleet Management & Print Submission Tips.

4. Click Apply.

CCrreeaattiinngg aa CClloonnee FFiillee

To create a clone file:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. Click Create/Install File→Create a File.

3. In the Create Configuration File area, click Clone File.

4. In the Details area, modify the settings for the clone file:

• File Name: To use a unique filename, type a filename. The default filename is Cloning.dlm.

• Share This File: To share the file if the device is a publisher device in a file-sharing group,

select this option.

• Download This File: To download the clone file, select this option.

5. In the Configuration Settings area, select the settings that you want to clone:

• To choose individual items, select or clear individual check boxes.

• To view the details of an individual setting, click Details.

• To select all settings, click the Select information icon, then click Select All Groups.

• To clear all settings, click the Select information icon, then click Deselect All Settings.

• To show or hide the configuration file settings, click Show Settings or Hide Settings.

6. Click Create.

7. To download the clone file, right-click the clone file link, then click Save As or Save Target As.

Select a name and location for the file, then click Save. Do not change the .dlm file extension.

8. Click Close.

IInnssttaalllliinngg aa CClloonnee FFiillee

You use the Fleet Orchestrator feature to install a clone file.

Note: To install a clone file manually on a single device using Fleet Orchestrator, disable FIPS

140-2. After the clone file installation is complete, you can reenable FIPS. If you are using the

file-sharing function of Fleet Orchestrator, you do not have to disable FIPS to receive clone files.

For information on FIPS settings, refer to FIPS 140-2.

To install a clone file manually:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. Click Create/Install File→Install File.

3. To install a clone file, in the Install Configuration File area, select Clone File.

4. To change the installation policy, in the Details area, for Installation Policy, click the link.

5. To select the clone file, in the Additional Options area, for File to Install, click Browse. Navigate to

the clone file that you want to install, then click Open.

264

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

6. To share the file, if file sharing is on, and you are installing the clone file on a publisher, select

Share This File.

7. Click Install.

8. Click OK.

Note: If the device is in a file-sharing group, you can set the device to receive clone files from

the file-sharing group. A clone file received from the file-sharing group overwrites a manually

installed clone file.

If you are using FIPS 140-2 and the file sharing function of Fleet Orchestrator:

• Devices using the FIPS security modes can share configuration files with other devices in a file-

sharing group, using the file-sharing function of the Fleet Orchestrator feature. Manual clone file

installation is not allowed.

• If you share the clone files, FIPS files on the subscribing devices remain on the devices. Set FIPS

on each device.

• The publisher device can enable or disable FIPS without affecting the subscriber devices. The

default setting is disabled.

• To set up a publisher device that is in FIPS mode already, configure settings individually, then

create the clone file to share. If you have a clone file to apply to a publisher device, enable FIPS

140-2 temporarily.

EExxtteennddeedd CClloonnee DDeettaaiillss

If there are clone files installed on your device, you can view information about the latest clone file

installations:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Configuration Files area, for Clone, click View.

3. To filter the list, select an option:

• To display all status information, select Show All.

• To display status information for areas that installed with exceptions, select Exceptions Only.

4. For information about exceptions, click Troubleshooting.

5. Click Close.

11--TToouucchh AAdddd--OOnn FFiilleess

A 1-Touch Add-On file contains all 1-Touch Apps that are on a device. You can use the 1-Touch Add-

On file to install the 1-Touch Apps from the originating device onto one or more devices.

Note: 1-Touch Add-On files work differently than clone files:

• When you install a clone file that includes 1-Touch Apps, the 1-Touch Apps in the clone file

replace the 1-Touch Apps that were on the device.

• When you install a 1-Touch Add-On file, the 1-Touch Apps are added to the 1-Touch Apps

on the device.

For information on creating 1-Touch Apps at the control panel, refer to 1-Touch Apps.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

265

Administrator Tools

CCrreeaattiinngg aa 11--TToouucchh AAdddd--OOnn FFiillee

After creating 1-Touch Apps at the control panel, you can create a 1-Touch Add-On file to add the 1-

Touch Apps to other devices. If you have not created any 1-Touch Apps, the 1-Touch Add-On file is

empty. To create a 1-Touch Add-On file:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. Click Create/Install File→Create a File.

3. In the Create Configuration File area, click 1-Touch Add-On File.

4. In the Details area, select options for the 1-Touch Add-On file:

• File Name: To use a unique filename, type a filename. The default filename is Add-on.dlm.

• Share This File: To share the file if the device is a publisher device in a file-sharing group,

select this option.

• Download This File: To save the 1-Touch Add-On file to your computer, select this option.

5. Click Create.

6. To download the 1-Touch Add-On file, right-click the file link, then click Save As or Save Target As.

Select a name and location for the file, then click Save. Do not change the .dlm file extension.

7. Click Close.

IInnssttaalllliinngg aa 11--TToouucchh AAdddd--OOnn FFiillee

To install a 1-Touch Add-On file:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. Click Create/Install File→Install a File.

3. In the Install Configuration File area, select Add-On File.

4. In the Additional Options area, for File to Install, click Browse. Navigate to the 1-Touch Add-On

file that you want to install, select the file, then click Open.

Note: All 1-Touch Add-On files have a file extension of .dlm.

5. To share the file, if file sharing is on, and you are installing the 1-Touch Add-On file on a publisher,

for Share This File, select the check box.

6. Click Install.

7. Click OK.

EExxtteennddeedd 11--TToouucchh AAdddd--OOnn DDeettaaiillss

If there are 1-Touch Add-On files installed on your device, you can view information about the 1-

Touch Add-On file installations:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Configuration Files area, for 1-Touch Add-On, click View.

3. To filter the list, select an option:

• To display the status information for all installed Add-On files, select Show All.

• To display the status information for Add-On files that installed with exceptions, select

Exceptions Only.

266

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

4. For information about exceptions, click Troubleshooting.

5. Click Close.

AAuuttoommaattiicc FFiillee SShhaarriinngg

The Fleet Orchestrator feature allows you to share files automatically between devices in your fleet.

The Fleet Orchestrator feature can share files from one device to other devices in a distribution tree.

To share files, set up a trust community. Devices in a trust community work together automatically,

without manual intervention. The Fleet Orchestrator feature uses the following terms:

• File Sharing Group: A set of devices set up to trust each other for sharing files. The file-sharing

group is referred to as a trust community.

• Tree: A collection of trusted devices organized into a hierarchy to balance the workload of sharing

files. You can set up more than one tree.

• Publisher: The top node of the tree. The publisher is the only device that can add, remove, or

update the files that are shared within the tree. The publisher device sets up and monitors the rest

of the tree. A publisher distributes files to subscribers in the tree.

• Subscriber: Any device in the tree besides the publisher. A subscriber pulls files from a distributor,

based on the subscriber device schedule.

• Distributor: An intermediate device that distributes files to other subscribers lower in the tree.

• Unassociated: A device that is part of the file-sharing group, but is not connected into the tree. An

unassociated device continues to share files with the subscriber devices, but the unassociated

device no longer receives new files. You can move devices from the tree so that they become

unassociated devices. You can reconnect unassociated devices to the distribution tree at a later

time.

You can set up the publisher device to share files with other linked devices within a trust community.

A trust community forms when the publisher device links to one or more devices. When file-sharing

groups are formed, the devices within the trust community can share files. The publisher device

maintains and manages the trust relationship for the devices in the tree. The trust relationship

remains intact until you revoke it.

CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn OOvveerrvviieeww

To set up file sharing, on the publisher device, you can arrange trusted devices into a hierarchy called

a tree. File sharing includes the following tasks:

• Designate a device as the publisher device of the tree.

• Designate a friendly name for the publisher device. The friendly name of the publisher device

becomes part of the name for the file sharing group. The file sharing group is called the trust

community.

• Create a tree structure for the file sharing group. To create a tree, add subscriber and distributor

devices to the file sharing group. The added devices form a trusted relationship.

Note: For customers who use Xerox

Device Manager or Xerox

CentreWare

Web

software: The publisher device in the trust relationship can be a printer, Xerox

Device

Manager, or Xerox

CentreWare

Web software

• Create download and installation schedules for each device.

• Make files available for distribution.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

267

Administrator Tools

Note: If two or more devices need a device-specific clone file or software upgrade, you can

create as many separate distribution trees as required.

On the publisher device, you can view the complete tree structure. On subscriber devices, you can view

only certain parts of the tree structure.

The Fleet Orchestrator pages for each device in a file sharing group have links to other devices in the

tree. To navigate to a device, click the link. As you add more devices, you can use this system to send

files to one device, then cascade the files to other devices.

Note: To find solutions to common problems for the file-sharing feature, refer to

Troubleshooting.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee SSeeccuurriittyy IInnssttaallllaattiioonn PPoolliiccyy ffoorr FFiillee SShhaarriinngg

You can use the file-sharing function of the Fleet Orchestrator feature to share configuration files in a

file-sharing group. The security installation policy for file sharing is enabled by default. When this

policy is enabled, a subscriber device receives files through file sharing, even if the separate cloning

and software upgrade security installation policies are disabled.

To change the security installation policy:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Security→Installation Policies.

2. Select or clear Allow File Sharing.

3. Click Apply.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg FFiillee SShhaarriinngg

You can use the Configure File Sharing feature to configure your printer as a Publisher device.

To set up file sharing:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Share Configuration Files area, click Configure File Sharing.

3. Click Publish Files & Manage File Sharing Group.

4. To set the preferred address, for Preferred Address, select the IP address or Fully Qualified Domain

Name of the publishing device.

5. Click Start Sharing.

6. Click Close.

File sharing is active. On the publishing device, the Share Configuration Files area on the Fleet

Orchestrator page provides information about the file sharing group.

MMaannaaggiinngg aa FFiillee SShhaarriinngg GGrroouupp

To manage a file sharing group from the publisher device:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Share Configuration Files area, for File Sharing Group, click Manage.

3. On the File Sharing page, in the Share Configuration Files area, select an option:

268

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

• Add Device: Refer to Adding a Device from a Publisher.

• Edit Selected: Refer to Editing a Device.

• Delete Selected: Refer to Deleting a Device.

• Advanced: This option allows you to perform advanced actions:

• Restrict File Sharing: Refer to Restricting File Sharing at the Publisher.

• Reset File Sharing Group: Refer to Resetting a File Sharing Group.

• Troubleshooting: Refer to Troubleshooting.

4. To change the management view, click Tree or Table. To manage more than one device at the

same time, use the Table view.

5. To rearrange the devices in the file sharing group, in the Tree view, select an option:

• Drag and drop a device into the publisher or distributor group.

• Drag and drop a device into the Unassociated Devices group. Refer to Unassociated Devices.

6. To view information about any device in the group, in the Tree view, select the device.

7. Click Close.

AAddddiinngg aa DDeevviiccee

You can add devices to the file sharing group from the publisher device. You can subscribe to the file

sharing group from a subscriber device.

Adding a Device from a Publisher

To add a device to the file-sharing group from the publisher device:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Share Configuration Files area, for File Sharing Group, click Manage.

3. Click Add Device.

4. Enter the host details for the subscriber:

a. For Host, select an address type:

• Host Name: Enter the Fully Qualified Domain Name.

• IPv4 Address: Enter the IPv4 Address.

b. Type the user name and the password for the subscriber device.

c. To check the details of the device that you are adding, click Get Device Details.

5. For the Download schedule, select options:

a. For Frequency, select Monthly, Weekly, or Daily.

b. For Time, choose a download time.

c. For Download Files From, select a device from which to download files.

You can select a publisher or a distributor device.

d. For Random Download Delay, select a number of minutes for the random delay..

Setting the Random Download Delay minutes ensures that devices do not pull configuration

files from a distributor device at the same time.

6. For Install Schedule, select options:

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

269

Administrator Tools

a. For Install Policy, select an option:

• Install New Files Only: Select this option to install configuration files only if they have

changed.

• Always Install File: Select this option to install files based on the install schedule. For

example, to ensure that settings are restored every day, you can reapply a clone file

containing security settings.

b. For Frequency, select Weekly, Daily, or Immediately. If you choose Weekly, select a day of

the week.

c. For Time, choose a time for the installation.

7. Click Add.

The Share Configuration Files page appears. You can use the page to manage the file-sharing

group:

• To view the details of any device, click the device that appears in the Tree.

• To show different views of the device information, select Tree or Table.

• To move devices within the Tree, drag and drop one device to another.

Note: You cannot change the publisher device, but you can change the

relationships between distributor and subscriber devices.

8. To return to the Share Configuration Files page, click Close.

Adding a Device from a Subscriber

To subscribe to a file-sharing group from a device that you want to act as a distributor or subscriber:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Share Configuration Files area, click Configure File Sharing.

3. In the Configuration File Sharing area, click Subscribe & Distribute Files.

4. In the Receiving Details area, enter the host details of the publishing device. For Host, select an

address type:

• Host Name: Enter the Fully Qualified Domain Name.

• IPv4 Address: Enter the IPv4 Address.

5. Click Start Sharing.

The Fleet Orchestrator feature displays the Add Device page of the publishing device. To add the

download schedule and installation settings for the subscriber device, use the Add Device page. For

more information, refer to Adding a Device from a Publisher.

EEddiittiinngg aa DDeevviiccee

From the publisher device, you can edit the download schedule and installation settings for subscriber

devices. To edit a device from the publisher:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Share Configuration Files area, click Manage.

3. On the File Sharing page, in the Devices area, select a device.

4. In the Share Configuration Files area, click Edit Selected.

270

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

5. To alter the download schedule, in the Download schedule area, select the options that you want

to change.

• Frequency: Select this option to change the frequency to Monthly, Weekly, or Daily.

• Time: Select this option to change the time of the download.

• Download Files From: Select this option to select a distribution device from the list.

• Random Download Delay: Select this option to change the time delay for the file download.

6. To alter the installation schedule, in the Install Schedule area, select the options that you want to

change.

• Install Policy: Select this option to set the installation policy. Choose Install New Files Only

or Always Install Files.

• Frequency: Select this option to change the frequency to Weekly, Daily, or Immediately. If

you select Weekly, select a day.

• Time: Select this option to change the download time.

7. Click Update.

The Share Configuration Files page appears. To change the file-sharing group, use the options on

this page.

8. To close the Share Configuration Files page, click Close.

DDeelleettiinngg aa DDeevviiccee

At the publisher device, to delete a subscriber device from the file sharing group:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Share Configuration Files area, click Manage.

3. On the File Sharing page, in the Devices area, select a device.

Note: To select multiple devices, choose Table view, then select the check box for each

device to be deleted.

4. Click Delete Selected, then confirm the deletion.

Deleting a Device Connection

The preferred method for deleting a device is from the publisher. For information, refer to Deleting a

Device.

Caution: Deleting the connection from a subscriber device is recommended only if you no

longer have access to the publisher. Deleting a device connection from a subscriber can cause

problems with the file sharing group.

At the subscriber device, to delete the connection to the file sharing group:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Share Configuration Files area, click View.

3. On the Receive Files page, in the Share Configuration Files area, click Delete Connection.

4. To confirm the deletion, click Delete.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

271

Administrator Tools

GGeettttiinngg FFiilleess NNooww oonn aa SSuubbssccrriibbeerr

From a subscriber device, you can get shared files at any time, using the Get Files Now feature. The

Get Files Now command downloads available files from the publisher or distributor, and installs the

files immediately.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Share Configuration Files area, click View.

3. On the Receive Files page, in the Share Configuration Files area, click Get Files Now.

4. Click Continue.

RReessttrriiccttiinngg FFiillee SShhaarriinngg

You can use the Restrict File Sharing feature to prohibit communication and sharing with other

devices in the file-sharing group. The restriction includes management controls such as add, edit, and

delete. Operations vary, depending on the device that you are navigating from. When you restrict

sharing, the restriction affects only the device that you are using.

Restricting File Sharing at the Publisher

To restrict the publishing device from communicating with other devices in the file-sharing group:

1. In the Embedded Web Server for the publishing device, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Share Configuration Files area, click Manage.

3. On the File Sharing page, in the Devices area, select a device.

4. In the Shared Configuration Files area, click Advanced→Restrict File Sharing.

5. Click Close.

Restricting File Sharing at a Subscriber

To restrict file sharing on a subscriber device:

1. In the Embedded Web Server for the subscriber device, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Share Configuration Files area, click View.

3. On the Receive Files page, in the Share Configuration Files area, click Restrict Sharing.

4. Click Close.

UUnnaassssoocciiaatteedd DDeevviicceess

Unassociated devices are connected to the file sharing group. Unassociated devices are not

associated with a distributor device, and do not receive updated configuration files.

A device is unassociated when:

• You drag a subscriber device to the Unassociated row within the Tree view.

• You add or edit a device, then select the Unassociated option for Download Files From. For details,

refer to Adding a Device from a Publisher or Editing a Device.

• The distributor device for the device is deleted.

272

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

Reconnecting Unassociated Devices

To reconnect an unassociated device to the file sharing group on the publisher:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Share Configuration Files area, click Manage.

3. On the File Sharing page, in the Devices area, using the Tree view, drag an unassociated device to

the publisher or a distributor device.

4. Click Close.

To edit the device after reconnecting it, refer to Editing a Device.

SSttooppppiinngg FFiillee SShhaarriinngg

To stop publishing a Clone or Add-On file from the publisher:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Configuration Files area, to stop file sharing, on the Clone or Add-On file, click Stop

Publishing File.

3. To confirm, click OK.

RReesseettttiinngg aa FFiillee SShhaarriinngg GGrroouupp

You can reset your file sharing group to delete your device connections and shared files. This action

allows you to create a different file sharing group, or to operate your fleet without file sharing.

Note: It is recommended to back up the publisher device before resetting the file sharing

group.

To reset your file sharing group:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Share Configuration Files area, click Manage.

3. On the File Sharing page, in the Shared Configuration Files area, click Advanced→Reset File

Sharing Group.

4. To confirm, click Reset.

Caution: The reset will delete all device connections and file sharing settings. This action

cannot be undone.

TTrroouubblleesshhoooottiinngg

Errors can occur when you are managing your devices. The best way to troubleshoot is to open the

publisher device and the subscriber device, then view the status of each device.

To view troubleshooting information from the publisher device:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Fleet Orchestrator.

2. In the Share Configuration Files area, click Manage.

3. On the File Sharing page, in the Share Configuration Files area, click

Advanced→Troubleshooting.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

273

Administrator Tools

Cloning

Clone files contain configuration settings from your device. You can install the clone file on other

printers, or keep the clone file as a backup of the configuration settings for your device. You can

create and install a clone file using the Embedded Web Server, or a USB Flash drive.

CCrreeaattiinngg aanndd IInnssttaalllliinngg aa CClloonnee FFiillee iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd

WWeebb SSeerrvveerr

To create and install a clone file in the Embedded Web Server, use the Fleet Orchestrator feature. For

details, refer to Fleet Orchestrator.

CCrreeaattiinngg aa CClloonnee FFiillee oonn aa UUSSBB FFllaasshh DDrriivvee

Before you begin, ensure that a USB port is enabled. For details, refer to Enabling or Disabling USB

Ports.

Note: To create or install a clone file on a USB Flash drive, log in as an administrator. For

details, refer to Accessing the Control Panel as a System Administrator.

To create a clone file on a USB Flash drive:

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device→Tools.

2. Touch General→Cloning.

3. Insert a USB Flash drive into a USB port on the printer, then touch Create Clone File.

The device creates a clone file called cloning.dlm in the root directory on the USB Flash drive. The

clone file contains all the printer configuration settings, except for unique settings, for example,

the IP address.

4. Click Close, then remove the USB Flash drive from the printer.

IInnssttaalllliinngg aa CClloonnee FFiillee ffrroomm aa UUSSBB FFllaasshh DDrriivvee

Before you begin, ensure that the Cloning feature is enabled. For details, refer to Setting the Security

Installation Policy for Cloning.

Note: If the Cloning feature is disabled, a clone file does not appear in the file list on the USB

Flash drive.

To install a clone file from a USB Flash drive:

1. Insert the USB Flash drive into a USB port on the printer.

2. At the control panel touch screen, touch Install File.

3. Select the cloning.dlm file, then touch Install.

4. To confirm the installation, touch Install.

5. When prompted, remove the USB Flash drive from the USB port.

Caution: To avoid corrupting the installation, do not remove the USB Flash drive until

directed to do so.

After the clone file installation, the device restarts, then prints a Configuration Report. The cloned

274

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

settings are effective when the device restarts.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

275

Administrator Tools

Language and Keyboard

You can configure the default language settings and the default keyboard for the device. You can also

configure the device to allow walk-up users to change the language on the Home screen for their

session. When this option is enabled, a globe icon appears on the device Home screen.

Note: A language or keyboard change at the device control panel is in effect for the current

user session only. The device language for the Home screen resets to the default language

specified for any of the following conditions:

• The user logs out

• The user presses Reset

• The session times out

SSeettttiinngg LLaanngguuaaggee aanndd KKeeyybbooaarrdd OOppttiioonnss

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg tthhee LLaanngguuaaggee aanndd KKeeyybbooaarrdd OOppttiioonnss iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd

WWeebb SSeerrvveerr

To configure the language and keyboard options in the Embedded Web Server:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Language & Keyboard.

2. To set the default display language, for Choose a Default Language, select a language.

3. To set the default display keyboard, for Choose a Default Keyboard, select a language.

4. To allow users to select a session language on the control panel Home screen, select Language

Option on Home Screen.

5. Click Apply.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg tthhee LLaanngguuaaggee aanndd KKeeyybbooaarrdd OOppttiioonnss aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll

PPaanneell

To configure the language and keyboard options at the control panel:

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings→General→Language / Keyboard Selection.

3. To set the default display language, select a language.

4. To set the default display keyboard:

a. Touch Keyboard Layout, then select a language.

Note: To view the keyboard in the selected language, touch View Keyboard.

b. Touch OK.

276

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

5. To allow users to select a session language on the control panel Home screen, for Language

Option on Home, select the toggle button.

Note: A check mark on the toggle button indicates Enabled.

6. Touch OK.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

277

Administrator Tools

Backup and Restore Settings

The Backup and Restore feature allows you to save device settings and to restore them. The device

automatically saves a backup of its configuration settings periodically. You can create a backup file of

your device settings manually, at any time. These backup files contain the specific settings for your

device.

You can store a manual backup file on the device or in an external folder. Xerox recommends that you

create a backup of your device settings when the device is operating as expected. This practice is

useful for restoring the device settings at any time, such as when the settings have changed in error.

You can restore the device settings from an automatic backup file or from a manually created backup

file that is stored locally or externally.

Note: Only backup files created on this device can be restored to this device. For details on

copying the settings from a device that is configured to one or more devices, refer to Cloning.

Before you begin, set the installation policy to allow backup file restoration.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee SSeeccuurriittyy IInnssttaallllaattiioonn PPoolliiccyy ffoorr BBaacckkuupp

aanndd RReessttoorree

To set the security installation policy for backup file restoration:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Backup & Restore Settings.

2. Set the installation policy as needed.

• To allow backup file installation, click Allow Installation.

• To prevent backup file installation, click Restrict Installation.

3. Click OK.

Note: To view all installation policies, click Security Installation Policy.

RReessttoorriinngg SSeettttiinnggss

You can restore settings from a backup file stored on the device or from a previously exported backup

file. When restoring from a file stored on the device, you can choose a manual backup file or an

automatic backup file. Automatic backup files are created daily. These backup files contain the state

of the settings at the time the automatic backup starts.

RReessttoorriinngg SSeettttiinnggss ffrroomm aa FFiillee SSttoorreedd oonn tthhee DDeevviiccee

To restore settings from a file stored on the device:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Backup & Restore Settings.

2. To locate the backup file that you want to restore, for Locally Stored Backup Files, use the

information in the Date/Time column and Type column.

3. In the Actions column, for the backup file, click Restore.

278

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

RReessttoorriinngg SSeettttiinnggss ffrroomm aann EExxppoorrtteedd BBaacckkuupp FFiillee

To restore settings from a previously exported backup file:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Backup & Restore Settings.

2. Click Browse or Choose File.

3. Navigate to the location of the file that you want to import, then click Open.

4. Click Import and Restore.

CCrreeaattiinngg aa MMaannuuaall BBaacckkuupp FFiillee tthhaatt iiss SSttoorreedd oonn tthhee

DDeevviiccee

Caution: If a manual backup file exists in the list, the new file overwrites it. The previous

manual backup file cannot be recovered.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Backup & Restore Settings.

2. For Create Backup, click Create Local. The new backup file appears in the list.

CCrreeaattiinngg aanndd DDoowwnnllooaaddiinngg aa BBaacckkuupp FFiillee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Backup & Restore Settings.

2. Click Create and Export.

3. To download the new backup file, click the file name link.

DDeelleettiinngg aa BBaacckkuupp FFiillee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Backup & Restore Settings.

2. For Locally Stored Backup Files, locate the file that you wish to remove, then click Delete.

Note: Only backup files that were created manually can be deleted. The device overwrites

the automatic backup files during the daily automatic backup.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

279

Administrator Tools

Billing Impression Mode

The Billing Impression Mode defines how the printer tracks impressions made on large-size paper,

such as A3 or tabloid size paper.

There are two modes.

• A3 Impressions counts all impressions equally.

• A4 Impressions counts large impressions (A3/Tabloid) as the A4/Letter equivalent.

A Xerox representative sets the Billing Impression Mode for your device.

CChhaannggiinngg tthhee BBiilllliinngg IImmpprreessssiioonn MMooddee

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Billing Impression Mode.

Note: A personal identification number (PIN) is required to change the billing impression

mode. To obtain a PIN, contact your Xerox representative and provide the sequence and

serial number information that appears on the Billing Impression Mode page.

3. For PIN, type the number that you obtained from your Xerox representative.

4. Click Apply.

280

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

Configuration Watchdog

The Configuration Watchdog feature monitors selected printer configuration settings. If a

configuration setting changes, the Configuration Watchdog resets that configuration setting. The

Configuration Watchdog feature reports reset configuration settings as remediations.

To use the Configuration Watchdog feature, configure the printer settings, select which configuration

settings to monitor, then set the monitoring frequency. You can specify contacts in the Notification

Settings page to notify you when the Configuration Watchdog feature resets printer settings.

Note: To prevent unintentional changes to settings and a device restart, configure the required

printer settings first, then select the configuration settings that you want to monitor.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg tthhee CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn WWaattcchhddoogg FFeeaattuurree

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Configuration Watchdog.

2. To check or edit the configuration settings for the feature that you want to monitor:

a. Ensure sure that feature check box for Monitored is clear.

b. Click link to feature, configure the setting, then click Apply, or Save.

When you save or close the feature setup page, you are returned to the Configuration

Watchdog feature page.

3. In the Monitored Features area, select the features that you want to monitor:

• To select an individual feature to monitor, select Monitored.

• To select all features, click Select All.

• To disable monitoring for all features, click Deselect All.

When you select one or more features, the Configuration Watchdog feature is enabled and the

Configuration Monitoring status is Active.

4. To specify how often the selected features are monitored, for Configuration Monitoring, select a

Frequency option.

5. To check feature compliance for monitored features at any time, click Check Now.

6. To view or select group notification settings, for Notifications, click Notification Settings.

7. Click Save.

The configuration setting for each monitored feature appears in the Current Compliance Setting

column.

The Notifications area shows the results of the latest check:

• Compliant: The monitored settings for the feature did not change since the last check.

• Remediated: The monitored settings for the feature changed since the last check, and were reset

to the configuration settings that you set for the printer.

• Failed to Remediate: The monitored settings for the feature changed since the last check, but the

Configuration Watchdog feature did not return the settings to the configuration settings that you

set for the printer.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

281

Administrator Tools

Address Books

An address book is a list of individual contacts, each associated with an email address, fax number, or

scan destination. You can configure the printer to use a Network Address Book or the Device Address

Book for email or Internet fax. The Network Address Book looks up addresses from an LDAP directory.

If you do not have an LDAP server, you can use the Device Address Book. If you configure both

address books, users are presented with a choice to use either address book at the control panel.

DDeevviiccee AAddddrreessss BBooookk

The Device Address Book is an address book that is stored on the device locally. You can configure the

printer to use the Device Address Book instead of a Network Address Book. You can add contacts

manually, import directly from emails that are sent to or from the device, or import them from a .csv

file.

VViieewwiinngg CCoonnttaaccttss

A contact is a user with an associated email address, fax number, or scan destination. Contacts can be

added to groups or marked as a Favorite.

To view a contact, in the Embedded Web Server, click the Address Book tab, then do one of the

following:

• To view all contacts in the address book, for Address Book, select All Contacts.

• To view a specific type of contact, for Email, Fax, or Scan To Destination, select Contacts.

• To view specific contact information, select the contact from the list.

MMaannuuaallllyy EEddiittiinngg tthhee AAddddrreessss BBooookk

You can use contacts, groups, or Favorites to edit and organize the address book manually.

Adding or Editing a Contact

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Address Book.

2. To add or edit a contact in the address book:

• To add a contact to the address book, click Add.

• To edit a contact in the address book, select the contact, then click Edit.

Note: If the Add button is unavailable, the address book has reached its limit. The Device

Address Book can contain up to 5000 contacts.

3. Type the contact information:

a. To associate a scan destination with this contact, for Scan To Destination, click the Plus (+)

button. For details, see the Help in the Embedded Web Server. For details about configuring

the Scan To Destination feature, refer to Configuring Scan To.

b. To mark a contact as a Favorite for email, fax, or scan to destination, click the star next to the

appropriate field. If you click the star next to Display Name, the contact becomes a Global

Favorite.

4. Click Save, or select Add Another Contact After Saving, then click Save.

282

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

Removing a Contact from the Address Book

To remove a contact from the address book, select the contact, click Delete, then click OK.

Deleting All Contacts from the Address Book

To delete all contacts from the address book, from the Management list, select Delete All.

Managing Groups

Groups allow you to send a file to multiple address book contacts at the same time. Unknown Groups

are unrecognized groups that were created in an address book that you imported from another

printer. You can convert unknown groups to a fax group, then add or remove contacts from the group

as needed.

Adding or Editing a Fax Recipient Group

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Address Book.

2. To add or edit a fax recipient group, for Fax, select Groups.

• To add a fax group, click Add Group.

• To edit a fax group, select the group, then click Edit Group.

3. For Group Name, type a name for the group.

4. To set this group as a favorite, for Add Fax Favorite, click the star icon.

5. To convert an unknown group to a fax group, for Group Location, select a group type.

6. To add a contact to the group, from the list of available contacts on the left, select the contact.

Contacts in the group appear in the Group Members list to the right. To add all available contacts,

click Add All.

7. To remove a contact from the group, from the Group Members list on the right, select the

contact. To remove all contacts, click Remove All.

8. Click Save.

Adding or Editing an Email Recipient Group

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Address Book.

2. To add or edit an email recipient group, for Email, select Groups.

• To add an email group, click Add Group.

• To edit an email group, select the group, then click Edit Group.

3. For Group Name, type a name for the group.

4. To set this group as a favorite, for Add Email Favorite, click the star icon.

5. To convert an unknown group to an email group, for Group Location, select a group type.

6. To add a contact to the group, from the list of available contacts on the left, select the contact.

Contacts in the group appear in the Group Members list to the right. To add all available contacts,

click Add All.

7. To remove a contact from the group, from the Group Members list on the right, select the

contact. To remove all contacts, click Remove All.

8. Click Save.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

283

Administrator Tools

Managing Favorites

You can mark contacts that you frequently use as favorites. A star next to a contact in the list

indicates a Favorite. You can mark a favorite as a Global Favorite for all services or as a Favorite for

email, fax, or scan to destinations.

To manage favorites:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Address Book.

2. To edit a contact marked as a Favorite:

a. Select the contact from the Favorites list for the appropriate section, then click Edit Favorite.

b. Edit the contact information as needed, then click Save.

3. To clear a contact marked as a Favorite:

Select the contact from the Favorites list for the appropriate section, then click Delete Favorite.

4. Click OK.

IImmppoorrttiinngg AAddddrreesssseess UUssiinngg EEmmaaiill

The Import Using Email feature adds email addresses to the Device Address Book from emails sent to

the printer. Use this feature to populate the address book without manually typing address

information. You can allow users to send encrypted email by storing encryption certificates from

received signed email.

Note: Xerox recommends that you disable the Import Using Email feature after the Device

Address Book is populated sufficiently. When this feature is enabled, the Device Address Book

can fill quickly. For example, if you send an email message to the printer containing 30

recipient addresses in the CC field, and you allow the printer to add addresses in the CC field,

all 30 addresses are added to the address book.

Before You Begin

Configure the POP3 settings. For details, refer to POP3.

Configuring Import Using Email

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Address Book.

2. From the Management list, select Import Using Email.

3. For Enablement, select On.

4. In the Policies area, for Email Type, select an option:

• To allow the device to add the email addresses of all senders to the Device Address Book,

select All Emails.

• To add email addresses contained in emails sent with a digital signature only, select Only

Signed Emails.

5. To save digital certificates sent with signed email messages, select Import encryption certificate

from signed emails.

6. To add email addresses to the Device Address Book from the From, To, and CC fields, for Add all

recipients contained in the following email fields, select one or more fields.

7. Click Save.

284

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

IImmppoorrttiinngg DDeevviiccee AAddddrreessss BBooookk ffrroomm FFiillee

You can import address book contacts from a .csv file.

Note:

• The device recognizes the second row in the .csv file as the first address book entry. The

first row contains headings for the information in each column.

• To view an example of the appropriate format for the .csv file, download a sample file.

Importing an Address Book File

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Address Book.

2. From the Management list, select Import from File.

3. For Select an Address Book file to Import, click Browse or Choose File, then select your .csv file.

Click Open or Choose.

4. For Record Delimiter, select an option.

5. Some device manufacturers allow you to export address book contacts to a .csv file, but contact

information is enclosed in brackets. To remove brackets when importing this type of .csv file,

select Remove brackets from the beginning and end of text fields.

6. For Existing Contact Management, select an option:

• Add new contacts to the existing Device Address Book: This option adds user information

from the .csv file to the existing user information stored in the database.

• Replace existing Device Address Book with the new contacts: This option replaces all user

information in the database with user information from your .csv file.

7. Click Upload File.

8. For Verify Address Book Field Mappings, click Import.

9. To upload a different address book file or revise the settings, click Change File/Options.

10. If the current address book fields match exactly the imported file fields, the headings do not

appear. To see the mapped fields, click Show Headings List.

11. If the current address book fields do not match exactly the imported file fields, the headings

appear. The unmapped fields are highlighted. To assign a mapping to the field, select a heading

from the list.

12. Click Import Address Book.

EEddiittiinngg tthhee DDeevviiccee AAddddrreessss BBooookk aass aa ..ccssvv FFiillee

To manage many addresses, you can create and edit a list in a spreadsheet application. You can save

the list as a .csv file and upload it to the printer.

Downloading a Sample .csv File

To back up your current address book, you can export the address book as a .csv file. To view an

example of the appropriate format for the .csv file, download a sample file. You can use the sample

file as template, replacing the existing values with your own information.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Address Book.

2. From the Management list, select Download Sample.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

285

Administrator Tools

3. For Delimiter, select an option.

4. Select Export in Legacy Mode as needed. Legacy Mode omits favorites, groups, fax, and Scan To

Destination contact information. Display Name is changed to Friendly Name, allowing you to

import the file directly to an older Xerox

printer without mapping address book fields.

5. To exclude Email, Scan to Destination, Fax, or Internet Fax, clear the option.

6. Click Download.

Exporting an Address Book File

To back up your current address book, or to import it to another device, you can export your current

address book contacts as a .csv file.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Address Book.

2. From the Management list, select Export.

3. For Delimiter, select an option.

4. Select Export in Legacy Mode as needed. Legacy Mode omits favorites, groups, fax, and Scan To

Destination contact information. Display Name is changed to Friendly Name, allowing you to

import the file directly to an older Xerox

printer without mapping address book fields.

5. Click Export.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg DDeevviiccee AAddddrreessss BBooookk SSeeccuurriittyy SSeettttiinnggss

You can allow users to edit the Device Address Book, or restrict editing to system administrators only.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Address Book.

2. To set user permissions to view and manage the address book, from the Management list, select

Security: User Permissions.

3. Select an option:

• To require users to log in as an administrator to edit the address book, select Only System

Administrators.

• To allow anyone to edit the address book, select Open to All Users.

4. Click Save.

NNeettwwoorrkk AAddddrreessss BBooookk

The Network Address Book looks up addresses from an LDAP directory. If you do not have an LDAP

server, you can use the Device Address Book.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg tthhee NNeettwwoorrkk AAddddrreessss BBooookk ffoorr EEmmaaiill

Before you begin, configure LDAP server settings. For details, refer to LDAP.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Email→Setup→Address Books.

2. In the Policies area, for Use Network Address Book (LDAP) to allow users to access this address

book, select Yes.

3. Click Apply.

286

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg tthhee NNeettwwoorrkk AAddddrreessss BBooookk ffoorr IInntteerrnneett FFaaxx

Before you begin, configure LDAP server settings. For details, refer to LDAP.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Internet Fax→Setup→Address Books.

2. In the Policies area, for Use Network Address Book to allow users to access this address book,

select Yes.

3. Click Apply.

LLAANN FFaaxx AAddddrreessss BBooookk

The LAN Fax feature has a separate directory for storing and managing addresses. For details about

using or configuring the LAN Fax address book, refer to the driver help.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

287

Administrator Tools

Font Management Utility

The Xerox

Font Management Utility is a utility that allows you to manage fonts for one or more

printers on your network. You can use the font management utility to download your company

branded fonts or unicode fonts to support multiple languages on your printer. You can add, delete, or

export fonts. You can select printers in the utility printer list that you want to display.

To download Xerox

Font Management Utility, go to www.support.xerox.com, enter your product

name, then select Drivers and Downloads.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all printers. Some options apply only to a specific

printer model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

288

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

Network Logs

Log files are text files of recent printer activity that are created and stored in the printer. Log files are

used to monitor network activity or troubleshoot network problems. A Xerox customer support

representative can interpret the encrypted format log files.

DDoowwnnllooaaddiinngg aa NNeettwwoorrkk LLoogg

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup→Network Logs.

2. For Information Level, select options as needed. To include NVM data with network log push,

select the check box.

3. Click Save.

4. Click Start Download.

5. After the information processes, click Download File Now, then save the files to your computer.

6. To send files to Xerox for diagnostic purposes, click Send.

Note: A log identifier is required for service of a Xerox device. After logs are sent to Xerox,

save the log identifer.

DDoowwnnllooaaddiinngg aa NNeettwwoorrkk LLoogg ttoo aa UUSSBB FFllaasshh DDrriivvee

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Network Settings→Network Logs.

3. Insert a USB Flash drive into the USB port on the back of the device, then touch Download Log

Files.

Caution: Do not remove the USB Flash drive until the download completes. If you remove

the USB Flash drive during the download process, the USB Flash drive can become

damaged.

When the download completes, a confirmation message appears.

4. Remove the USB Flash drive, then touch Close.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

289

Administrator Tools

Restarting the Device in the Embedded Web

Server

To restart the device, log in as a system administrator. For details, refer to Accessing the Embedded

Web Server as a System Administrator. To restart the device:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Home.

2. At the bottom of the page, click Reboot Device, then click OK.

The device restarts.

290

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

Restarting the Device at the Control Panel

Using Software Resets to restart the device is faster than powering the device off and on. Restarting

the device can take up to five minutes during which time the Embedded Web Server is not available.

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Troubleshooting.

3. Touch Resets.

4. Touch Software Resets.

5. For Reset Options, select the type of reset that you want.

• All Software

Note: The All Software option has the same function as pressing Power on the device and

then touching Restart.

• Network Software

• Copy Software

6. Touch Restart.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

291

Administrator Tools

Taking the Device Offline

To prevent the device from sending or receiving jobs over the network at any given time, you can take

the device offline. Taking the device offline allows you to perform device maintenance without jobs

being sent to the device. When the device is offline, any apps, such as Workflow Scanning, are

unavailable.

1. At the control panel touch screen, log in as Administrator.

2. Touch Device, then touch Tools.

3. Touch Network Settings.

4. Touch Online / Offline.

5. Touch Online or Offline.

6. Touch Close.

7. To log out, touch Admin.

Note: When you are finished, ensure that you put the device back online to allow jobs to

process.

292

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

Erase Customer Data

You can use the Erase Customer Data feature to prepare a printer for removal from the network. This

feature clears all customer-specific information including jobs, configurations, and settings from the

printer. Printer-specific values, such as total images and supply counters, are not cleared.

Note: When the Erase Customer Data process begins, the device is unavailable for use.

Caution: The erase process permanently removes all jobs, customer configurations, and data.

The device IP address options are also reset to factory default, which typically changes the

device IP address.

To erase customer data:

1. To configure the device to print a status report after it completes the erase process, load paper in

the device.

2. To prevent customer data from reaching the device, disconnect the device from the network. If

necessary, disconnect the Ethernet cable.

3. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

4. Touch Device Settings→General→Erase Customer Data.

5. Touch Erase Customer Data→Erase All Customer Data.

6. Touch Confirm.

Caution: Do not power off the device during the erase process. Doing so can damage the

device.

Note:

• The erase customer data process restarts the device and displays messages. The device

does not require your attention during the process.

• The erase process takes 30–50 minutes to complete. When the process completes, a

report prints.

7. Power off the device, then disconnect the power cord and other cables from the back of the

device.

The device is ready for moving.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

293

Administrator Tools

Resetting the User Interface to Factory Default

Settings

Note: This procedure resets only a limited number of user interface settings. To clear all

customer-specific settings, refer to Erase Customer Data.

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings, then touch Reset UI to Factory Settings.

3. Touch Restart.

294

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

Reverting to Previous Settings

You can revert your device to the settings created during the most recent software upgrade:

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings→General→Revert to Previous settings.

3. Touch Restart.

The device restarts and reverts to the previous settings.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

295

Administrator Tools

Updating the Device Software

When Xerox releases a new version of software for your device, you can install the software upgrade

file using the Embedded Web Server or a USB Flash drive.

UUppddaattiinngg tthhee SSooffttwwaarree iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb SSeerrvveerr

To install a software upgrade file in the Embedded Web Server, use the Fleet Orchestrator feature. For

details, refer to Fleet Orchestrator.

MMaannuuaallllyy UUppddaattiinngg tthhee SSooffttwwaarree UUssiinngg aa UUSSBB FFllaasshh

DDrriivvee

When a new version of software is available, download the software upgrade file to your computer,

then copy the file to a USB Flash drive.

To install a software upgrade file from a USB Flash drive, log in as an administrator. For details, refer

to Accessing the Control Panel as a System Administrator.

To install the software upgrade file:

1. Insert the USB Flash drive into a USB port on the printer.

2. At the control panel touch screen, touch Install File.

3. Browse for the software upgrade .dlm file, then touch Install.

4. To confirm the file installation, touch Install.

5. When you are prompted, remove the USB Flash drive from the USB port.

Caution: To avoid corrupting the installation, do not remove the USB Flash drive until

directed to do so.

The device installs the software upgrade file. After the upgrade completes, the device restarts, then

prints a Configuration Report.

296

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

Adjusting Color, Image, and Text Detection

Settings

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Device Settings.

3. Touch Input.

4. Adjust how the printer detects color, images, and text in original documents.

• Auto Color Detection: This option allows you to customize the bias based on the type of

original documents being scanned and the output required.

• Scan from Document Glass: This option selects the bias toward color or monochrome

when scanning using the document glass.

• Scan from Document Feeder: This option selects the bias toward color or monochrome

for the document feeder.

• Photo/Text Settings: This option selects the bias toward photo or text quality based on which

quality is more important.

5. Touch OK.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a

specific device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

297

Administrator Tools

298

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Administrator Tools

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

299

Customization and Expansion

This chapter contains:

• Xerox Extensible Interface Platform.......................................................................................... 300

• Auxiliary Interface Kit .............................................................................................................. 303

• Driver Download Link ............................................................................................................... 304

• Customizing the Home Screen in the Embedded Web Server .................................................... 305

• Customizing the Home Screen at the Control Panel.................................................................. 306

• 1-Touch Apps ........................................................................................................................... 309

• Setting Defaults and Policies for Scan Services ......................................................................... 310

• Creating a Custom Scan App.................................................................................................... 311

• Weblet Management ............................................................................................................... 314

• Managing Diagnostics and Usage Information ........................................................................ 317

• Editing Support Settings .......................................................................................................... 318

Xerox Extensible Interface Platform

The Xerox Extensible Interface Platform

allows independent software vendors and partners to

develop personalized and customized document management solutions. These solutions can be

integrated and accessed directly from the printer control panel. These solutions can leverage existing

printer infrastructure and databases. Examples of applications include ScanFlow Store, Scan to PC

Desktop, Equitrac Office, and others. For more information on Xerox Extensible Interface Platform

applications for your printer, contact your Xerox representative or refer to www.xerox.com/en-us/

office/eip on the Xerox website.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg EExxtteennssiibbllee SSeerrvviicceess

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Extensible Service Setup→Settings.

3. Ensure that the following services are enabled on the HTTP Web Services page:

• Extensible Service Registration Web service

• Web services required by solutions that are being installed

4. To enable Extensible Service Registration and other services, for Extensible Service Registration,

click Edit.

5. If your Xerox Extensible Interface Platform

application requires the user password, for Enable

Extensible Services, select Export password to Extensible Services.

6. For Browser Settings:

a. Select Enable the Extensible Services Browser.

b. To check the certificates on the remote server, select Verify server certificates.

c. To show the control panel keypad within EIP apps, select Show based on individual app

setting. To hide the control panel keypad within EIP apps, select Hide within all apps.

7. For EIP Advanced Setting, enter the number of times that EIP applications are allowed to load

before the EIP Browser restarts.

8. Configure Proxy Server settings as needed.

a. For Proxy Server, from the list, select Proxy.

b. To configure HTTP proxy server settings, in the HTTP area, for Enabled, click Edit.

c. To use the same proxy server for HTTPS, select Use settings for all protocols.

d. To use a separate proxy server for Xerox Extensible Interface Platform

applications that use

HTTPS, for HTTP, HTTPS, select Edit.

e. To apply the HTTP proxy server settings to the HTTPS proxy server, select Use settings for all

protocols.

f. For Bypass Proxy Rules, type the required values, and separate them with commas.

9. Click Apply.

300

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Customization and Expansion

EExxtteennssiibbllee SSeerrvviiccee SSccaann SSeettttiinnggss

You can configure EIP settings that are specific to scan applications.

To configure scan settings:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Extensible Service Setup→Scan Settings.

3. For Scan Workflow Management Settings, select one or both options:

• Require System Administrator Authentication for workflow operations: Enabling this option

allows you to apply a security measure that restricts access to scan workflows on the device.

• Include user network filing account password in the exported workflow: Enabling this

option includes the user network filing account password during a workflow export operation.

Some scan workflows require this password. Disabling this option allows the user to view a

workflow without exposing a password.

4. To enable Remote Start, for Start Job via Remote Program, click On.

5. Click Apply.

EExxtteennssiibbllee SSeerrvviiccee DDiiaaggnnoossttiiccss

The Diagnostics page displays device connectivity information. Connectivity settings directly impact

EIP applications. Improper settings can impair functionality for these applications. You can use this

page to diagnose problems with tests for the following settings:

• Proxy: These settings allow the device to reach external networks.

• DNS: These settings allow the device to convert device names into IP addresses.

• IP: These settings allow the device to reach the local network.

To test connectivity for a connection type:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Extensible Service Setup→Diagnostics.

3. For a connection type, click Test.

EExxtteennssiibbllee SSeerrvviiccee SSeettuupp ffoorr AAppppss

The Extensible Services Apps page lists the EIP applications that are registered on the device. You can

use this page to test the application settings and to test device access to specific URLs.

AAcccceessssiinngg EExxtteennssiibbllee SSeerrvviicceess SSeettuupp ffoorr AAppppss

To access Extensible Services setup for apps:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Extensible Service Setup→Apps.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

301

Customization and Expansion

TTeessttiinngg IInnddiivviidduuaall AApppplliiccaattiioonn SSeettttiinnggss

To test individual application settings:

1. For the EIP application to be checked, click Test. The results for the application appear in a new

page.

2. Follow the instructions on the results page as appropriate.

TTeessttiinngg SSppeecciiffiicc UURRLLss

To test specific URLs:

1. For Test Connection to URL, enter the URL that you want to test.

Note: To resize the URL box, drag the lower-right corner.

2. Click Test. The results for the tested URL appear in a new page.

3. Follow the instructions on the results page as appropriate.

EExxtteennssiibbllee SSeerrvviiccee AAddvvaanncceedd SSeettuupp

The Extensible Service Advanced Setup page displays the device memory allocation, and usage for

the EIP Browser. You can use this page to determine memory usage for EIP applications and

appropriate memory allocation for the EIP Browser.

To configure memory allocation for the EIP Browser:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Extensible Service Setup→Memory Profile.

3. To update the memory allocation and usage information, click Refresh.

4. To change the EIP Browser memory allocation, for Memory Allocation Setup, select an option.

5. Click Apply.

302

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Customization and Expansion

Auxiliary Interface Kit

An Auxiliary Interface Kit, or a Foreign Device Interface Kit, is a third-party access and accounting

device. These kits, such as a coin operated printer accessory or a card reader, can be attached to the

printer. Installation instructions are included with the Foreign Device Interface Kit.

To configure your device to use the Auxiliary Access Accounting method:

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch Accounting Settings.

3. Touch Accounting Mode→Auxiliary Access.

4. Touch Auxiliary Device Type, then select your device type.

5. Touch OK.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

303

Customization and Expansion

Driver Download Link

The driver installation link appears on the Home, Print, and Support pages in the Embedded Web

Server. This link accesses the default driver and downloads page for your printer on the Xerox Support

website. You can hide or customize this link to access a location on your network where you post

driver installation files for users.

CCuussttoommiizziinngg oorr HHiiddiinngg tthhee DDrriivveerr DDoowwnnllooaadd LLiinnkk

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→General Setup.

2. Click Configure Driver Links.

3. To hide the link, for Display Option, select Hide Link.

4. To direct users to the location for device drivers on your network, for Software Links, select

Custom Link, then type a link.

5. To save the new settings, click Save. To retain the previous settings, click Undo.

304

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Customization and Expansion

Customizing the Home Screen in the Embedded

Web Server

In the Embedded Web Server, you can show, hide, or change the display order of apps on the control

panel touch screen.

• To customize app features, refer to Customizing the Home Screen at the Control Panel.

• To create a 1–Touch App, refer to Creating a 1-Touch App.

DDiissppllaayyiinngg oorr HHiiddiinngg AAppppss

You can show or hide apps on the control panel touch screen.

Note: You cannot hide apps that are required for basic device operation.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Display.

2. Click Show/Hide.

• To select all apps in the list to appear on the touch screen, click Show All.

• To hide all apps in the list so that no apps appear on the touch screen, click Hide All.

• To select individual apps to appear on the touch screen, for Displayed, select the apps that

you want to appear.

3. Click Apply.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee DDiissppllaayy OOrrddeerr ffoorr AAppppss

You can arrange the order in which apps appear on the control panel touch screen.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Display.

2. Click the Order tab.

3. Select, drag, and drop the buttons on the screen until they are in the preferred order.

4. Click Apply.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

305

Customization and Expansion

Customizing the Home Screen at the Control

Panel

At the Control Panel, to customize the Home screen or app features, log in as an administrator. For

details, refer to Accessing the Control Panel as a System Administrator.

RReeaarrrraannggiinngg AAppppss oonn tthhee HHoommee SSccrreeeenn

1. At the printer control panel, press the Home button.

2. Scroll to the bottom, then touch Customize.

3. Touch Customize Home.

4. Touch and hold the required app.

5. Drag the app to the new location, then release the app.

6. Touch Done.

7. Verify that the apps appear in the correct location on the Home screen.

DDiissppllaayyiinngg oorr HHiiddiinngg aann AApppp oonn tthhee HHoommee SSccrreeeenn

1. At the printer control panel, press the Home button.

2. Scroll to the bottom, then touch Customize.

3. Touch Customize Home.

4. To display an installed, but hidden app:

a. Touch +.

b. Touch the app that you want to appear on the control panel.

c. Touch Done.

5. To hide an installed app:

a. For the desired app, touch X.

b. At the prompt, touch Hide.

c. Touch Done.

6. Verify that only the desired apps appear on the Home screen.

DDeelleettiinngg aann AApppp ffrroomm tthhee HHoommee SSccrreeeenn

1. At the printer control panel, press the Home button.

2. Scroll to the bottom, then touch Customize.

3. Touch Customize Home.

4. To delete an installed app:

a. For the desired app, touch X.

306

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Customization and Expansion

b. At the prompt, touch Delete.

Note: Deletion is permanent. You cannot restore a deleted app.

c. Touch Done.

5. Verify that only the desired apps appear on the Home screen.

CCuussttoommiizziinngg AApppp FFeeaattuurreess

To customize the Feature list for an app:

1. At the printer control panel, press the Home button.

2. Touch the app required.

3. Scroll to the bottom, then touch Customize.

4. Touch Customize Feature List.

5. Touch the particular option.

• To hide a feature, for the required feature, touch the Eye icon. To signify that the feature is

hidden, the Eye icon appears with a line across it.

• To show a feature, for the required feature, touch the Eye icon. To signify that a feature is

visible, the Eye icon appears with no line across it.

6. To reorder the menu features, touch and drag the features into the appropriate order.

7. To save the current configuration, touch Done.

CCuussttoommiizziinngg AApppp DDeeffaauulltt SSeettttiinnggss

To customize the default settings for an app:

1. At the printer control panel, press the Home button.

2. Touch the app required.

3. Configure the required default settings.

4. Touch Save.

5. Touch Save Settings as Default. The new settings override the previous default settings.

RReemmoovviinngg AApppp CCuussttoommiizzaattiioonn SSeettttiinnggss

To remove the current app customization settings:

1. At the printer control panel, press the Home button.

2. Touch the app required.

3. Scroll to the bottom, then touch Customize.

4. Touch Remove App Customizations.

5. At the prompt, touch Remove.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

307

Customization and Expansion

RReemmoovviinngg CCuussttoommiizzaattiioonn ffrroomm tthhee HHoommee SSccrreeeenn

To remove customization from the Home screen:

1. At the printer control panel, press the Home button.

2. Scroll to the bottom, then touch Customize.

3. Select an option:

• Remove Home Customization: This option removes all customization from the Home screen.

Note: This option can cause deletion of 1-Touch, EIP, Single Touch, and Weblet apps.

• Remove All Customizations: This option removes all customizations for the device.

Caution: The Remove Home Customization option removes customization from the

Home screen, and other customized device settings.

4. At the prompt, touch Remove.

Apps appear in their default location on the Home screen.

5. Touch Done.

308

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Customization and Expansion

1-Touch Apps

You can use 1-Touch Apps to create individual apps for completing frequent jobs or tasks. After you

create a 1-Touch App, the app appears on the printer Home screen.

Note: To create or modify a 1-Touch App, log in as an administrator. For details, refer to

Accessing the Control Panel as a System Administrator.

• To create a 1-Touch App, refer to Creating a 1-Touch App.

• To change the order of 1-Touch Apps on the Home screen, refer to Rearranging Apps on the Home

Screen.

• To display or hide a 1-Touch App, refer to Displaying or Hiding an App on the Home Screen.

• To delete a 1-Touch App, refer to Deleting an App from the Home Screen.

CCrreeaattiinngg aa 11--TToouucchh AApppp

To create a 1-Touch App:

1. At the printer control panel, press the Home button.

2. Touch the app required.

3. Select the job settings.

4. Scroll to the bottom, then touch Create 1-Touch App.

5. Touch the Enter App Name entry field, then use the keypad to enter a name. Touch Next.

6. Touch a color scheme option for your 1-Touch App, then touch Next.

7. Touch an icon that best suits the 1-Touch App that you are creating, then touch Next.

8. Touch the Enter App Instructions entry field, then use the keypad to enter instructions for the

user. Touch Next.

When the 1-Touch App is selected, the instructions appear at the top of the screen.

9. Touch the app settings required.

• Allow Editing Quantity: Use this option to allow users to view and update the quantity.

• Show Feature Settings: Use this option to display a summary of the features programmed

for the 1-Touch App.

10. Touch Done.

The 1-Touch App appears on the Home screen.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

309

Customization and Expansion

Setting Defaults and Policies for Scan Services

You can select the case of the default file name extensions for scan services. Some operating systems

are case-sensitive. For example, a case-sensitive system treats myscan.PDF and myscan.pdf as two

different files.

You can select a duplex color scanning option based on your requirements for scan speed and image

quality.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a specific

device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee FFiilleennaammee EExxtteennssiioonn

To set the case for filename extensions:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Scan Services→Defaults & Policies.

3. For Filename Extension, select Lower Case or Upper Case.

4. Click Save.

SSeettttiinngg DDuupplleexx CCoolloorr SSccaannnniinngg OOppttiioonnss

To set the duplex color scanning option:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Scan Services→Defaults & Policies.

3. For Duplex Color Scanning Options, select an option:

• Select fastest scanning speed: This option allows scanning at maximum speed.

• Select best auto-color detection accuracy: This option can affect scanning speed in 2-sided

auto-color scanning for resolutions of 300 dpi and below.

• Select best auto-color detection accuracy and color image quality: This option can affect

scanning speed in 2-sided auto-color scanning and full-color scanning for resolutions of 300

dpi and below.

4. Click Save.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a

specific device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

310

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Customization and Expansion

Creating a Custom Scan App

You can create a custom scan app and associate the service with a scan workflow. You can also

customize the icons and text that appears on the device touch screen.

Note:

• After you create an app, you can edit the description but not the name of the app.

• You can create up to 10 apps.

• The app does not appear on the control panel touch screen until you design your app and

select a scan workflow for your app.

CCrreeaattiinngg aa CCuussttoomm SSiinnggllee--TToouucchh SSccaann AApppp OOvveerrvviieeww

• Create the app.

• Customize the appearance of your app. Refer to Customizing the Appearance of Your App.

• Associate a scan workflow with your app. Refer to Associating a Scan Workflow with Your App.

• Lock or hide the app on the control panel as needed. Refer to Setting Access Permissions for Your

App.

• Set the app as the default screen that appears on the touch screen as needed. Refer to Setting

Your App as the Default Screen on the Device Touch Screen.

CCrreeaattiinngg aa SSiinnggllee--TToouucchh SSccaann AApppp

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→Single-Touch App.

3. Click Create.

4. On the New Service page, type a name and description for the app.

5. Click Create.

CCuussttoommiizziinngg aanndd CCoonnffiigguurriinngg YYoouurr AApppp

CCuussttoommiizziinngg tthhee AAppppeeaarraannccee ooff YYoouurr AApppp

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps.

2. Click Workflow Scanning→Single-Touch App.

3. In the App Configuration area, for Design Your App, click Edit.

4. On the Design Your App page, click the Service Design tab.

5. For Theme, select a color.

6. For App Display Name, type the text that you want to appear in the header.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

311

Customization and Expansion

7. For Instructional Text, type instructions for users.

Note:

Line breaks are supported. For example, you can type:

Load documents and press Start.

File original documents in the file cabinet in Room 423.

Scanned files are sent to the following destinations:

ServerA:\business_records

ServerB:\scan_archives

8. Click Apply.

9. Continue to Customizing Additional Features.

CCuussttoommiizziinngg AAddddiittiioonnaall FFeeaattuurreess

1. On the Design Your App page, click the Additional Features tab.

2. To allow users to use the Build Job option, select Display Build Job.

• To enable Build Job by default, select On by default.

Note: The On by default setting overrides the default setting specified in the scan workflow

that you associate with the app.

• For Feature Label / Instructional Text, type instructions for users.

3. To allow users to configure Output Color, 2-Sided Scanning, Original Type, or File Name settings,

select Display Image Settings.

Note: The scan workflow specifies the default image settings associated with the service.

4. Click Apply.

Note: Not all options listed are supported on all devices. Some options apply only to a

specific device model, configuration, operating system, or driver type.

5. Continue to Specifying the Image File for the Custom App Icon.

SSppeecciiffyyiinngg tthhee IImmaaggee FFiillee ffoorr tthhee CCuussttoomm AApppp IIccoonn

You can specify the icon image file that you want to represent the app on the Apps Home page.

1. On the Design Your App page, click the App Icon tab.

2. For App Icon, click Browse or Choose File.

3. Select a 160 x 120 pixel .png file that represents the app on the control panel touch screen.

4. Click Open or Choose.

5. Click Apply.

6. Click Close.

312

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Customization and Expansion

AAssssoocciiaattiinngg aa SSccaann WWoorrkkffllooww wwiitthh YYoouurr AApppp

1. In the App Configuration area, for Choose Scan Workflow, click Edit.

2. From the list, select a Scan Workflow.

Note: If you select Default Workflow, configure the default workflow, then add at least one

file destination to the workflow. Refer to Configuring the Default Workflow. For information

on creating and editing scan workflows, refer to Managing Scan Workflows.

3. Click Save.

SSeettttiinngg AAcccceessss PPeerrmmiissssiioonnss ffoorr YYoouurr AApppp

1. In the App Configuration area, for Define App Access Permissions, click Edit.

2. Click the Non-Logged-In Users tab.

3. For Permission Role, for Non-Logged-In User, click Edit.

4. Click the Apps & Tools tab.

5. For your custom app, select an option:

• To allow users to use the app, select Allowed.

• To restrict users from using the app, select Not Allowed.

• To restrict users from using the app and hide the app from the control panel touch screen,

select Not Allowed and Hidden.

6. Click Apply.

7. Click Close.

SSeettttiinngg YYoouurr AApppp aass tthhee DDeeffaauulltt SSccrreeeenn oonn tthhee DDeevviiccee TToouucchh

SSccrreeeenn

1. In the App Configuration area, for Set Entry Screen Default, click Edit.

2. Click the Non-Logged-In Users tab.

3. For Default Walkup Screen, from the list, select your custom app.

4. Click Save.

LLoocckkiinngg oorr HHiiddiinngg YYoouurr AApppp ffrroomm AAppppeeaarriinngg oonn tthhee

CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

To lock or hide the app from appearing on the control panel, configure Apps and Tools user

permissions for the role of non-logged-in users. On the Configure Your App page, for Define App

Access Permissions, click Edit. For details, refer to User Permissions.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

313

Customization and Expansion

Weblet Management

Weblets are small HTML-based and JavaScript-based applications that you can install on the printer

to customize the touch screen. You can download weblets from www.office.xerox.com.

SSeettttiinngg tthhee SSeeccuurriittyy PPoolliiccyy ffoorr UUnneennccrryypptteedd WWeebblleettss

You can set a security policy for weblet encryption. Enable this setting to allow installation of

unencrypted weblets on the device. Disable this setting to require encryption for installation of all

weblets on the device.

To set the security installation policy for weblet installation:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Properties→Apps→Custom Apps→Weblet Management.

2. For Weblet Settings, select an option:

• To allow installation of unencrypted weblets on the device, select the Allow unencrypted

Weblets to be installed on this device check box.

• To restrict weblet installation on the device to encrypted weblets only, clear the Allow

unencrypted Weblets to be installed on this device check box.

3. Click Apply.

IInnssttaalllliinngg aa WWeebblleett

1. In the Embedded Web Server, clickProperties→Apps→Custom Apps→Weblet Management.

2. Click Choose File or Browse, navigate to a .weblet file, then click Choose or Open.

3. Click Install Weblet.

EEnnaabblliinngg WWeebblleett IInnssttaallllaattiioonn aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Weblet Settings.

3. Touch Weblet Install Policy.

4. Touch Allow Installation.

5. Touch OK.

EEnnaabblliinngg WWeebblleett IInnssttaallllaattiioonn iinn tthhee EEmmbbeeddddeedd WWeebb SSeerrvveerr

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Apps→Custom Apps→Weblet Management.

2. Click Security Installation Policy.

3. For Weblet, select Allow Weblet Installation.

4. Click Apply.

314

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Customization and Expansion

IInnssttaalllliinngg aa WWeebblleett aatt tthhee CCoonnttrrooll PPaanneell

Before you begin, save the .weblet file to a USB Flash drive.

1. At the control panel touch screen, touch Device, then touch Tools.

2. Touch App Settings→Weblet Settings.

3. Touch Weblet Management.

4. Touch Install from USB.

5. Insert the USB Flash drive. Follow the instructions on the touch screen.

6. Browse to the appropriate file folder on the USB Flash drive, then touch the .weblet file that you

want to install.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg WWeebblleett SSeettttiinnggss

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Apps→Custom Apps→Weblet Management.

2. In the Installed Weblets area, for a weblet, click Edit.

3. To hide or display the weblet icon on the control panel Apps screen, for Displayed on Touch

Interface, click Edit.

4. To configure the weblet application as the default control panel entry screen, for Default Walk-Up

Screen, click Edit.

5. To configure user access to the weblet application, for User Permissions, click Edit.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg XXeerrooxx

®®

AApppp GGaalllleerryy SSeettttiinnggss

You can download weblets from the Xerox Home Page.

To configure Xerox

App Gallery settings:

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Apps→Custom Apps→Weblet Management.

2. In the Installed Weblets area, for Xerox

App Gallery, click Edit.

3. To hide or display the Xerox

App Gallery icon on the control panel Apps screen:

• For Displayed on Touch Interface, click Edit.

• For Xerox

App Gallery, select the check box.

• Click Save.

4. To configure the Xerox

App Gallery as the default control panel entry screen:

• For Default Walk-Up Screen, click Edit.

• For Default Walkup Screen, from the list, select Xerox

App Gallery.

• Click Save.

5. To configure user access to the Xerox

App Gallery:

• For User Permissions, click Edit.

• On the Non-Logged-In Users tab, in the Permission Role area, for Non-Logged-In User, click

Edit.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

315

Customization and Expansion

• Select the Apps and Tools tab.

• For AppGallery/AppEncrypted, select an option:

• Allowed: This option permits Xerox

App Gallery usage.

• Not Allowed: This option restricts Xerox

App Gallery usage, but its icon appears on the

control panel touch screen.

• Not Allowed & Hidden: This option restricts Xerox

App Gallery usage and its icon does

not appear on the control panel touch screen.

6. Click Apply.

316

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Customization and Expansion

Managing Diagnostics and Usage Information

You can send diagnostic information to Xerox or start an online troubleshooting session to help you

solve any device issues.

Note: Before you send diagnostic information to Xerox, ensure that you configure Remote

Services. For details, refer to Remote Services or Xerox Smart eSolutions.

To manage diagnostics and usage information:

In the Embedded Web Server, click Support→General.

• To send diagnostic information to Xerox, click Send diagnostic Information to Xerox.

• To send device diagnostics information to Xerox for analysis of detected issues and to match with

current solutions, click Start an Online Troubleshooting Session at www.xerox.com.

• To download usage information to your local computer, click Download File to Your Computer.

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

317

Customization and Expansion

Editing Support Settings

You can customize the device support information with your company information. You can use this

information to locate assistance or contact your system administrator. You can send diagnostic

information to Xerox or start an online troubleshooting session to help you solve any device issues.

1. In the Embedded Web Server, click Support→General.

2. Click Edit Settings.

3. For Device Administrator, type contact information for your administrator.

4. For Xerox

Support, type information for your Technical Customer Support contact, service

contact, and supplies contact. You can include internal locations, telephone contacts, or other

information.

5. Click Apply.

6. When completed, click Close.

318

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Customization and Expansion

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

319

Audit Log Event Identification Numbers

Event Identification Number

Description

1 System startup

2 System shutdown

3 Manual On-Demand Image Overwrite (ODIO)

Standard started

4 Manual ODIO Standard (complete)

5 Print job

6 Network scan job

7 Server fax job

8 Internet fax job

9 Email job

10 Audit Log disabled

11 Audit Log enabled

12 Copy job

13 Embedded fax

14 LAN Fax job

15 Data encryption enabled

16 Manual ODIO Full (start)

17 Manual ODIO Full (complete)

18 Data encryption disabled

20 Scan to Mailbox job

21 Delete File/Dir

23 Scan to Home

320

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Audit Log Event Identification Numbers

Event Identification Number

Description

24 Scan to Home job

26 PagePack login

27 PostScript passwords

29 Network user login

30 System admin login

31 User login

32 Service login diagnostics

33 Audit Log download

34 IIO feature status

35 System admin pin changed

36 Audit Log file saved

37 SSL

38 X509 certificate

39 IPsec (enable/disable/configure)

40 SNMPv3

41 IP Filtering rules

42 Network Authentication (enable/disable/configure)

43 Device clock

44 Software upgrade

45 Cloning

46 Scan metadata validation

47 Xerox

Secure Authentication (enable/disable/

configure)

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

321

Audit Log Event Identification Numbers

Event Identification Number

Description

48 Service login copy mode

49 Smartcard access

50 Process terminated

51 ODIO scheduled

53 CPSR backup

54 CPSR restore

55 System Administrator Tools admin access

57 Session Timer log out

58 Session Timer interval change

59 Feature Access Control (configure)

60 Device clock NTP (enable/disable)

61 Grant/revoke admin rights

62 Smartcard (enable/disable/configure)

63 IPv6 (enable/disable/configure)

64 802.1X (enable/disable/configure)

65 Abnormal system termination

66 Local Authentication (enable/disable)

67 Web User Interface Authentication (Enable Network

or Local)

68 FIPS 140 mode (enable/disable/configure)

69 Xerox

Secure Access login

70 Print from USB (enable/disable)

71 USB port (enable/disable)

322

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Audit Log Event Identification Numbers

Event Identification Number

Description

72 Scan to USB (enable/disable)

73 System log download

74 Scan to USB job

75 Remote UI feature

76 Remote UI session

77 Remote Scan feature (TWAIN Driver enable/disable)

78 Remote Scan job submitted

79 Scan to Web Service job completed (TWAIN driver

remote scan job)

80 SMTP connection encryption

81 Email Domain Filtering rule

82 Software self test started

83 Software self test completed

84 McAfee Security state

85 McAfee Security event

87 McAfee Agent

88 Digital Certificate import failure

89 User name (add/delete)

90 User name password change

91 Embedded fax job Secure Print passcode

92 Scan to Mailbox folder password change

93 Embedded fax mailbox passcode

94 FTP/SFTP Filing passive mode

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

323

Audit Log Event Identification Numbers

Event Identification Number

Description

95 Embedded Fax Forwarding rule

96 Xerox Extensible Interface Platform® Weblets allow

install

97 Xerox Extensible Interface Platform® Weblets install

98 Xerox Extensible Interface Platform® Weblets

(enable/disable)

99 Network connectivity (enable/disable/configure)

100 Address Book permissions

101 Address Book export

102 SW upgrade (enable/disable)

103 Supplies Plan activation

104 Plan conversion

105 IPv4 (enable/disable/configure)

106 System Administrator password reset

107 Convenience Authentication login

108 Convenience Authentication (enable/disable/

configure)

109 Embedded fax passcode length

110 Custom Authentication login

111 Custom Authentication (enable/disable/configure)

112 Billing Impression mode

113 AirPrint (enable/disable/configure)

114 Device Cloning (enable/disable)

115 Save for reprint job

324

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Audit Log Event Identification Numbers

Event Identification Number

Description

116 Web UI Access configure

117 System log push to Xerox

119 Scan to WebDAV job

120 Mopria Print (enable/disable)

121 Point-of-sale credit card API (enable/disable)

122 Point-of-sale data transfer

123 Near Field Communication (enable/disable)

124 Invalid login attempt lockout

125 Protocol audit log (enable/disable)

126 Display device information (configure)

127 Invalid login lockout expires

128 Erase customer data

129 Audit log SFTP scheduled (configure)

130 Audit log SFTP transfer

131 Remote software download (enable/disable)

132 AirPrint & Mopria Scanning (Enable/Disable/

Configure)

133 AirPrint & Mopria Scan Job Submitted

134 AirPrint & Mopria Scan Job Completed

136 Remote Services NVM Write

137 Remote Services FIK Install

138 Remote Services Data Push139

139 Remote Services (Enable/Disable)

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

325

Audit Log Event Identification Numbers

Event Identification Number

Description

140 Restore (Enable/Disable)

141 Backup-Restore file downloaded

142 Backup-Restore restore installed

143 Google Cloud Services (Enabled/Disabled/Configured)

144 User or Group Role Assignment (Added/Removed)

145 User Permission Role (Created/Deleted/Configured)

146 Admin Password Policy Configure

147 Local user account password policy

148 Restricted admin login

149 Grant / revoke restricted admin rights

150 Manual session logout

151 IPP (Enable/Disable/Configure)

152 HTTP Proxy Server (Enable/Disable/Configure)

153 Remote Services Software Download

154 Restricted Admin Permission Role (Created/Deleted/

Configured)

155 EIP Weblet Installation Security Policy

156 Lockdown and Remediate Security

157 Lockdown Security Check Complete

159 Send Engineering Logs on Data Push (Enabled/

Disabled)

326

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

Audit Log Event Identification Numbers

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

327

External Keyboard

You can connect the external keyboard directly to your device using the USB ports. Wi-Fi Direct

keyboards are not supported.

Depending on the feature, you can use the external keyboard to navigate fields and manage input.

Note: These keys are not enabled on all screens.

Key

Action

Tab Moves the cursor from one field to another in the

address book

Esc Cancels input

Enter Submits input

External Keyboard Shortcuts

You can use shortcuts on the external keyboard instead of buttons on the control panel.

Control Panel Function

Keyboard Shortcut

Home CTRL+8

Device CTRL+F3

Reset CTRL+F5

Power Saver / Power Off / Restart CTRL+F7

Language CTRL+2

328

Xerox

AltaLink

Series Multifunction Printer

System Administrator Guide

External Keyboard